A COURSE OF
^Ti
Illll
8 m W5bb^3R^F^3b
^^StaS^fe^**" *f< "fain
LIBRARY
UNIVERSITY OF
CALIFORNIA
SAN DIEGO
Digitized by the Internet Archive
<- . in 2007 with funding from
Microsoft Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/clairvoyanceoccuOOpanciala
V COURSE or
1DVI/INCED
WMDK
ANO
OCC01TPOWER5
INCLUDING
CLAIRVOYANCE, CLAIRAUDIENCE
PREMONITION AND IMPRESSIONS
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY
CLAIRVOYANT CRYSTAL-GAZING
DISTANT CLAIRVOYANCE
PAST CLAIRVOYANCE
FUTURE CLAIRVOYANCE
SECOND-SIGHT
PREVISION
CLAIRVOYANT DEVELOPMENT
ASTRAL- BODY TRAVELLING
ASTRAL-PLANE PHENOMENA
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE— Personal and Distant
PSYCHIC ATTRACTION
PSYCHIC HE AUNG
TELEPATHY
MIND- READING
THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE and other
PSYCHIC PHENOMENA
315 PAGES, MOROCCO, STAMPED GENUINE GOLD
PRICE $3.00 - CLOTH $2.00 - POSTPAID
wiVwfiaJasi
Author of 'TheHuMAN Aura
Mmt^aaaaaW^C
"n _ a
All Correspondence must be addressed
C. ALEXANDER,
239 So. Oxford Ave.,
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
or it will not reach.
GO.
a / ^
COPYRIGHT. 1916
BY
ADVANCED THOUGHT PUB. CO.,
CHICAGO, ILL.
SYNOPSIS OF THE LESSONS
LESSON I
THE ASTRAL SENSES
™. T^e skeptical person who "believes only the evidence of his senses ■
The man who has much to say about "horse sense." "Common ?Sen 4"
versus Uncommon Senses. The ordinary five senses are nSt the Snlv
senses. The ordinary senses are not as infallible as many think them
Illusions of the five physical senses. What is back of the o?gans of
physical sense. All senses an evolution of the sense of feeling. How
the mind receives the report of the senses. The Real Knower behind
S.%f f£S,eS\> What &e unAfol<Hng of new senses means to man The super-
physical senses The Astral Senses. Man has seven physical censes
nn.^eadw£ ?e£ly flIe', Each Physical sense has its astral sense counter-
R, • X hat the astral senses are. Sensing on the astral plane. How
™.T#dijKlnrtl*niL0,l.the.a£tral plane- °y means of tbe as*ral senses.
the unfolding of the Astral Senses opens up a new world of experience
to mtm.
Page 13
LESSON II
TELEPATHY vs. CLAIRVOYANCE
The two extra physical senses of man. The extra sense of "th»
presence of other living things." The "telepathic sensed How man
may sense the presence of other living things apart from the oDeritioS
of his ordinary five physical senses. This power is strongly developed
in savages and barbarians, but has become atrophied in most civ lized
{^ei!,.by,nCOnHtlKUed diS^se- P -is now ^stigal in civilized man, but mav
be developed by practice. Animals have this extra sense highly devel-
oped, and it plays a very important part in their protection from
enemies ; their capture of prey, ete. The strange actions of dogs, horses,
etc., explained. How the geese saved Rome by reason of this sense. All
hunters have experienced evidences of the existence of this sense on the
part of animals. The physical telepathic sense. How it operates. Inter-
esting instances of its possession by animals, and savage tribes. Women
possess it strongly. The distinction between this form of thought-
transference and clairvoyance.
Page 28
LESSON III
TELEPATHY EXPLAINED
What "telepathy" means. The mental process by which one "known
at a distance." The sending and receiving of waves and currents of
thought and feeling. Thought vibrations, and how they are caused
The part played by the cerebrum, cerebellum, and medulla oblongata—
the three brains of man. The part played by the solar plexus and other
great nervous centres. How thought messages are received. How states
of emotional excitement are transmitted to others. The Pineal Gland-
what it is, and what it does. The important part it plays in telepathy
and thought-transference. Mental atmospheres. Psychic atmospheres of
audiences, towns, houses, stores, etc. Why you are not affected by all
thought vibrations in equal measure and strength. How thought vibra-
tions are neutralized. Affinities and repulsions between different thought
vibrations. Interesting facts concerning telepathy. Scientific explana-
tions of telepathy.
Page 43
LESSON IT
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY
The important investigations of the Society for Psychical Research.
True telepathy and pseudo-telepathy; how they are distinguished by
scientists. Strict tests imposed in investigations. The celebrated "Creery
Experiments," and how they were conducted. The elaboration of the
"guessing" game. Seventeen cards chosen right, in straight succession.
Precautions against fraud or collusion. Two hundred and ten successes
out of a possible three hundred and eighty-two. Science pronounces
the results as entirely beyond the law of coincidences and mathematical
probability; and that the phenomena were genuine and real telepathy.
Still more wonderful tests. Telepathy an incontestable reality. A
psychic force transmitting ideas and thoughts." Interesting cases or
spontaneous telepathy, scientifically proven. Extracts from the scientific
records. Cold scientific reports read like a romance, and prove beyond
doubt the reality of this great field of phenomena. p _
LESSON V
MIND-READING, AND BEYOND
What "Mind-Reading" is. The two phases of Mind-Reading. Mind-
Reading with physical contact; and without physical contact. Why the
scientific investigators make the distinction. Why science has been over-
cautious; and how it falls short of the full understanding of contact
Mind- Reading. How the thought- waves flow along the nerves of the
projector and recipient. Like telegraphy over wires, as compared with
the wireless method. How to learn by actual experience, and not alone
by reading books. How to experiment for yourself; and how to obtain
the best results in Mind-Reading. The working principles of Mind-Read-
ing stated. Full directions and instruction given for the successful per-
formance of the interesting feats. This lesson is really a little manual of
practical instruction in Mind-Reading, and the higher phases of Thought-
Transference. The person carefully studying and applying the principles
taught therein should become very proficient in both private and public
manifestations. _ _.
Page 74
LESSON VI
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY
What Clairvoyance really is; and what it is not. The faculty of
acquiring super-normal knowledge of facts and happening at a distance,
or in past or future time, independent of the ordinary senses, and inde-
pendent of telepathic reading of the minds of others. The different kinds
of Clairvoyance described. What is Psychometry? Clairvoyant en rap-
port relations on the astral plane, with distant, past or future happen-
ings and events ; by means of a connecting material link. How to obtain
the psychic affinity or astral relation to other things by means of a bit
of stone, lock of hair, article of wearing apparel, etc. Interesting in-
stances of clairvoyant psychometry. How to go about the work of
psychometrizing. How to develop the power. How to secure the best
conditions; and what to do when you have obtained them. Psychometry
develops the occultist for still higher clairvoyant powers.
Page 90
LESSON VII
CLAIRVOYANT CRYSTAL-GAZING
The second great method of securing clairvoyant en rapport relations
with the astral plane. How the crystal, magic-mirror, etc., serves to
focus the psychic energy of the clairvoyant person. The crystal serves
the purpose of a psychic microscope or telescope. How crystals tend to
become polarized to the vibrations of their owner. Why crystals should
be preserved for the personal use of their owners. The use of crystals,
or other forms of shining objects, by different peoples in ancient and
modern times. How they are employed In Australia, New Zealand, Fiji
Islands, South America, etc., by the primitive tribes. Various substi-
tutes for the crystal. Full directions for Crystal Gazing. Complete in-
structions and warnings. All stages described, from the first "milky
mist" to the clearly defined "psychic photograph." The Astral Tube,
and the part It plays in Crystal Gazing. A complete little text-book of
the subject.
Pago 103
LESSON VIII
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE
The higher forms of Clairvoyance, and how they may be cultivated
and acquired. Trance conditions not essential to highest Clairvoyance,
although often connected therewith. In Clairvoyant Reverie, the clair-
voyant does not become unconscious; but merely "shuts out" the out-
side world of sights and sounds. Shifting the consciousness from the
physical plane to the astral. Clairvoyant Reverie may be safely and
effectively induced by mental concentration alone. Artificial methods
dangerous, and not advised by best authorities. Abnormal conditions
not desirable. The "one pointed" mind. The Clairvoyant "day dream"
or "brown study." False "psychic development." Use of hypnotic
drugs strongly condemned. Scientific psychological methods stated and
taught. The laws of attention and concentration of the mind. How
Clairvoyance develops by this method. The true occult instruction given
fully.
Page 120
LESSON IX
SIMPLE CLAIRVOYANCE
What the Clairvoyant senses in Simple Clairvoyance. Perception
of the Aura, and Auric Emanations of others ; Psychic Vibrations ; Astral
Colors; Thought Currents, Waves and Vibrations, etc., are features of
Simple Clairvoyance. The beautiful kaleidoscopic spectacle of the Auric
changes. The Prana Aura, and its appearances. The Mental and Emo-
tional Aura, and its many interesting phases. Perception of Astral
Thought-Forms. Other Astral Phenomena. The Astral World, and its
Myriad Manifestations. Strange aspects of Astral Visioning. "Seeing
through a Brick-wall." The X-Ray Vision. Reading from closed books,
sealed envelopes, etc., and how it is explainable. Seeing into the depths
of the earth, and the occult explanation thereof. The Laws and Princi-
ples of this Extraordinary Power. Magnifying and Diminishing Clair-
voyant Vision. A wonderful field for experiment opened out for the
student.
Page 136
LESSON X
CLAIRVOYANCE OF DISTANT SCENES
The characteristics of Space Clairvoyance. The Astral Seeing of Dis-
tant Scenes; and through intervening objects. Remarkable instances
of this power, well authenticated and established. Interesting and
instructive historical cases recorded and explained. Testimony of the
Society for Psychical Research concerning this phase of Clairvoyance.
The interesting case of W. T. Stead, the celebrated English writer, who
went down on the "Titanic." The important testimony of Swedenborg,
the eminent religious teacher. Other well-authenticated cases happening
to well-known persons. The evidence collected by the Society for
Psychical Research. Interesting German case. Why so many cases of
this kind happen when the person is on his death-bed, or seriously ill.
Why such experiences often occur in dreams. Actual "appearance" of
persons at a distance, and how explained. Important and interesting
facts recited in connection with this phase of Clairvoyance.
Page 151
LESSON XI
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE PAST
The clairvoyant perception of the facts, events and happenings of
past time. There is no difference in the nature of this strange phenom-
enon, whether the past time be but five minutes or else five thousand
years. How is it possible to "see" a thing that no longer exists? The
"just how" of this strange happening. Nothing could be perceived if it
had actually disappeared from existence. But nothing entirely disappears
in fact. On the astral plane are recorded all things, events and hap-
penings since the beginning of the present world-cycle. The "Akashic
Records;" or the "Astral Light;" constitute the great record books of
the past. The clairvoyant gaining access to these may read the past
like a book. Analogies in physical science. Interesting scientific facts.
What astronomy teaches on the subject. How the records of the past
are stored. How they are read by the clairvoyant. A fascinating sub-
ject clearly presented and explained.
J Page 167
LESSON XII
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE FUTURE
The clairvoyant power manifest in all forms of perception of facts,
happenings and events of future time. Explanation of Prophecy, Pre-
vision, Foretelling, Second-Sight, etc. These powers not supernatural;
but are merely the development of the clairvoyant faculties. How may
a thing be "seen" years before it really exists. Nothing could be seen,
unless it existed in some form, at least potential and latent. Keen per-
ception of the subconscious faculties. Subconscious reasoning from cause
to effect. Coming events cast their shadows before. Fate vs. Free- Will.
"Time is but a relative mode of regarding things." ''Events may, in
some sense, exist always, both past and future." Time like a moving-
picture reel, containing the future scene at the present moment, though
out of sight. Analogy of dream-time. An Absolute Consciousness in
which past, present and future exist as a single perception. A glimpse
of a transcendental truth. How to acquire the faculty of Future-
Clairvoyance.
Page 182
LESSON XIII
SECOND-SIGHT, PREVISION, ETC.
Many persons, in all times, in all lands, have possessed the gift
of looking into the future. Not a superstition, but a scientific fact. The
investigations of the scientific bodies. The Society for Psychical Re-
search, and its reports on this phase of Clairvoyance. Interesting case
told by a leading Theosophist. Tragedy and Funeral foreseen by Clair-
voyant Prevision, or Second-Sight. Historical instances. George Fox,
the Quaker, and his Second-Sight. The prophecy of the Death of Caesar.
Biblical instances. The celebrated case of Cazotte, which has become a
matter of history. How Cazotte foretold the coming of the French
Revolution, including the fate of eminent personages present at the
time of the prophecy. A startling occurrence, well worthy of careful
study. The historical case of the assassination of Spencer Perceval,
Chancellor of the Exchequer. Other well-authenticated cases. Symbolic
visions. Irish and Scotch cases.
Page 197
LESSON XIV
ASTRAL-BODY TRAVELING
Astral visioning in Clairvoyance, and visioning by means of the
Astral Body. The difference between the two phases of clairvoyant
phenomena. The characteristics of Astral-Body traveling. How one
traveling in the Astral Body may "see all around him," instead of
merely gazing at an astral picture. Limitations of Astral-Body vision-
ing. What the Astral-Body really is; and what it is like. How it dis-
engages itself from the physical body, and travels in space. Many per-
sons "travel in the astral" during ordinary sleep. Occult teachings
regarding Astral-Body traveling. How dying persons often travel in the
astral-body, before death. Many interesting cases cited, all well-authen-
ticated by scientific investigation. Society for Psychical Research's rec-
ords and reports on such cases. Dangers of uninstructed persons going
out on the astral, except In dream state. "Fools rush in where angels
fear to tread." A timely warning. A most important and interesting
subject.
Page 212
LESSON XV
STRANGE ASTRAL PHENOMENA
Additional phases of Astral Phenomena. Projection of Thought-
Forms. Something between ordinary Clairvoyance and Astral-Body
perception. What a Thought-Form is. How it is created. What it does.
Where it goes. How a portion of one's consciousness is projected in a
Thought-Form. Using a Thought-Form as at out-post, or observation
point. How things appear when viewed from a Thought-Form. A won-
derful phase of occult phenomena. Advantages and disadvantages of
this form of clairvoyant visioning. Hindu Psychic Magic, and how it is
performed. Remarkable illusory effects produced by Hindu Magicians.
All is explained when the principle of the creation and projection of
Thought-Forms is understood. Why the Hindus excel in this phase of
occultism. An interesting description of Hindu Magic feats. The power
of concentrated "visualization." The phenomena of Levitation, or the
moving of articles at a distance. The occult explanation of this phe-
nomenon. Natural explanation for so-called "super-natural" occurrences.
Page 227
LESSON XVI
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE: ITS LAWS AND PRINCIPLES
The laws and principles underlying the power of one mind to in-
fluence and affect another mind. More than ordinary telepathy. The
inductive power of mental vibrations. Everything is in vibration. Mental
vibrations are much higher in the scale than are physical vibrations.
What "induction" is. How a mental state, or an emotional feeling, tends
to induce a similar state in another mind. Many instances cited. The
different degrees of vibratory influence, and what causes the difference.
The contagious effect of a "strong feeling." Why a strong desire has a
dynamic effect in certain cases. The power of visualization in Psychic
Influence. The Attractive Power of Thought. The effect of Mental Con-
centration. Focusing your Forces. Holding the mind to a state of "one-
pointedness." Why the occultist controls his imagination. Suggestions
as to practice, and rules of development. A few easily-mastered prin-
ciples which give you the key to the whole of this wonderful subject.
Page 243
LESSON XVII
PERSONAL PSYCHIC INFLUENCE OVER OTHERS
Psychic Influence exerted over others, when in their presence. Dif-
ferent degrees of tbe influence. Possession of this power by Alexander
the Great, Napoleon Bonaparte, Julius Caesar, and other great leaders
of men. The ability to influence others is a sure sign of the possession
of this psychic power. The Three Underlying Principles of Psychic In-
fluence. The importance of strong desire to influence and exert power.
The importance of clear, positive mental pictures of what effect you wish
to produce. The importance of the firm concentration of your mind on
the subject. The creation of a positive psychic atmosphere. The Posi-
tive-Psychic Aura. How to project your Psychic Power. The Psychic
Struggle between two persons. How to handle yourself in such con-
flicts of Psychic Power. How to Neutralize the Psychic Power of others,
and thus disarm them. The Occult Shield of Defence. Valuable direc-
tions regarding practice and development of Psychic Power. Scientific
Exercises for Development. Important Rules of Practice.
Page 257
LESSON XVIII
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE AT A DISTANCE
Psychic Influence over others, manifested when they are distant from
the person exerting the influence. Distance no obstacle. Psychic In-
duction at Long-Range. How to create the en rapport condition with the
other person. How to protect yourself against such influence at a dis-
tance. The Psychic Armor. Psychometric Method of producing Dis-
tant En Rapport Condition. To proceed when the en rapport condition
is secured. The scientific explanation of the old tales about sorcery,
witchcraft, super-natural influence, etc. The effect of fear, and belief!
on the mind of the other person. The effect of Denial. The secret of
many strange cases made plain. Some typical cases. The Master-Key
which unlocks the doors of many Mysteries. Low forms of Occultism,
and how they may be defeated. Dangerous Teachings in some quarters.
Warnings against their use. The Astral Tube; how it is erected, used
and employed. A simple, plain explanation of a puzzling occult mani-
festation. Self- Protection.
Page 273
LESSON XIX
LAWS OP PSYCHIC ATTRACTION
How psychic vibrations tend to attract to their creator other per-
sons vibrating along the same lines; and things having a relation to the
things thought of. Harmony and Inharmony in the Psychic World. The
Law of Psychic Attraction. The Law of Psychic Repulsion. An im-
portant phase of Astral Phenomena. The Law works two ways. It
draws other persons and things to you ; and you to other persons and
things. How the men of "big business" operate under this Law of
Attraction. How scheming exploiters of the public actually "treat the
public" by psychic means. The various forms of psychic influence em-
ployed by persons of this kind. The Law of Attraction, and how it
works out in Business Life. The scientific facts behind the outward
appearance of things. Instances and examples of the working out of
these laws and principles. The Law of Psychic Attraction is as con-
stant and invariable as the great Law of Gravitation, or Magnetic Attrac-
tion. The Co-Relation of Thoughts and Things. How we may create our
own environment by Psychic Influence.
Page 288
LESSON XX
PSYCHIC AND MAGNETIC HEALING
The Psychic Principles underlying the many forms of psychic or
mental healing. Many theories — one set of principles. Psychic Healing
as old as the race. The Basic Principles of Psychic Healing. The
Physiological Principles involved. How the Astral Body is used in
Psychic Healing. Human Magnetism, and what it really is. All about
Prana. The Laying-on of Hands in Healing; and what is back of it.
What happens in Magnetic Healing. The Secret of Absent Healing.
Space no barrier in Psychic Healing. The Human Aura and Psychic
Healing. The Secret of Suggestive Therapeutics. The effect of the
"affirmations" of the healers. How the Healing Cults obtain good re-
sults. Self-Healing by Psychic Power. Absent Healing by Psychic
Power. How to "treat" others by Absent Treatment. Valuable Instruc-
tions and Practical Methods cf Psychic Healing. The whole subject con-
densed, and made plain, so that it may be applied by any person of aver-
age intelligence. No fanciful theories; only plain, practical facts for
actual application.
Page 304
INTRODUCTION.
In preparing this series of lessons for students
of Western lands, I have been compelled to pro-
ceed along lines exactly opposite to those which
I would have chosen had these lessons been for
students in India. This because of the diametric-
ally opposite mental attitudes of the students of
these two several lands.
The student in India expects the teacher to
state positively the principles involved, and the
methods whereby these principles may be mani-
fested, together with frequent illustrations (gen-
erally in the nature of fables or parables), serv-
ing to link the new knowledge to some already
known thing. The Hindu student never expects
or demands anything in the nature of "proof"
of the teachers statements of principle or meth-
od; in fact, he would regard it as an insult to
the teacher to ask for the same. Consequently,
he does not look for, or ask, specific instances or
illustrations in the nature of scientific evidence
or proof of the principles taught. He may ask
for more information, but solely for the purpose
of bringing out some point which he has not
grasped; but he avoids as a pestilence any ques-
tion seeming to indicate argument, doubt of
what is being taught him, or of the nature of a
demand for proof or evidence.
The Western student, on the other hand, is
accustomed to maintaining the skeptical attitude
of mind — the scientific attitude of doubt and de-
mand for proof — and the teacher so understands
10 INTRODUCTION
it. Both are accustomed to illustrations bring-
ing out the principles involved, but these illustra-
tions must not be fanciful or figurative — they
must be actual cases, well authenticated and
vouched for as evidence. In short, the Western
teacher is expected to actually "prove" to his
students his principles and methods, before he
may expect them to be accepted. This, of course,
not from any real doubt or suspicion of the verac-
ity or ability of the teacher, but merely because
the Western mind expects to question, and be
questioned, in this way in the process of teaching
and learning.
Consequently, in this series of lessons, I have
sought to follow the Western method rather than
the Hindu. So far as is possible, I have avoided
the flat positive statement of principles and meth-
ods, and have sought to prove each step of the
teaching. Of course, I have been compelled to
assume the existence of certain fundamental
principles, in order to avoid long and technical
metaphysical and philosophical discussions. I
have also had to content myself with the positive
flat assertion of the existence of the Astral Plane,
Akashic Records, Prana, etc., which are funda-
mental postulates of Hindu philosophy and oc-
cult science — for these are established solely by
the experience of those who are able to function
on the higher planes themselves. But, beyond
this I have sought to prove by direct and positive
evidence (adapted to the Western mind) every
step of my teaching and methods.
In offering this scientific proof, I have pur-
INTRODUCTION 11
posely omitted (except in a few instances) all
mention of occult or psychic phenomena occur-
ring in India, and have confined myself to in-
stances occurring in Western lands to Western
persons. Moreover, I have avoided quoting and
citing Hindu authorities, and have, instead,
quoted and cited from authorities well known
and respected in Western lands, such as the So-
ciety for Psychical Research, and the prominent
scientists interested in the work of the said so-
ciety. In this way I have sought to furnish the
Western student with examples, cases, and illus-
trations familiar to him, and easily referred to.
Had I cited Indian cases, I might be accused of
offering proof that could not be easily verified;
and quoting persons unknown to my readers.
There is a wealth of such cases and illustrations
in India, naturally, but these as a rule are tradi-
tional and not available in printed form; and
these would not likely be very satisfactory to the
Western student.
I must, however, positively and firmly state
that while these cases and illustrations, these
quotations and citations, are purely Western, the
principles they illustrate and prove are among
the oldest known to Hindu occult science and
philosophy. In fact, having been accepted as
proven truth in India, for centuries past, there
is very little demand for further proof thereof
on the part of the Hindus. In the Western world,
however, these things are comparatively new,
and must be proved and attested accordingly.
So, as I have said, I have cut the cloth of my in-
12 INTRODUCTION
struction to conform with the pattern favored for
the Western garment of knowledge. So far as
the illustrations and cases, the quotations and
citations are concerned — these are purely West-
ern and familiar to the student. But, when it
comes to the principles themselves, this is an-
other matter — I must be pardoned for stating
that these are the outgrowth of Hindu thought
and investigation, and that he who would dis-
cover their roots must dig around the tree of the
Wisdom of the East, which has stood the storms
and winds of thousands of years. But the
branches of this mighty tree are wide-spreading,
and there is room for many Western students to
rest in its shade and shelter.
In these lessons I have referred occasionally to
my two little books, entitled "The Astral
World," and "The Human Aura," respectively.
To those who are interested in these subjects, I
recommend these little books; they are sold at a
nominal price, and contain much that will be
helpful to the student of Hindu Occult Science.
They are not required, however, to complete the
understanding of the subjects treated upon in
these lessons, and are mentioned and recom-
mended merely as supplementary reading for the
student who wishes to take little "side excur-
sions" away from the main trip covered in these
lessons.
I trust that my students will find the pleas-
ure and satisfaction in studying these lessons
that I have in writing them.
May, 1916. SWAMI PANCHADASI.
LESSON I.
THE ASTRAL SENSES.
The student of occultism usually is quite famil-
iar with the crass individual who assumes the
cheap skeptical attitude toward occult matters,
which attitude he expresses in his would-be
"smart" remark that he "believes only in what
his senses perceive." He seems to think that his
cheap wit has finally disposed of the matter, the
implication being that the occultist is a cred-
ulous, "easy" person who believes in the exist-
ence of things contrary to the evidence of the
senses.
While the opinion or views of persons of this
class are, of course, beneath the serious concern
of any true student of occultism, nevertheless the
mental attitude of such persons are worthy of our
passing consideration, inasmuch as it serves to
give us an object lesson regarding the childlike
attitude of the average so-called "practical" per-
sons regarding the matter of the evidence of the
senses.
These so-called practical persons have much
to say regarding their senses. They are fond of
speaking of "the evidence of my senses." They
also have much to say about the possession of
"good sense" on their part; of having "sound
common sense"; and often they make the strange
boast that they have "horse sense," seeming to
consider this a great possession. Alas, for the
pretensions of this class of persons. They are
14 CLAIRVOYANCE
usually found quite credulous regarding matters
beyond their everyday field of work and thought,
and accept without question the most ridiculous
teachings and dogmas reaching them from the
voice of some claimed authority, while they sneer
at some advanced teaching which their minds are
incapable of comprehending. Anything which
seems unusual to them is deemed "flighty," and
lacking in appeal to their much prized "horse
sense."
But, it is not my intention to spend time in
discussing these insignificant half-penny intel-
lects. I have merely alluded to them in order to
bring to your mind the fact that to many persons
the idea of "sense* and that of "senses" is very
closely allied. They consider all knowledge and
wisdom as "sense;" and all such sense as being
derived directly from their ordinary five senses.
They ignore almost completely the intuitional
phases of the mind, and are unaware of many of
the higher processes of reasoning.
Such persons accept as undoubted anything
that their senses report to them. They consider
it heresy to question a report of the senses. One
of their favorite remarks is that "it almost makes
me doubt my senses." They fail to perceive that
their senses, at the best, are very imperfect in-
struments, and that the mind is constantly em-
ployed in correcting the mistaken report of the
ordinary five senses.
Not to speak of the common phenomenon of
color-blindness, in which one color seems to be
another, our senses are far from being exact. We
THE ASTRAL SENSES 15
may, by suggestion, be made to imagine that we
smell or taste certain things which do not exist,
and hypnotic subjects may be caused to see
things that have no existence save in the imag-
ination of the person. The familiar experiment
of the person crossing his first two fingers, and
placing them on a small object, such as a pea or
the top of a lead-pencil, shows us how "mixed"
the sense of feeling becomes at times. The many
familiar instances of optical delusions show us
that even our sharp eyes may deceive us — every
conjuror knows how easy it is to deceive the eye
by suggestion and false movements.
Perhaps the most familiar example of mis-
taken sense-reports is that of the movement of
the earth. The senses of every person report to
him that the earth is a fixed, immovable body,
and that the sun, moon, planets, and stars move
around the earth every twenty-four hours. It is
only when one accepts the reports of the reason-
ing faculties, that he knows that the earth not
only whirls around on its axis every twenty-four
hours, but that it circles around the sun every
three hundred and sixty-five days; and that even
the sun itself, carrying with it the earth and the
other planets, really moves along in space, mov-
ing toward or around some unknown point far
distant from it. If there is any one particular
report of the senses which would seem to be be-
yond doubt or question, it certainly would be this
elementary sense report of the fixedness of the
earth beneath our feet, and the movements of the
heavenly bodies around it — and yet we know that
this is merely an illusion, and that the facts of
16 CLAIRVOYANCE
the case are totally different. Again, how few-
persons really realize that the eye perceives
things up-side-down, and that the mind only
gradually acquires the trick of adjusting the im-
pression?
I am not trying to make any of you doubt the
report of his or her five senses. That would be
most foolish, for all of us must needs depend upon
these five senses in our everyday affairs, and
would soon come to grief were we to neglect
their reports. Instead, I am trying to acquaint
you with the real nature of these five senses, that
you may realize what they are not, as well as
what they are; and also that you may realize
that there is no absurdity in believing that there
are more channels of information open to the
ego, or soul of the person, than these much used
five senses. When you once get a correct scien-
tific conception of the real nature of the five ordi-
nary senses, you will be able to intelligently
grasp the nature of the higher psychic faculties
or senses, and thus be better fitted to use them.
So, let us take a few moments time in order to
get this fundamental knowledge well fixed in our
minds.
What are the five senses, anyway. Your first
answer will be: "Feeling, seeing, hearing, tast-
ing, smelling." But that is merely a recital of
the different forms of sensing. What is a "sense,"
when you get right down to it? Well, you will
find that the dictionary tells us that a sense is a
"facult)', possessed by animals, of perceiving ex-
ternal objects by means of impressions made
THE ASTRAL SENSES 17
upon certain organs of the body." Getting right
down to the roots of the matter, we find that the
five senses of man are the channels through
which he becomes aware or conscious of infor-
mation concerning objects outside of himself.
But, these senses are not the sense-organs alone.
Back of the organs there is a peculiar arrange-
ment of the nervous system, or brain centres,
which take up the messages received through the
organs; and back of this, again, is the ego, or
soul, or mind, which, at the last, is the real
KNOWER. The eye is merely a camera; the
ear, merely a receiver of sound-waves; the nose,
merely an arrangement of sensitive mucous
membrane; the mouth and tongue, simply a con-
tainer of taste-buds; the nervous system, merely
a sensitive apparatus designed to transmit mes-
sages to the brain and other centres — all being
but part of the physical machinery, and liable to
impairment or destruction. Back of all this ap-
paratus is the real Knower who makes use of it.
Science tells us that of all the five senses, that
of Touch or Feeling was the original — the funda-
mental sense. All the rest are held to be but
modifications of, and specialized forms of, this
original sense of feeling. I am telling you this
not merely in the way of interesting and instruc-
tive scientific information, bjut also because an
understanding of this fact will enable you to
more clearly comprehend that which I shall have
to say to you about the higher faculties or senses.
Many of the very lowly and simple forms of
animal life have this one sense only, and that but
18 CLAIRVOYANCE
poorly developed. The elementary life form
"feels" the touch of its food, or of other objects
which may touch it. The plants also have some-
thing akin to this sense, which in some cases,
like that of the Sensitive Plant, for instance, is
quite well developed. Long before the sense of
sight, or the sensitiveness to light appeared in
animal-life, we find evidences of taste, and some-
thing like rudimentary hearing or sensitiveness
to sounds. Smell gradually developed from the
sense of taste, with which even now it is closely
connected. In some forms of lower animal life the
sense of smell is much more highly developed
than in mankind. Hearing evolved in due time
from the rudimentary feeling of vibrations.
Sight, the highest of the senses, came last, and
was an evolution of the elementary sensitiveness
to light.
But, you see, all these senses are but modifica-
tions of the original sense of feeling or touch.
The eye records the touch or feeling of the light-
waves which strike upon it. The ear records the
touch or feeling of the sound-waves or vibrations
of the air, which reach it. The tongue and other
seats of taste record the chemical touch of the
particles of food, or other substances, coming in
contact with the taste-buds. The nose records
the chemical touch of the gases or fine particles
of material which touch its mucous membrane.
The sensory-nerves record the presence of outer
objects coming in contact with the nerve ends in
various parts of the skin of the body. You see
THE ASTRAL SENSES 19
that all of these senses merely record the contact
or "touch" of outside objects.
But the sense organs, themselves, do not do
the knowing of the presence of the objects. They
are but pieces of delicate apparatus serving to
record or to receive primary impressions from
outside. Wonderful as they are, they have their
counterparts in the works of man, as for instance :
the camera, or artificial eye; the phonograph, or
artificial ear; the delicate chemical apparatus, or
artificial taster and smeller; the telegraph, or
artificial nerves. Not only this, but there are al-
ways to be found nerve telegraph wires convey-
ing the messages of the eye, the ear, the nose,
the tongue, to the brain — telling the something
in the brain of what has been felt at the other end
of the line. Sever the nerves leading to the eye,
and though the eye will continue to register per-
fectly, still no message will reach the brain. And
render the brain unconscious, and no message
will reach it from the nerves connecting with
eye, ear, nose, tongue, or surface of the body.
There is much more to the receiving of sense
messages than you would think at first, you see.
Now all this means that the ego, or soul, or
mind, if you prefer the term — is the real Knower
who becomes aware of the outside world by
means of the messages of the senses. Cut off
from these messages the mind would be almost a
blank, so far as outside objects are concerned.
Every one of the senses so cut off would mean a
diminishing or cutting-off of a part of the world
of the ego. And, likewise, each new sense added
20 CLAIRVOYANCE
to the list tends to widen and increase the world
of the ego. We do not realize this, as a rule. In-
stead, we are in the habit of thinking that the
world consists of just so many things and facts,
and that we know every possible one of them.
This is the reasoning of a child. Think how very
much smaller than the world of the average per-
son is the world of the person born blind, or the
person born deaf ! Likewise, think how very much
greater and wider, and more wonderful this
world of ours would seem were each of us to find
ourselves suddenly endowed with a new sense!
How much more we would perceive. How much
more we would feel. How much more we would
know. How much more we would have to talk
about. Why, we are really in about the same posi-
tion as the poor girl, born blind, who said that she
thought that the color of scarlet must be some-
thing like the sound of a trumpet. Poor thing,
she could form no conception of color, never hav-
ing seen a ray of light — she could think and speak
only in the terms of touch, sound, taste and smell.
Had she also been deaf, she would have been
robbed of a still greater share of her world.
Think over these things a little.
Suppose, on the contrary, that we had a new
sense which would enable us to sense the waves
of electricity. In that case we would be able to
"feel" what was going on at another place — per-
haps on the other side of the world, or maybe, on
one of the other planets. Or, suppose that we
had an X Ray sense — we could then see through
a stone wall, inside the rooms of a house. If our
THE ASTRAL SENSES 21
vision were improved by the addition of a tele-
scopic adjustment, we could see what is going
on in Mars, and could send and receive communi-
cations with those living there. Or, if with a
microscopic adjustment, we could see all the
secrets of a drop of water — maybe it is well that
we cannot do this. On the other hand, if we had
a well-developed telepathic sense, we would be
aware of the thought-waves of others to such an
extent that there would be no secrets left hidden
to anyone — wouldn't that alter life and human
intercourse a great deal? These things would
really b,e no more wonderful than is the evolution
of the senses we have. We can do some of these
things by apparatus designed by the brain of
man — and man really is but an imitator and
adaptor of Nature. Perhaps, on some other
world or planet there may be beings having
seven, nine or fifteen senses, instead of the poor
little five known to us. Who knows!
But it is not necessary to exercise the imagina-
tion in the direction of picturing beings on other
planets endowed with more senses than have the
people of earth. While, as the occult teachings
positively state, there are beings on other planets
whose senses are as much higher than the earth-
man's as the latter's are higher than those of the
oyster, still we do not have to go so far to find
instances of the possession of much higher and
more active faculties than those employed by the
ordinary man. We have but to consider the
higher psychical faculties of man, right here and
now, in order to see what new worlds are open to
22 CLAIRVOYANCE
him. When you reach a scientific understanding
of these things, you will see that there really is
nothing at all supernatural about much of the
great body of wonderful experiences of men in all
times which the "horse sense" man sneeringly
dismisses as "queer" and "contrary to sense."
You will see that these experiences are quite as
natural as are those in which the ordinary five
senses are employed — though they are super-
physical. There is the greatest difference be-
tween supernatural and super-physical, you must
realize.
All occultists know that man has other senses
than the ordinary five, although but few men
have developed them sufficiently well to use them
effectively. These super-physical senses are
known to the occultists as "the astral senses."
The term "Astral," used so frequently by all oc-
cultists, ancient and modern, is derived from the
Greek word "astra," meaning "star." It is used
to indicate those planes of being immediately
above the physical plane. The astral senses are
really the counterparts of the physical senses of
man, and are connected with the astral body of
the person just as the physical senses are con-
nected with the physical body. The office of
these astral senses is to enable the person to re-
ceive impressions on the astral plane, just as his
physical senses enable him to receive impressions
on the physical plane. On the physical plane the
mind of man receives only the sense impressions
of the physical organs of sense; but when the
mind functions and vibrates on the astral plane, it
THE ASTRAL SENSES 23
requires astral senses in order to receive the im-
pressions of that plane, and these, as we shall see,
are present.
Each one of the physical senses of man has its
astral counterpart. Thus man has, in latency,
the power of seeing, feeling, tasting, smelling,
and hearing, on the astral plane, by means of his
five astral senses. More than this, the best oc-
cultists know that man really has seven physical
senses instead of but five, though these two addi-
tional senses are not unfolded in the case of the
average person (though occultists who have
reached a certain stage are able to use them
effectively). Even these two extra physical
senses have their counterparts on the astral
plane.
Persons who have developed the use of their
astral senses are able to receive the sense im-
pressions of the astral plane just as clearly as
they receive those of the physical plane by means
of the physical senses. For instance, the person
is thus able to perceive things occurring on the
astral plane; to read the Akashic Records of the
past; to perceive things that are happening in
other parts of the world ; to see past happenings
as well; and in cases of peculiar development, to
catch glimpses of the future, though this is far
rarer than the other forms of astral sight.
Again, by means of clairaudience, the person
may hear the things of the astral world, past as
well as present, and in rare cases, the future.
The explanation is the same in each case — merely
the receiving of vibrations on the astral plane in-
24 CLAIRVOYANCE
stead of on the physical plane. In the same way,
the astral senses of smelling, tasting, and feeling
operate. But though we have occasional in-
stances of astral feeling, in certain phases of
psychic phenomena, we have practically no mani-
festation of astral smelling or tasting, although
the astral senses are there ready for use. It is
only in instances of travelling in the astral body
that the last two mentioned astral senses, viz.,
smell and taste, are manifested.
The phenomena of telepathy, or thought trans-
ference, occurs on both the physical and the men-
tal plane. On the physical plane it is more or less
spontaneous and erratic in manifestation; while
on the astral plane it is as clear, reliable and re-
sponsive to demand as is astral sight, etc.
The ordinary person has but occasional flashes
of astral sensing, and as a rule is not able to ex-
perience the phenomenon at will. The trained
occultist, on the contrary, is able to shift from
one set of senses to the other, by a simple act
or effort of will, whenever he may wish to do so.
Advanced occultists are often able to function on
both physical and astral planes at the same time,
though they do not often desire to do so. To
vision astrally, the trained occultist merely shifts
his sensory mechanism from physical to astral,
or vice versa, just as the typewriter operator
shifts from the small-letter type to the capitals,
by simply touching the shift-key of his machine.
Many persons suppose that it is necessary to
travel on the astral plane, in the astral body, in
order to use the astral senses. This is a mistake.
THE ASTRAL SENSES 25
In instances of clairvoyance, astral visioning,
psychometry, etc., the occultist remains in his
physical body, and senses the phenomena of the
astral plane quite readily, by means of the astral
senses, just as he is able to sense the phenomena
of the physical plane when he uses the physical
organs — quite more easily, in fact, in many in-
stances. It is not even necessary for the occultist
to enter into the trance condition, in the majority
of cases.
Travel in the astral body is quite another phase
of occult phenomena, and is far more difficult to
manifest. The student should never attempt to
travel in the astral body except under the instruc-
tion of some competent instructor.
In Crystal Gazing, the occultist merely em-
ploys the crystal in order to concentrate his
power, and to bring to a focus his astral vision.
There is no supernatural virtue in the crystal
itself— it is merely a means to an end; a piece of
useful apparatus to aid in the production of cer-
tain phenomena.
In Psychometry some object is used in order
to bring the occulist "en rapport" with the per-
son or thing associated with it. But it is the
astral senses which are employed in describing
either the past environment of the thing, or else
the present or past doings of the person in ques-
tion, etc. In short, the object is merely the loose
end of the psychic ball of twine which the psycho-
metrist proceeds to wind or unwind at will. Psy-
26 CLAIRVOYANCE
chometry is merely one form of astral seeing;
just as is crystal gazing.
In what is known as Telekinesis, or movement
at a distance, there is found the employment of
both astral sensing, and astral will action accom-
panied in many cases by actual projection of a
portion of the substance of the astral body.
In the case of Clairvoyance, we have an in-
stance of the simplest form of astral seeing, with-
out the necessity of the "associated object" of
psychometry, or the focal point of the crystal in
crystal gazing.
This is true not only of the ordinary form of
clairvoyance, in which the occultist sees astrally
the happenings and doings at some distant point,
at the moment of observation; it is also true of
what is known as past clairvoyance, or astral see-
ing of past events; and in the seeing of future
events, as in prophetic vision, etc. These are all
simply different forms of one and the same thing.
Surely, some of you may say, "These things
are supernatural, far above the realm of natural
law — and yet this man would have us believe
otherwise." Softly, softly, dear reader, do not
jump at conclusions so readily. What do you
know about the limits of natural law and phe-
nomena? What right have you to assert that all
beyond your customary range of sense experi-
ence is outside of Nature? Do you not realize
that you are attempting to place a limit upon
Nature, which in reality is illimitable?
The man of a generation back of the present
one would have been equally justified in assert-
THE ASTRAL SENSES 27
ing that the marvels of wireless telegraphy were
supernatural, had he been told of the possibility
of their manifestation. Going back a little fur-
ther, the father of that man would have said the
same thing regarding the telephone, had anyone
been so bold as to have prophesied it. Going back
still another generation, imagine the opinion of
some of the old men of that time regarding the
telegraph. And yet these things are simply the
discovery and application of certain of Nature's
wonderful powers and forces.
Is it any more unreasonable to suppose that
Nature has still a mine of undiscovered treasure
in the mind and constitution of man, as well as in
inorganic nature? No, friends, these things are
as natural as the physical senses, and not a whit
more of a miracle. It is only that we are accus-
tomed to one, and not to the other, that makes
the astral senses seem more wonderful than the
physical. Nature's workings are all wonderful —
none more so than the other. All are beyond our
absolute conception, when we get down to their
real essence. So let us keep an open mind !
LESSON II.
TELEPATHY vs. CLAIRVOYANCE.
In this work I shall use the term "clairvoy-
ance" in its broad sense of "astral perception," as
distinguished from perception by means of the
physical senses. As we proceed, you will see the
general and special meanings of the term, so
there is no necessity for a special definition or
illustration of the term at this time.
By "telepathy," I mean the sending and receiv-
ing of thought messages, and mental and emo-
tional states, consciously or unconsciously, by
means of what may be called "the sixth sense" of
the physical plane. There is, of course, a form of
thought transference on the astral plane, but this
I include under the general term of clairvoyance,
for reasons which will be explained later on.
You will remember that in the preceding chap-
ter I told you that in addition to the five ordinary
physical senses of man there were also two other
physical senses comparatively undeveloped in
the average person. These two extra physical
senses are, respectively, (1) the sense of the
presence of other living things; and (2) the tele-
pathic sense. As I also told you, these two extra
physical senses have their astral counterparts.
They also have certain physical organs which
are not generally recognized by physiologists or
psychologists, but which are well known to all
TELEPATHY vs. CLAIRVOYANCE 29
occultists. I shall now consider the first of the
two above-mentioned extra physical senses, in
order to clear the way for our consideration of
the question of the distinction between ordinary
telepathy and that form of clairvoyance which is
its astral counterpart.
There is in every human being a sense which
is not generally recognized as such, although
nearly every person has had more or less experi-
ence regarding its workings. I refer to the sense
of the presence of other living things, separate
and apart from the operation of any of the five
ordinary physical senses. I ask you to under-
stand that I am not claiming that this is a higher
sense than the other physical senses, or that it
has come to man in a high state of evolution. On
the contrary, this sense came to living things far
back in the scale of evolution. It is possessed by
the higher forms of the lower animals, such as
the horse, dog, and the majority of the wild
beasts. Savage and barbaric men have it more
highly developed than it is in the case of the
civilized man. In fact, this physical sense may
be termed almost vestigal in civilized man, be-
cause he has not actively used it for many genera-
tions. For that matter, the physical sense of
smell is also deficient in man, and for the same
reason, whereas in the case of the lower animals,
and savage man, the sense of smell is very keen.
I mention this for fear of misunderstanding. In
my little book, "The Astral World," I have said :
"All occultists know that man really has seven
senses, instead of merely five, though the addi-
30 CLAIRVOYANCE
tional two senses are not sufficiently developed
for use in the average person (though the occult-
ist generally unfolds them into use)." Some
have taken this to mean that the occultist de-
velops these two extra physical senses, just as he
does certain higher psychic or astral faculties.
But this is wrong. The occultist, in such case,
merely re-awakens these two senses which have
been almost lost to the race. By use and exer-
cise he then develops them to a wonderful pro-
ficiency, for use on the physical plane.
Now, this sense of the presence of other living
beings is very well developed in the lower ani-
mals, particularly in those whose safety depends
upon the knowledge of the presence of their nat-
ural enemies. As might be expected, the wild ani-
mals have it more highly developed than do the
domesticated animals. But even among the lat-
ter, we find instances of this sense being in active
use — in the case of dogs, horses, geese, etc.,
especially. Who of us is not familiar with the
strange actions of the dog, or the horse, when
the animal senses the unseen and unheard pres-
ence of some person or animal? Very often we
would scold or punish the animal for its peculiar
actions, simply because we are not able to see
what is worrying it. How often does the dog
start suddenly, and bristle up its hair, when
nothing is in sight, or within hearing distance.
How often does the horse grow "skittish," or
even panicky, when there is nothing within sight
or hearing. Domestic fowls, especially geese,
manifest an uneasiness at the presence of strange
TELEPATHY vs. CLAIRVOYANCE 31
persons or animals, though they may not be able
to see or hear them. It is a matter of history that
this sense, in a flock of geese, once saved ancient
Rome from an attack of the enemy. The night
was dark and stormy, and the trained eyesight
and keen hearing of the Roman outposts failed to
reveal the approach of the enemy. But, the keen
sense of the geese felt the presence of strange
men, and they started to cackle loudly, aroused
the guard, and Rome was saved. Skeptical per-
sons have sought to explain this historical case
by the theory that the geese heard the approach-
ing enemy. But this explanation will not s.erve,
for the Roman soldiers were marching about on
their posts and guard-duty, and the geese re-
mained silent until they sensed the approach of
the small number of the enemy's scouts, when
they burst into wild cries. The ancient Romans,
themselves, were under no illusion about the
matter — they recognized the existence of some
unusual power in the geese, and they gave the
animals the full credit therefor.
Hunters in wild and strange lands have told us
that often when they were lying concealed for
the purpose of shooting the wild animals when
they came within range, they have witnessed in-
stances of the existence of this strange faculty in
the wild beasts. Though they could not see the
concealed hunters, nor smell them (as the wind
was in the other direction) all of a sudden one or
more of the animals (generally an old female)
would start suddenly, and a shiver would be seen
to pass over its body; then it would utter a low
32 CLAIRVOYANCE
warning note, and away would fly the pack.
Nearly every hunter has had the experience of
watching his expected game, when all of a sud-
den it would start off with a nervous jerk, and
without waiting to sniff the air, as is usual, would
bolt precipitately from the scene. Moreover,
many beasts of prey are known to sense the pres-
ence of their natural prey, even when the wind is
in the other direction, and there is no sound or
movement made by the crouching, fearstricken
animal. Certain birds seem to sense the presence
of particular worms upon which they feed,
though the latter be buried several inches in the
earth, or in the bark of trees.
Savage man also has this faculty developed, as
all travellers and explorers well know. They
are as keen as a wild animal to sense the nearness
of enemies, or, in some cases, the approach of
man-eating beasts. This does not mean that
that these savages are more highly developed
than is civilized man — quite the reverse. This
is the explanation : when man became more civil-
ized, and made himself more secure from his
wild-beast enemies, as well as from the sudden
attacks of his human enemies, he began to use
this sense less and less. Finally, in the course of
many generations, it became almost atrophied
from disuse, and ceased reporting to the brain, or
other nerve centres. Or, if you prefer viewing it
from another angle, it may be said that the nerve
centres, and brain, began to pay less and less at-
tention to the reports of this sense (trusting
more to sight and hearing) until the conscious-
TELEPATHY vs. CLAIRVOYANCE 33
ness failed to awaken to the reports. You know
how your consciousness will finally refuse to be
awakened by familiar sounds (such as the noise
of machinery in the shop, or ordinary noises in
the house), although the ears receive the sound-
waves.
Well, this is the way in the case of this neg-
lected sense — for the two reasons just mentioned,
the average person is almost unaware of its
existence. Almost unaware I have said — not to-
tally unaware. For probably every one of us has
had experiences in which we have actually "felt"
the presence of some strange person about the
premises, or place. The effect of the report of
this sense is particularly noticed in the region of
the solar plexus, or the pit of the stomach. It
manifests in a peculiar, unpleasant feeling of
"gone-ness" in that region — it produces a feeling
of "something wrong," which disturbs one in a
strange way. This is generally accompanied by
a "bristling up," or "creepy" feeling along the
spine. The organs registering the presence of a
strange or alien creature consist of certain deli-
cate nerves of the surface of the skin, generally
connected with the roots of the downy hair of
the body — or resting where the hair roots would
naturally be, in the case of a hairless skin. These
seem to report directly to the solar-plexus, which
then acts quickly by reflex action on the other
parts of the body, causing an instinctive feeling
to either fly the scene or else to crouch and hide
oneself. This feeling, as may be seen at once, is
an inheritance from our savage ancestors, or
34 CLAIRVOYANCE
perhaps from our lowly-animal ancestral roots.
It is a most unpleasant feeling, and the race
escapes much discomfort by reason of its com-
parative absence.
I have said that occultists have developed, or
rather re-developed this sense. They do this in
order to have a harmonious well-developed seven-
fold sense system. It increases their general
"awareness." Certain other knowledge of the
occultist neutralizes the unpleasant features of
the manifestation of this sense, and he finds it
often a very valuable adjunct to his senses of
seeing and hearing, particularly in the cases in
which he is approached by persons having an-
tagonistic or hostile feelings toward him, as in
such cases this faculty is particularly active. In
connection with the telepathic sense (to be de-
scribed a little further on) this sense operates to
give a person that sense of warning when ap-
proached by another person whose feelings are
not friendly to him, not matter how friendly the
outward appearance of that person may be.
These two extra senses co-operate to give a per-
son that instinctive feeling of warning, which all
of us know in our own experience.
This particular, as well as the telepathic sense,
may be cultivated or developed by anyone who
wishes, to take the time and trouble to accomplish
the work. The principle is simple — merely the
same principle that one uses in developing any of
the other physical attributes, namely, use and
exercise. The first step (a) is the recognition of
the existence of the sense itself; then (b) the at-
TELEPATHY vs. CLAIRVOYANCE 35
tention given to its reports; then (c) frequent
use and exercise. Just think of how you would
proceed to develop any of the five ordinary
senses — the hearing, sight, or touch, for instance
— then follow the same process in the cultivation
of this extra sense, or two senses, and you will
accomplish the same kind of results.
Now, let us consider the other extra physical
sense — the "telepathic" sense, or sense of becom-
ing aware of the thought-waves, or emotional
waves, of other persons. Now, as strange as this
may appear to some persons — the most of per-
sons in fact — this telepathic faculty is not a
"higher" faculty or sense, but is really a com-
paratively low one. Just like the sense just de-
scribed, it is possessed in a higher degree by
many of the lower animals, and by primitive and
savage man. That which really is "higher" in
this kind of psychic phenomena is the manifes-
tation of that higher form of telepathy — by use
of the astral counterpart of this sense — which we
shall consider, later, under the name of clairvoy-
ance, for this is really a particular phase of clair-
voyance.
As strange as it may appear to some of you,
the lower animals possess a kind of telepathic
sense. An animal is usually aware of your feel-
ings toward it, and your purposes regarding it.
Domestic animals lose some of this by genera-
tions of confinement, while the wild animals have
the sense highly developed. But even some of
the domestic animals have more or less of it.
You will readily recognize this fact if you have
36 CLAIRVOYANCE
ever tried to "cut out" a certain animal from a
herd or flock. You will find that the animal in
some way has sensed your designs upon it, no
matter how indirectly you approach it, and it will
begin circling around the other animals, twisting
in and out in its endeavors to be lost to your
sight. The other animals, likewise, will seem to
know that you are after only that particular one,
and will manifest but little fright or distrust,
comparatively.
I have frequently seen this thing, in my own
country and in others, among poultry raisers.
The poultryman will think, to himself, "Now, I
am going to get that black hen with the yellow
legs — that fat, clumsy one," and he will move
toward the flock slowly and with an air of uncon-
cern. But, lo ! as soon as he gets near the crea-
tures, that black hen will be seen edging her way
to the outer circle of the flock, on the opposite
side from the man. When the man moves around
to her side, she will be found to have plunged into
the crowd, and it is hard to find her. Sometimes
she will actually try to sneak off, and conceal her-
self in some dark corner, or back of some large
object. Every poultryman will smile when this
occurrence is mentioned to him — he knows by
experience that hens have a way of sensing what
he has in his mind regarding them.
Moreover, as every farmer knows, the crow
family has a most uncanny way of sensing the
intentions of the farmer who is trying to destroy
them, and shows great sagacity in defeating
those intentions. But, while the crow is a very
TELEPATHY vs. CLAIRVOYANCE 37
intelligent bird — one of the wisest of the bird
family, in fact — it obtains its knowledge of what
is in the mind of the man not alone from "figuring
on his intentions," but rather from that instinc-
tive sensing of his mental states. The hen, as all
know, is a very stupid bird, showing but little in-
telligent activity. But, nevertheless, she is very
quick about sensing the poultryman's designs
on her, though generally very stupid about plan-
ning out a skillful escape.
Every owner of dogs, cats and horses, has had
many opportunities for observing the manifesta-
tion of this sense on the part of those animals.
Every dog feels the emotional states of his
owner, and others. The horse knows when his
owner seeks to throw the halter over his neck,
or when, on the contrary, he is merely walking
through the field. Cats sense their owners' feel-
ings and thoughts, and often resent them. Of
course, the lower animals can sense merely ele-
mentary mental states, and generally only emo-
tional states, as their minds are not developed so
as to interpret the more complex mental states.
Primitive men likewise almost instinctivel)7 sense
the feelings and designs of other men. They do
not reason the thing out, but rather merely "feel"
the ideas and designs of the others. The women
of the lower races are more adept in interpreting
these sense reports than are the men. Women
are more sagisitive, as a rule, than are men — on
any point on the scale of development.
When we come to consider ordinary telepathy
in the case of men of civilized countries, we find
38 CLAIRVOYANCE
a more complex state of affairs. While civilized
man, as a whole, has lost some of the quick tele-
pathic perception of the lower races, he has, in
some exceptional cases, acquired a faculty of re-
ceiving and interpreting more complex thought-
forms and mental states. The investigations of
the Society for Psychical Research, and those of
private investigators as well, have shown us that
a picture of a complicated geometrical design
held in the mind of one person may be carried to
and received by the mind of another person, who
reproduces the design on paper. In the same
way, complicated thoughts have been trans-
mitted and received. But these are only excep-
tional cases. In many cases this sense seems al-
most dead in the ordinary civilized individual,
except when aroused in exceptional cases.
But, nevertheless, the majority of persons have
occasional flashes of telepathy — just enough to
make them realize that "there is something in
it." The renewed interest in the subject, of late
years, has directed the public mind to the phe-
nomena of telepathy, and, consequently, more
persons are now taking note of the cases of
thought-transference coming under their per-
sonal notice. It must be remembered, of course,
that all of us are constantly receiving thought-
waves, and feeling thought-influence, uncon-
sciously. I am speaking now only of the con-
scious perception of the thought-waves.
Many investigators have so developed their
telepathic sense that they are able, at times, to
obtain wonderful test results. But, it has been a
TELEPATHY vs. CLAIRVOYANCE 39
source of disappointment to many of them to dis-
cover that at other times, under apparently simi-
lar conditions, their success was very slight. So
true is this that many authorities have accepted
the theory that telepathy is more or less spon-
taneous, and cannot be produced to order. This
theory is true as far as it goes, but there is a side
of the case that these investigators overlook,
probably because of their lack of the occult
principles involved in the phenomena. I mean
this: that their most brilliant successes have been
obtained by reason of their unconscious "switch-
ing on" of the astral telepathic sense, the clair-
voyant sense. While in this condition, they ob-
tained startling results; but the next time they
tried, they failed to awaken the astral sense, and,
therefore, had to depend entirely upon the physi-
cal telepathic sense, and, consequently, their re-
sults were comparatively poor.
You will understand the difference and dis-
tinction between physical-sense telepathy, and
astral-sense telepathy, if you will carefully con-
sider the nature of each, as I shall now present it
to you. I ask your close attention to what I shall
have to say on this subject in the remaining pages
of this chapter. Do not pass over these explana-
tions as "dry," for unless you have a clear funda-
mental understanding of the thing, you will never
be able to get the best results. This is true of
every phase of learning, physical as well as
psychical — one must get started right, in order to
obtain the best results.
In the first place, every thought process, every
40 CLAIRVOYANCE
emotional activity, every creation of ideas, is ac-
companied by a manifestation of force — in fact,
is the result of the manifestation of a force.
Without entering at all into the question of what
mind is, in itself, we may rest firmly on the nat-
ural fact that every manifestation of mental or
emotional activity is the result of an action of
the brain or nervous system, manifesting in a
form of vibrations. Just as in the case of the
manifestation of electricity in which certain
chemical elements are consumed, or transformed,
so in the case of mental or emotional activity
there is a consuming or transformation of the
substance of which the nervous system is com-
posed. When I say "nervous system" in this
connection, I include the brain, or brains of man
—for these are but a part of his great nervous
system in which all emotional or mental activity
is manifested.
Moreover, just as there is no real destruction
of matter in any of Nature's processes — all seem-
ing destruction being but a transformation — so
in the case before us there is a transformation of
the energy released in the thought or emotional
process. We may grasp this idea more clearly
if we consider what takes place into transforma-
tion of electrical energy. For instance, transmit
a strong current of electricity over a fine wire, or
filament of carbon, and lo! the current is trans-
formed into light. Use another kind of channel
of transmission, and the current is transformed
into heat. Every electric light, or electric
TELEPATHY vs. CLAIRVOYANCE 41
heating apparatus is proof of this. In the same
way, the electric current is sent into space in the
form of wireless waves. These waves coming in
contact with certain forms of apparatus are
transformed into forms of force which are regis-
tered and interpreted by the wireless operator.
In the same way, the telepathic waves of
energy are sent forth by the activity released by
the thought or emotion state. These waves travel
in every direction, and when they come in con-
tact with physical apparatus sufficiently sensitive
to register them, they may be reproduced or re-
transformed into thought or mental states simi-
lar to those which originally sent them forth.
You talk into the receiver of the telephone, and
the sound waves are transformed into waves of
electricity. These electric waves travel over the
wires, and on reaching the other end of the tele-
phone circuit are again transformed into sound-
waves which are heard by the ear of the listener.
Well, then, when your brain sends out thought
waves, these travel until they are received by the
apparatus in the brain of another person, when
they are re-transformed into thoughts of the
same kind that originally caused the thought-
waves. I will have much more to say on this
subject in the next chapter. I will pause here to
point out the difference between the phenomena
of this form of telepathy, and the higher form
which is really a phase of clairvoyance.
Now, in the case of what may be called a clair-
voyant-telepathy, or astral telepathy, the ordi-
nary thought-waves play but a small part. In-
42 CLAIRVOYANCE
stead of these, there is a transmission of force
along the channels of the astral plane. It is al-
most impossible to describe the phenomena of the
astral plane in the terms of the physical. I may
illustrate the matter, in a general way, by saying
that is something like your astral self actually ex-
tending itself out until it touches the astral self
of the other person, and thus actually "feels" the
astral activities there, instead of it being a case
of something like waves travelling along space
between brain and brain. Do you get this clear-
ly? This is about as near to it as I can explain
it to you at this place. Telepathy is simply a
matter of the transmission and receiving of
waves of vibratory force which have travelled
along the ether between two persons. But clair-
voyance or astral-telepathy is something like
your mind being extended out until it actually
touches the mind of the other person and sees
what is there.
I shall have much to say regarding the work-
ing out of the processes of clairvoyance, as we
proceed. I have merely given the above explana-
tion for the purpose of distinguishing between
ordinary telepathy and clairvoyance, so as to
prevent you from falling into a common error.
Now let us consider the phenomena of ordinary
telepathy — this is very wonderful in itself, al-
though it is on a lower plane of activity than its
astral or clairvoyant counterpart.
LESSON III.
TELEPATHY EXPLAINED.
Telepathy, meaning Thought-Transference,
bears a misleading title. Literally translated, it
means "suffering at a distance," or, perhaps,
"feeling pain at a distance." The name should
really indicate "knowing at a distance," in order
to be properly descriptive. But as the term has
acquired a forced meaning by reason of years of
usage, it will probably be continued in popular
favor. After all, names do not count, so long as
the meaning is accepted and understood.
While the term itself has been generally used
in the sense of conscious and deliberate sending
and receiving of thought-waves, there is a far
wider field of phenomena really covered by it,
viz., the unconscious sending and receiving of
mental and emotional vibrations. I shall take up
this phase of the subject in a moment, after I
have called your attention to the mechanism
whereby the waves of thought and emotion are
transmitted.
In the last chapter, you will remember that I
called your attention to the fact that there is a
manifestation of energy or force (in the form of
vibrations) in every mental or emotional state.
This is true not only in the case of deep thought
or vivid feeling, but also in the case of general
mental "feelings," and emotional states. During
such manifestations there is a radiation of mental
or emotional vibrations from the brain or nervous
44 CLAIRVOYANCE
centres of the system, which flows out in all di-
rections just as do light and wireless electricity.
The principal seats or centres of these radiations
are (1) the several brains of man, viz., the cere-
brum, cerebellum, and the medulla oblongata, re-
spectfully; and (2) the several great centres of
nerve substance in the human system, called the
plexi, such as the solar plexus, etc.
The vibrations arising from emotional excite-
ment are sent out principally from the plexi, or
great centres of the sympathetic nervous system.
Those arising from the more strictly mental
states emanate from certain centres and points of
the brain, or brains, of the person manifesting
them. Certain forms of these vibrations consti-
tute the real essence of what is generally called
"human magnetism," which will be treated upon
in the proper place in these lessons.
I do not think it advisable to go into the
technical details of the generation and mechan-
ism of transmission of these thought and emo-
tional vibrations, in these lessons. To understand
the same would require a technical knowledge of
physiology and organic chemistry, which is not
possessed by the average person. Moreover, such
details are neither interesting nor instructive to
the general student of occultism. But, I think it
proper to give at least a brief description of the
receiving of such vibratory-waves by other indi-
viduals.
In the first place, every great plexus, or groups
of nerve ganglia, in the human system is a receiv-
ing station, as well as a sending station. A per-
TELEPATHY EXPLAINED 45
son manifesting strong emotional excitement
tends to awaken similar states in the nervous cen-
tres of other persons in whom the conditions are
favorable. This explains why the vibrations of
anger, fear, panic, are so contagious. It also ex-
plains the strong effect of the vibrations emanat-
ing from the nerve centres controlling the repro-
ductive system, in certain cases of strong sexual
excitation. Each human sympathetic nervous
system contains many receiving stations where
emotional vibrations are received, and where
they tend to be transformed into similar feeling
in the receiving system, unless neutralized by
other mental and emotional states in the person.
When we come to consider the apparatus by
which is received the vibrations arising from
what may be called "purely mental" operations
of the brain, such as intellectual thought, con-
structive imagination, etc., we find a more
specialized arrangement, as might be expected.
There are several minor receiving points of men-
tal vibrations, regarding which I do not consider
it worth while to go into detail, because of the
technical features involved. The principal ap-
paratus for receiving thought vibrations of this
kind is that which is known as the "pineal gland,"
which I shall now describe.
The pineal gland is a peculiar mass of nervous
substance which is embedded in the human brain,
in a position near the middle of the skull almost
directly above the extreme top of the spinal
column. It is shaped like a small cone; and is of
a reddish-gray color. It lies in front of the
46 CLAIRVOYANCE
cerebellum, and is attached to the floor of the
third ventricle of the brain. It contains a small
quantity of peculiar particles of gritty, sand-like
substance, which are sometimes called "brain-
sand." It derives its scientific name from its
shape, which, as I have said, resembles a pine-
cone. Physiologists are at sea regarding the
function of this strange organ, and generally con-
tent themselves with the statement that "its
functions are not understood." But occultists
know that the pineal gland, with its peculiar ar-
rangement of nerve-cell corpuscles, and its tiny
grains of "brain-sand," is the physical telepathic
receiving instrument. Students of wireless teleg-
raphy have noticed a startling resemblance be-
tween the pineal gland and a part of the receiving
instrument employed in wireless telegraphy.
The thought vibrations coming in contact with
the nervous system of the receiving person, set
up a peculiar vibration in the substance of the
pineal gland and thus the first step in the trans-
formation of these vibrations into thought-forms
in the mind of the person is under way. The re-
mainder of the process is too technical, both in
the physiological as well as in the occult sense,
to be taken up in detail at this place. The student
will do well to get the idea of the workings of
wireless telegraphy well fixed in his mind, for
this will set up the right conception of the work-
ing of ordinary telepathy, without the necessity
of complicated technical diagrams and descrip-
tions.
And, now then, let us see what results from
TELEPATHY EXPLAINED 47
the sending forth and receiving of these mental
and emotional waves of force and energy. It is a
most interesting subject, I assure you. While
the phenomena of the astral plane is probably
more fascinating to the average student, I would
impress upon you the importance of mastering
the occult phenomena of the physical plane, be-
fore passing on to that of the higher planes.
In the first place, as all occultists know, each
person is constantly surrounded with what has
been called an "atmosphere" composed of mental
and emotional vibrations which are emanated
from his personality. The atmosphere of each
person depends upon the general character of the
thoughts and feelings of the person in question.
Consequently, as no two persons are precisely
alike in character, it follows that no two personal
atmospheres are exactly alike. Each person has
a psychic atmosphere of his or her own. These
atmospheric vibrations do not extend very far
from the presence of the person, and, conse-
quently affect only those coming near to him.
In the same way, every group or crowd of per-
sons has its own psychic atmosphere, composed
of a blending of the individual psychic atmos-
pheres of the persons composing the crowd,
group or assemblage, and representing the gen-
eral average of the thought and feelings of the
crowd. There are no two group atmospheres
exactly alike, for the reason that no two groups
of persons, large or small, are exactly alike.
Actors know that each audience which they face
has its own psychic atmosphere, and the actors
48 CLAIRVOYANCE
are affected by it. Preachers, lawyers, and
speakers in general are quite aware of this fact,
and freely admit it, though they may not be ac-
quainted with the causes or laws governing the
phenomena.
Following the same psychic law, it will be
found that every town or large city, or even every
small village or section of a larger town, will be
found to have its own distinctive psychic atmos-
phere, which is very perceptible to strangers
visiting the place, and which affect those who
take up their residence in the place. In large
cities, it has been noticed that every building has
its own peculiar vibrations which arise from the
general character of those occupying it. Dif-
ferent church buildings likewise reflect the char-
acter of the general habits of thought and feeling
of those worshipping in them. Likewise, certain
business streets have pleasant or unpleasant vi-
brations in their atmosphere, from the same
causes. Every person recognizes the truth of
these statements, though but few are able to ac-
count for the facts in a scientific manner.
The beginner in the study of psychic phe-
nomena often asks how these things can be, when
the thought which has occasioned the vibrations
have long since passed away. The explanation
is simple, when properly explained. It is some-
thing like this: just as heat remains in a room
after the stove has ceased to throw out heat-
waves, so do the vibrations of thought and feel-
ing persist long after the thought or feeling has
died away. Or, if you prefer a more material
TELEPATHY EXPLAINED 49
illustration, we may say that if a package of per-
fumery has been opened in a room, and then re-
moved, the air will remain charged with the odor
for a long time afterwards.
So, you see, the same principle applies in the
case of psychic vibrations. The person carries
around with him the general atmosphere of his
characteristic mental and emotional vibrations.
And, in the same way, the house, store, church,
street, town, or city, etc., is permeated with the
psychic vibrations of those who have frequented
them. Nearly every one realizes the different
feeling that impresses him when he enters a
strange house, apartment, store or church. Each
one has its own difference of psychic effect. And,
so does each person create his or her psychic ef-
fect upon those coming in contact with him or
her, or who comes into his or her presence or
vicinity.
The next question asked by the thoughtful new
student is this: If persons are constantly sending
forth psychic vibrations, and if such vibrations
persist for some time, why are we not over-
whelmed with the force of them; and why are
they not all so mixed up as to lose all their effect.
I shall now answer this very important question.
In the first place, though we are constantly
affected more or less by the multitude of psychic,
vibrations beating upon us, still the greater part
of them do not consciously impress us. For an
example, we have but to consider how few of the
sounds or sights of a busy street are impressed
upon our consciousness. We hear and see only
50 CLAIRVOYANCE
a few of the things which attract our attention
and interest. The rest are lost to us, although
our eyes and ears receive them all. In the same
way, we are impressed only by the stronger vi-
brations which reach us, and then only by those
which we have attracted to ourselves, or which
prove attractive to us by reason of our own likes
and dislikes.
In the second place, the effect of certain
thought vibrations is neutralized by the effect of
the vibrations of thoughts of an opposite char-
acter. Just as a mixture of black and white pro-
duces the neutral color of grey, so do two cur-
rents of opposing thought vibrations tend to re-
solve themselves into a neutral vibration which
has little or no effect upon those coming in con-
tact with them. You may think of numerous
correspondences to this in the world of material
things. For instance, a mixture of very hot and
very cold water, will produce a neutral lukewarm
liquid, neither hot nor cold. In the same way,
two things of opposing taste characteristics,
when blended, will produce a neutral taste having
but little effect upon one. The principle is uni-
versal, and is readily understood.
In the third place, there is that which we may
call an "affinity" between thoughts and feelings
of a similar character. Not only do the vibrations
of similar thoughts tend to coalesce and com-
bine; but, more than this, each one of us attracts
to himself or herself the thought vibrations
which are in general accord with corresponding
thoughts in our own minds, or feelings in our
TELEPATHY EXPLAINED 51
own nature. Like attracts like. In the same
way, the character of our thoughts and feelings
act to repel thought or emotional vibrations of
an opposite or inharmonious nature. As all oc-
cultists know, everyone draws thought vibra-
tions in harmony with his or her own; and also
repels thought vibrations of an inharmonious
nature.
These are the general laws and principles gov-
erning the phenomena of this phase of telepathic
vibrations. There is much more to be said on the
subject, of course, but if you will note carefully
the leading principles and laws of manifestation
just mentioned, you will be able to reason cor-
rectly regarding any phase of this class of phe-
nomena which may come before you for atten-
tion. Once you learn a general rule, the rest be-
comes merely a matter of application and inter-
pretation. Let us now proceed to a consideration
of other phases of the general subject of tele-
pathic influence.
We now come to the phase of what may be
called direct telepathy — that is where a thought
is consciously, and more or less purposely, di-
rected toward another person. We come across
many interesting cases of this kind where per-
sons find themselves thinking intently of certain
other persons, and afterwards are told by the
other persons that "I found myself thinking in-
tently about you, at such and such a time," etc.
In some of these cases it is difficult to determine
which one started the thinking. Again, how
often do we find ourselves thinking of a person,
52 CLAIRVOYANCE
when all of a sudden the person comes into sight.
Again, we think intently and earnestly about a
certain question; and then, all of a sudden, other
folks whom we meet begin talking to us about
the same thing. These instances are too common
to need more than a passing notice.
A little more purpose is displayed in that class
of phenomena in which we intently wish that a
certain person shall do a certain thing, and lo!
we soon learn that that certain person has done
it. A number of years ago, a popular writer
wrote an article in which he mentioned what
seemed to him to be a curious instance of some
form of mental influence or telepathy. He said
that he had found out that if he would sit down
and carefully write a letter to some person from
whom he had not heard for a long time, and then
destroy the letter instead of sending it, he would
be almost certain to receive a letter from that
person within a few days. He did not attempt to
account for the phenomenon, he merely called
the attention of his readers to it. Many persons
have followed the suggestion, often with very
wonderful results. There is nothing miraculous,
or supernatural about such occurrences. It is
merely one phase of telepathy. The concen-
trated thought of the writer of the letter is di-
rected toward the other person, and that person
begins to think of the first one; then he thinks he
will write to him; then he actually does write.
Distance, space, and direction have no import-
ance in this experiment — it is not necessary to
even know where the second person is, in fact.
TELEPATHY EXPLAINED 53
There are often found persons so closely in
psychic harmony with each other that they very
often are able to ask questions and receive an-
swers from each other, even though great dis-
tances separate them. Some particular times
there is a better psychic harmony existing be-
tween the same persons than is found at other
times. All this, of course, affects the success of
the experiment. It is surprising what wonderful
results along these lines may be obtained by al-
most any person of average intelligence, after a
Ijttle careful, patient, conscientious practice.
But there have been phenomena obtained as
the result of long series of careful experiments
which are, in a way, even more wonderful than
these somewhat less deliberate experiments just
mentioned. I allude to the experiments of a num-
ber of earnest, careful scientific students, who
surrounded themselves with every precaution
against over-enthusiasm, fraud, and coincidence.
Prominent among this class of investigations we
find those conducted by the Society for Psychical
Research, of England, which really established a
firm basis for the work of other investigators who
followed the general methods of the said society.
In the following chapter, I shall give you a some-
what extended statement of the results of such
investigations, because this information is im-
portant to every student of psychic phenomena,
not only because it establishes a firm scientific
basis for his studies and beliefs, but also because
it gives him important information which he may
apply in the course of his own experimental
work.
54 CLAIRVOYANCE
I may mention that the investigations into the
subject of telepathy, and kindred subjects, un-
der the auspices of the society just mentioned,
were conducted by men of careful scientific train-
ing and experience, and under the general super-
vision and approval of the officers of the society,
among which have been numbered such eminent
men as Prof. Henry Sidgwick, of Cambridge
University; Prof. Balfour Stewart, a Fellow of
the Royal Society of England; Rt. Hon. A. J.
Balfour, the eminent English statesman; Prof.
William James, the eminent American psychol-
ogist; Sir William Crookes, the great chemist
and discoverer of physical laws, who invented
the celebrated "Crookes' Tubes," without which
the discovery of the X Rays, radio-activity, etc.,
would have been impossible; Frederick W. H.
Myers, the celebrated explorer of the astral
planes, and writer upon psychic phenomena; Sir
Oliver Lodge, the popular English scientist; and
other men of international reputation and high
standing. The character of these men at once
gives the stamp of honesty and scientific ac-
curacy to all the work of the society.
In order that you may understand the spirit
which animated these scientific investigators in
their work of the exploration of this new and
strange region of Nature, I ask you to carefully
read the following words of the presidential ad-
dress of Sir William Crookes, before the Royal
Society, at Bristol, England, in 1898. Remem-
ber, please, that this address was made before an
assemblage of distinguished scientists, many of
TELEPATHY EXPLAINED 55
them rank materialists and, quite skeptical of all
occult phenomena — this was nearly twenty years
ago, remember. Sir William Crookes, facing this
gathering, as its president, said :
"Were I now introducing for the first time
these inquiries to the world of science, I should
choose a starting point different from that of old
(where we formerly began). It would be well
to begin with Telepathy; with that fundamental
law, as I believe it to be, that thoughts and
images may be transferred from one mind to an-
other without the agency of the recognized or-
gans of sense — that knowledge may enter the
human mind without being communicated in any
hitherto known or recognized ways. * * * If
telepathy takes place, we have two physical facts
— the physical change in the brain of A, the sug-
gestor, and the analogous physical change in
the brain of B, the recipient of the sugges-
tion. Between these two physical events there
must exist a train of physical causes. * * * It
is unscientific to call in the aid of mysterious
agencies, when with every fresh advance in
knowledge it is shown that either vibrations have
powers and attributes abundantly able to any de-
mand— even the transmission of thought.
"It is supposed by some physiologists that the
essential cells of nerves do not actually touch,
but are separated by a narrow gap which widens
in sleep while it narrows almost to extinction
during mental activity. This condition is so
singularly like a Branly or Lodge coherer (a de-
vice which led to the discovery of wireless teleg-
56 CLAIRVOYANCE
raphy) as to suggest a further analogy. The
structure of brain and nerve being similar, it is
conceivable that there may be present masses of
such nerve coherers in the brain, whose special
function it may be to receive impulses brought
from without, through the connecting sequence
of ether waves of appropriate order of magni-
tude.
"Roentgen has familiarized us with an order of
vibrations of extreme minuteness as compared
with the smallest waves with which we have
hitherto been acquainted ; and there is no reason
to suppose that we have here reached the limit of
frequency. It is known that the action of
thought is accompanied by certain molecular
movements in the brain, and here we have phys-
ical vibrations capable from their extreme min-
uteness of acting direct upon individual mole-
cules, while their rapidity approaches that of in-
ternal and external movements of the atoms
themselves. A formidable range of phenomena
must be scientifically sifted before we effectually
grasp a faculty so strange, so bewildering, and
for ages so inscrutable, as the direct action of
mind upon mind.
"In the old Egyptian days, a well known in-
scription was carved over the portal of the
Temple of Isis: T am whatever has been, is, or
ever will be; and my veil no man hath yet lifted/
Not thus do modern seekers after truth confront
Nature — the word that stands for the baffling
mysteries of the Universe. Steadily, unflinch-
ingly, we strive to pierce the inmost heart of
TELEPATHY EXPLAINED 57
Nature, from what she is to reconstruct what she
has been, and to prophesy what she shall be. Veil
after veil we have lifted, and her face grows more
beautiful, august and wonderful, with every bar-
rier that is withdrawn."
You will notice that this address made nearly
twenty years ago, and from the standpoint of
physical science is in full accord with the ideas
of occultism as old as the hills. And yet, the
speaker had worked out the idea independently.
He also investigated higher forms of psychic
phenomena, with results that startled the world.
But, you will notice that he does not attempt to
give any other than purely physical laws the
credit for the ordinary phenomena of telepathy.
And he was thoroughly right in this, as we have
seen. He escaped the common error of confus-
ing physical-sense phenomena with the phenom-
ena of the astral-senses. Each plane has its own
phenomena — and each class is surely wonderful
enough. And, again, remember that both phys-
ical and astral phenomena are purely natural;
there is no need for seeking any supernatural
agencies to account for these natural facts.
LESSON IV.
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY.
The investigators of the Society for Psychical
Research, of England, started by giving a broad
definition of Telepathy, as follows: "Telepathy
is the communication of impressions of any kind
from one mind to another, independently of the
recognized channels of sense." They took the
rational position that the actual distance between
the projector and the recipient of the telepathic
message is not material; and that all that is re-
quired is such a separation of the two persons
that no known operation of the senses can bridge
the space between them. They wisely held that
telepathy between two persons in the same room
is as much telepathy as when the two persons are
located at opposite sides of the world.
The investigators then ruled out all instances
of thought-transmission in which there was even
the slightest muscular contact between the pro-
jector and the recipient. They held that though
there might be genuine telepathy in such cases,
nevertheless, there was always the possibility of
fraud or collusion, or of unconscious muscular
action on the part of the projector. They de-
manded absolute and actual separation of the
two persons, in order that their experiments
might be above suspicion. They were wise in
this, for while there is undoubtedly a psychic
communication in the cases in which there is
the slight physical connection between the two
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY 59
persons (as I shall point out to you a little fur-
ther on), still the element of doubt or suspicion
must be entirely eliminated from a scientific test,
in order to render it valuable and valid.
They, therefore, confined their investigations
in Telepathy to the two following classes, viz.:
(1) where actions are performed without phys-
ical contact with the person willing; and (2)
where some number, word, or card is guessed ap-
parently without any of the ordinary means of
communication. The investigators recognized
the possibility that in the first of the above-men-
tioned two classes of experiments there is a pos-
sibility of suspicion of collusion, fraud, or uncon-
scious suggestion, in the matter of the motion of
the eyes of the party, or some member of it,
which might be seized upon, perhaps uncon-
sciously, by the recipient, and used to guide him
to the object which was being thought of by
the projector or the party. They sought to ob-
viate this difficulty by blindfolding the percipient,
and by placing non-conductors of sound over his
ears. But, finally, they came to the conclusion
that even these precautions might not prove suf-
ficient; and, accordingly, they devoted their at-
tention to the second class of experiments, in
which all ordinary means of communication be-
tween projector and recipient were impossible.
They took the additional precautions of limiting
their circle to a small number of investigators of
scientific reputations, and well known to each
other, always avoiding a promiscuous company
for obvious reasons.
60 CLAIRVOYANCE
One of the earliest series of investigations by
these special committees of investigators was
that of the family of the Rev. A. M. Creery, in
Derbyshire, England. The children of this fam-
ily had acquired a reputation in what was known
as the "guessing game," in which one of the chil-
dren, previously placed outside of the room, then
returned to the room and attempted to "guess"
the name or location of some object agreed upon
by the party during her absence. The results
were very interesting, and quite satisfactory, and
have frequently been referred to in works on the
subject written since that time. I think it well
to give the results of this series of experiments
in some little detail, for they form a basis for ex-
periments on the part of those who read these
lessons.
Prof. W. F. Barrett, Professor of Physics in
the Royal College of Science for Ireland, con-
ducted the most of the experiments. The report
to the Society says : "We began by selecting the
simplest objects in the room; then chose names
of towns, people, dates, cards out of a pack, lines
from different poems, etc., in fact, any thing or
series of ideas that those present could keep in
their minds steadily. The children seldom made
a mistake. I have seen seventeen cards chosen
by myself named right in succession without any
mistake. We soon found that a great deal de-
pended on the steadiness with which the ideas
were kept before the minds of the thinkers, and
upon the energy with which they willed the ideas
to pass. I may say that this faculty is not by
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY 61
any means confined to the members of one fam-
ily; it is much more general than we imagine.
To verify this conclusion, I invited two of a
neighbor's children to join us in our experiments,
with excellent results."
The report gives the methods of the experi-
ments, as follows: "The inquiry has taken place
partly in Mr. Creery's house, and partly in lodg-
ings, or at a hotel occupied by some of our num-
ber. Having selected at random one child, whom
we desired to leave the room and wait at some
distance, we would choose a pack of cards, or
write on a piece of paper a name of a number
which occurred to us at the moment. Generally,
but not always, this was shown to the members
of the family present in the room; but no one
member was always present, and we were some-
times entirely alone. We then recalled the child,
one of us always assuring himself that, when the
door was suddenly opened, she was at a consid-
erable distance, though this was usually a super-
fluity of caution, as our habit was to avoid all
utterances of what was chosen. On re-entering,
she stood — sometimes turned by us with her face
toward the wall, oftener with her eyes directed
toward the ground, and usually close to us and
remote from the family — for a period of silence
varying from a few seconds to a minute, till she
called out to us some number, card, or what-
ever it might be."
In the first experiments, in "guessing" the
name of objects, the child guessed correctly six
out of fourteen. She then guessed correctly the
62 CLAIRVOYANCE
name of small objects held in the hands of one
of the committee — five times out of six. She
guessed fictitious names chosen by the commit-
tee— five out of ten, at the first trial. The com-
mittee then tested her by writing down the name
of some object in the house, fixed at random, and
then, after all had thought intently of the thing,
they sent for the child and bade her try to find
the thing thought of, the thought-concentration
of course continuing during the search. The re-
sult is thus reported : "In this way I wrote down,
among other things, a hair-brush — it was
brought; an orange — it was brought; a wine-
glass— it was brought; an apple — it was brought;
and so on, until many objects had been selected
and found by the child."
Passing over the details of many other ex-
periments we find that the following remark-
able results were obtained by the committee:
"Altogether, three hundred and eighty-two
trials were made in this series. In the case
of letters of the alphabet, of cards, and of num-
bers of two figures, the chances of success on
a first trial would naturally be 25 to 1, 52 to 1,
and 89 to 1, respectively; in the case of sur-
names they would of course be infinitely
greater. Cards were far most frequently em-
ployed, and the odds in their case may be taken
as a fair medium sample, according to which,
out of a whole series of three hundred and eighty-
two trials, the average number of successes at the
first attempt by an ordinary guesser would be
seven and one-third. Of our trials, one hundred
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY 63
and twenty-seven were successes on the first at-
tempt, fifty-six on the second, nineteen on the
third — making two hundred and two, out of a
possible three hundred and eighty-two!" Think
of this, while the law of averages called for only
seven and one-third successes at first trial, the
children obtained one hundred and twenty-seven,
which, given a second and third trial, they raised
to two hundred and two ! You see, this takes the
matter entirely out of the possibility of coin-
cidence or mathematical probability.
But this was not all. Listen to the further re-
port of the committee on this point: "The fol-
lowing was the result of one of the series. The
thing selected was divulged to none of the fam-
ily, and five cards running were named correctly
on a first trial. The odds against this happening
once in a series were considerably over a mil-
lion to one. There were other similar batches,
the two longest runs being eight consecutive
guesses, once with cards, and once with names;
where the adverse odds in the former case were
over one hundred and forty-two millions to
one; and in the other, something incalculably
greater." The opinion of eminent mathema-
ticians who have examined the above results is
that the hypothesis of mere coincidence is prac-
tically excluded in the scientific consideration of
the matter. The committee calls special atten-
tion to the fact that in many of the most im-
portant tests none of the Creery family were
cognizant of the object selected, and that, there-
fore, the hypothesis of fraud or collusion is abso-
64 CLAIRVOYANCE
lutely eliminated. The committee naturally came
to the conclusion that the phenomena was genu-
ine and real telepathy.
Prof. Balfour Stewart, LL. D., F. R. S., who
was present at some of these experiments,
though not a member of the committee, ex-
pressed great amazement at some of the results.
He reports: "The thought-reader was outside
a door. The object or thing thought of was
written on paper and silently handed to the com-
pany in the room. The thought reader was then
called in, and in the course of a minute the an-
swer was given. Definite objects in the room,
for instance, were first thought of, and in the ma-
jority of the cases the answers were correct.
Then numbers were thought of, and the answers
were generally right, though, of course, there
were some cases of error. The names of towns
were thought of, and a good many of these were
right. Then fancy names were thought of. I
was asked to think of certain fancy names, and
mark them down and hand them round to the
company. I thought of and wrote on paper,
'Blue-beard,' 'Tom Thumb,' 'Cinderella,' and the
answers were all correct !"
The committee also conducted a number of ex-
periments with other recipients, with very satis-
factory results. Colors were correctly guessed
with a percentage of successes quite beyond the
average or probable number. Names of towns
in all parts of the world, were correctly
"guessed" by certain recipients with a wonder-
ful degree of success. But, probably most won-
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY 65
derful of all, was the correct reproduction of
diagrams of geometrical and other figures and
shapes. In one case, the recipient, in a series of
nine trials, succeeded in drawing them all cor-
rectly, except that he frequently reversed them,
making the upper-side down, and the right-hand
side to the left. The Society has published these
reproduced diagrams in its illustrated reports,
and they have convinced the most skeptical of
critics. Some of the diagrams were quite com-
plicated, unusual, and even grotesque, and yet
they were reproduced with marvelous accuracy,
not in a hesitating manner, but deliberately and
continuously, as if the recipient were actually
copying a drawing in full sight. Similar results
have been obtained by other investigators who
have followed the lead of these original ones.
So you see, the seal of scientific authority has
been placed upon the phenomena of telepathy.
It is no longer in the realm of the supernatural or
uncanny. As Camille Flammarion, the eminent
French scientist, has said: "The action of one
mind upon another at a distance — the trans-
mission of thought, mental suggestion, commu-
nication at a distance — all these arc not more
extraordinary than the action of the magnet on
iron, the influence of the moon on the sea, the
transportation of the human voice by electricity,
the revolution of the chemical constituents of a
star by the analysis of its light, or, indeed, all
the wonders of contemporary science. Only
these psychic communications are of a more
elevated kind, and may serve to put us on the
66 CLAIRVOYANCE
track of a knowledge of human nature. What is
certain is: That telepathy can and ought to be
henceforth considered by Science as an incontest-
able reality; that minds are able to act upon each
other without the intervention of the senses; that
psychic force exists, though its nature is yet un-
known. * * * We say that this force is of a
psychic order, and not physical, or physiological,
or chemical, or mechanical, because it produces
and transmits ideas and thoughts, and because it
manifests itself without the co-operation of our
senses, soul to soul, mind to mind."
In addition to investigating the above men-
tioned classes of telepathic phenomena, the Eng-
lish Society for Psychical Research investigated
many remarkable cases of a somewhat higher
phase of telepathy. They took down the stories
told by persons deemed responsible, and then
carefully examined, and cross-examined other
witnesses to the strange phenomena. The record
of these experiments, and investigations, fill a
number of good sized volumes of the Society's
reports, which are well worth reading by all stu-
dents of the subject. They may be found in the
libraries of nearly any large city. I shall, how-
ever, select a number of the most interesting of
the cases therein reported, to give my students an
idea of the character of the phenomena so in-
vestigated and found genuine by the committees
having this class of telepathy under investiga-
tion.
An interesting case of spontaneous telepathy
is that related by Dr. Ede, as follows: "There
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY 67
is a house about a half-mile from my own, in-
habited by some ladies, friends of our family.
They have a large alarm bell outside their house.
One night I awoke suddenly and said to my wife :
'lam sure I hear Mrs. F's alarm bell ringing/
After listening for some time, we heard nothing,
and I went to sleep again. The next day Mrs.
F. called upon my wife and said to her: 'We
were wishing for your husband last night, for
we were alarmed by thieves. We were all up, and
I was about to pull the alarm bell, hoping that he
would hear it, saying to my daughters, "I am sure
it will soon bring Dr. Ede," but we did not ring
it.' My wife asked what time this had happened,
and Mrs. F. said that it was about half past one.
That was the time I awoke thinking that I heard
the bell."
In this case there was manifested simply ordi-
nary physical plane telepathy. Had the bell actu-
ally been rung, and heard psychically, it would
have been a case of astral plane hearing, known
as clairaudience. As it was, merely the thought
in the mind of Mrs. F., and her strong idea to
ring the bell, caused a transmission of thought
waves which struck Dr. Ede with great force and
awakened him. This case is interesting because
it is typical of many cases of a similar nature
within the experience of many persons. It is seen
that a strong feeling, or excitement, accompanied
by a strong desire or wish to summon another
person, tends to give great power and effect to
the thought waves emitted. They strike the
mind of the recipient like the sudden ringing of
68 CLAIRVOYANCE
an alarm clock bell.
Another interesting case is that of two ladies,
both well known to members of the committee,
and vouched for as of strict veracity. This case
is unusual for the reason that two different per-
sons received the thought-waves at the same
time. Here is an abridgment of the case : "Lady
G. and her sister had been spending the evening
with their mother, who was in her usual health
and spirits when they left her. In the middle of
the night the sister awoke in her fright and said
to her husband: "I must go to my mother at
once; do order the carriage. I am sure that she
is taken ill." On the way to her mother's house,
where two roads meet, she saw Lady G.'s car-
riage approaching. When they met each asked
the other why she was there. They both related
the same experience and impression. When they
reached their mother's house, they found that she
was dying, and had expressed an earnest wish to
see them."
Another case of a similar nature is this: "At
the siege of Mooltan, Major General R., then ad-
jutant of his regiment, was severely wounded
and supposed himself to be dying. He requested
that his ring be taken off his finger and sent to
his wife. At the same time his wife was at
Ferozepore, one hundred and fifty miles distant,
lying on her bed, in a state half way between
waking and sleeping. She saw her husband be-
ing taken off the field, and heard his voice say-
ing: 'Take this ring off my finger, and send it
to my wife.' "
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY 69
This case bears the marks of very strong telep-
athy, but also has a suspicious resemblance to
clairvoyance accompanied by clairaudience. Or
perhaps it is a combination of both telepathy and
clairvoyance. It is impossible to determine
which, in absence of more detailed information.
The message of persons dying, or believing
themselves to be approaching death, are fre-
quently very strong, for certain reasons well
known to occultists. But there is nothing super-
natural about the phenomena, and in most cases
it is merely a case of strong telepathy.
The Society also reports the following interest-
ing case: "A. was awake, and strongly willed
to make himself known to two friends who at
that time (one o'clock in the morning) were
asleep. When he met them a few days after-
ward, they both told him that at one o'clock they
had awakened under the impression that he was
in their room. The experience was so vivid that
they could not go to sleep for some time, and
looked at their watches to note the time." Cases
of this kind are quite common, and many experi-
mentors have had equally good results with this
phase of thought transference. You will remem-
ber that there is no actual projection of the astral
body, in most of these cases, but merely a strong
impression caused by concentrated thought.
Another interesting case is that of the late
Bishop Wilberforce, and is recorded in his bi-
ography, as follows: The Bishop was in his
library at Cuddleson, with three or four of his
clergy with him at the same table. The Bishop
70 CLAIRVOYANCE
suddenly raised his hand to his head, and ex-
claimed: "I am certain that something has hap-
pened to one of my sons." It afterwards trans-
pired that just at that time his eldest son's foot
was badly crushed by an accident on board his
ship, the son being at sea. The Bishop himself
recorded the circumstance in a letter to Miss
Noel, saying: "It is curious that at the time of
his accident I was so possessed with the de-
pressing consciousness of some evil having be-
fallen my son, Herbert, that at the last, I wrote
down that I was unable to shake off the impres-
sion that something had happened to him, and
noted this down for remembrance." There is
nothing unusual about this case, for it has been
duplicated in the experience of many persons. Its
chief importance lies in the fact that it is re-
corded by a man of wide reputation and high
standing, and also that the Bishop had taken the
precaution to note down the thing at the time,
instead of merely recalling it after he had heard
of the accident.
You will notice that in many cases of this kind
the phenomenon closely approaches the aspect
of true clairvoyance, or astral sensing. In some
cases there appears to be a blending of both
telepathy and astral clairvoyance. In fact, there
is but very little difference between the highest
phases of ordinary telepathy, and the more com-
mon phases of clairvoyance. Here, as in many
other cases of Nature's forces, there seems to be
a gradual blending, rather than a sharp dividing
line between the two classes of phenomena.
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY 71
Moreover, the student developing his telepathic
powers will frequently find that he is beginning
to unfold at least occasional flashes of clair-
voyance.
In the case of telepathy, the recipient merely
senses what is in the mind of the projector. In
some cases a picture in the mind of the projector
may be seen by the recipient, and may thus be
mistaken for a case of pure clairvoyance. But,
in investigating closely, it will be found that the
real scene was slightly different from the im-
pression, in which case it shows that the impres-
sion was simply telepathic. Clairvoyant vision
shows the scene as it really is, or rather as the
physical eye of the recipient would have seen it.
The astral sight really sees the scene, and does
not merely receive the mental impression of the
projector. The first is original seeing; the sec-
ond, merely a reproduction of images already in
the mind of the projector, and colored by his per-
sonality, etc.
In the next lesson, I shall give you a number
of exercises and methods designed to develop
your telepathic powers. You will find the prac-
tice of these most interesting and entertaining,
and at the same time most instructive. You will
find that as you practice the exercises given
therein, you will become more and more adept
and proficient in producing telepathic phenom-
ena. From the lower stages, you will be able to
proceed to the higher. And, in time, you will be
surprised to find that almost unconsciously you
have passed into the stage in which you will have
72 CLAIRVOYANCE
at least occasional manifestations of clairvoy-
ance, psychometry, etc.
In fact, there is no better way known to prac-
tical occultists to develop in a student the pow-
ers of clairvoyance than just this method of start-
ing the student with the exercises designed to
develop the telepathic power. It has been found
by centuries of experience that the student who
develops telepathic power, in a systematic way,
will gradually unfold and evolve the clairvoyant
and psychometric power. It constitutes the first
rungs on the ladder of psychic development.
Of course, under the head of clairvoyance, etc.,
you will be given methods and exercise designed
to develop clairvoyant powers — some of them
very valuable and effective methods, at that. But,
notwithstanding this, I feel that I should im-
press upon you the importance of laying a firm
foundation for such instruction, by developing
yourself first along the lines of telepathic power.
Such a course will not only keenly sharpen your
powers of receptivity to such vibrations as you
may wish to receive; but it will also train your
mind in the direction of translating, interpreting,
and recording such impressions when received.
You must remember that proficiency in a men-
tal art is attained only by means of training the
attention to concentrate upon the task. It is the
same way in clairvoyance and psychometry.
Telepathy trains your attention to concentrate
upon the reception of impressions, and to hold
them firmly and clearly in consciousness. The
result is that when you really develop clairvoy-
SCIENTIFIC TELEPATHY 73
ant receptivity, your attention has already been
trained to do the necessary work. I need not
tell you what an advantage this gives you over
the clairvoyant who has not received this train-
ing, for your own good common sense will as-
sure you of it.
So, now for our training in telepathy — not only
for itself, but also as a means of preparing for
the higher stages.
LESSON V.
MIND READING, AND BEYOND.
The simpler forms of telepathic phenomena
have received the name "Mind Reading" and by
some have been regarded as something not quite
within the class of real telepathy. This last im-
pression has been heightened by the fact that
there has been offered the public many spectac-
ular exhibitions of pseudo mind-reading, that is
to say, imitation or counterfeit mind-reading, in
which the result has been obtained by trickery,
collusion, or clever artifice. But, notwithstand-
ing this fact, genuine mind-reading is actually a
phase of true telepathy.
What is generally known as mind-reading
may be divided into two classes, as follows: (1)
where there is an actual physical contact between
the projector and the receiver; and (2) where
there is no actual physical contact, but where
there is a close relation in space between the two
parties, as in the case of the "willing game." In
the first class belong all cases in which the pro-
jector touches the recipient, or at least is con-
nected with him by a material object. In the
second class belong those cases in which the
recipient seeks to find an object which is being
thought of by either a single projector, or by a
number of persons in the same room. You will
notice that both of these classes were omitted
from the experiments of the Society for Psy-
chical Research, because of the possibility of
MIND READING, AND BEYOND 75
fraud or collusion. But, nevertheless, the stu-
dent will do well to acquire proficiency in mani-
festing this form of telepathy, not alone for its
own sake, but, also, because it naturally leads to
higher development.
In the case of the first class of mind-reading
namely, that in which actual physical contact
is had between the projector and the recipient,
there has been a disposition on the part of some
authorities to explain the whole matter by the
theory of unconscious muscular impulse of the
projector; but those who have carefully studied
this subject, and who have themselves performed
the feats of this class of mind-reading, know that
there is far more than this to it. Those familiar
with the subject know that there is a decided
transference of thought-waves from the pro-
jector to the recipient, and that the latter actu-
ally "feels" the same as they strike upon his men-
tal receiving apparatus. The whole difference
between this and the higher forms of telepathy is
that in this the thought-currents generally run
along the wires of the nervous system, instead
of leaping across the space between the two per-
sons.
It is known to all who have conducted this
class of experiments, that at times there will be
experienced a change or shifting in the trans-
mission of the thought-currents. For a time,
the thought-waves will be felt flowing in along
the nerves of the hands and arms, when, all of
a sudden this will cease, and there will be experi-
enced the passage of the current direct from brain
76 CLAIRVOYANCE
to brain. It is impossible to describe this feel-
ing in mere words, to those who have never ex-
perienced it. But those to whom it has once been
manifested will recognize at once just what I
mean by this statement. It is a different sensa-
tion from any other in the experience of a human
being, and must actually be experienced to be un-
derstood. The nearest analogy I can offer is
that feeling experienced by the person when a
forgotten name for which he has vainly sought,
suddenly flashes or leaps into his consciousness
— it is felt to come from somewhere outside of
the conscious field. Well, in the case of the
thought-current the feeling is much the same,
only there is a fuller sense of the "outsideness"
of the source of the thought.
In order to make you understand the distinc-
tion between the two classes of mind-reading
more clearly, I will say that you may think of
one as akin to the ordinary telegraphy over
wires; and of the other as akin to wireless teleg-
raphy. It is the same force in both cases, the
difference being simply one of the details of
transmission. Fix this idea firmly in your mind,
and you will have no trouble in always having
the right conception of any kind of case of mind-
reading, or telepathy. But, you must remember,
there are cases in which there is a combination
of both methods of transmission, either simul-
taneously, or else shifting and changing from one
to the other.
I will here remind the student that he will learn
more by a half-dozen actual experiments in mind-
MIND READING, AND BEYOND 77
reading, than he will by reading a dozen books
on the subject. It is very good to read the books
in order to get the correct theory well fixed in
mind, and also in order to learn the best methods
as taught by those who have had a wide experi-
ence in the subject; but the real "how" of the
matter is learned only through actual experience.
So, I shall now give you advice and instructions
concerning actual experimental work.
You, the student, should begin by making
yourself a good recipient — that is a good "mind
reader," allowing others to play the part of pro-
jector. Later on, you may play the part of pro-
jector, if you so desire, but the real "fine work" is
done by the recipient, and, for that reason that is
the part you should learn to play by frequent re-
hearsals.
I advise you to begin your experiments with
friends who are in sympathy with you, and who
are interested in the subject. Avoid particularly
all early experiments with uncongenial or un-
sympathetic persons; and avoid as you would a
pestilence all those who are antagonistic either
to yourself or to the general subject of telepathy
and kindred subjects. As you must make your-
self especially "sensitive" in order to successfully
conduct a mind-reading test, you will find your-
self particularly susceptible to the mental atti-
tude of those around you at such times, and
therefore should surround yourself only with
those who are congenial and sympathetic.
You will find that there is a great difference
between the several persons whom you "try out"
78 CLAIRVOYANCE
as projectors. Some will be more "en rapport"
with you than are others who may be equally
good friends. "En rapport," you know, means
"in vibrational harmony." When two persons
are en rapport with each other, they are like two
wireless telegraphic instruments perfectly at-
tuned to each other. In such cases there are ob-
tained the very best results. You will soon learn
to distinguish the degree of en rapport conditions
between yourself and different persons — you
soon learn to "feel" this condition. In the begin-
ning, it will be well for you to try several per-
sons, one after the other, in your mind-reading
experiments, in order to pick out the best one,
and also to learn the "feel" of the different de-
grees of en rapport condition.
Even in cases of persons in whom the en rap-
port conditions are good, it is well to establish a
rhythmic unison between you. This is done by
both you and the person breathing in rhythmic
unison a few moments. Begin by counting "one-
two-three-four," like the slow ticking of a large
clock. Have the other person join with you in
so counting, until your minds both work in the
same rhythmic time. Then you should have
him breathe in unison with you, making a men-
tal count with you at the same time, so that you
will "breathe together." Count (mentally) "one-
two-three-four," as you inhale; the "one-two,"
holding the breath; and, then "one-two-three-
four," exhaling or breathing-out. Try this
several times, and you will find that you have
established a rhythmic unison between yourself
MIND READING, AND BEYOND 79
and the other person. In the progress of an ex-
periment, if you should find that the conditions
are not as good as might be desired, you will do
well to pause for a few moments and re-establish
the proper rhythmic harmony by this method of
harmonious rhythmic breathing.
Begin by having the projector select some
prominent object in the room, a chair, or table
for instance. Then have him take your left hand
in his right hand. Raise your left hand, held in
his right hand, to your forehead; then close your
eyes and remain passive a few moments. Have
him concentrate his mind intently on the selected
object — and will that you should move toward it.
Have him think of nothing else except that ob-
ject, and to will you to move toward it, with all
his power. Close your eyes, and quiet your mind,
opening your consciousness to every mental im-
pression that he may send you. Instruct him to
think not merely "chair," for instance, but rather
"there — go there." The main thought in his
mind must be that of direction. He must will
that you move toward that chair.
After a moment or two, you will begin to feel
a vague, general impulse to move your feet.
Obey the impulse. Take a few slow steps in any
direction that seems easy to you. Sometimes
this will take you in an opposite direction from
that of the chair, but it will "get you going," and
you will soon begin to feel that the direction is
"all wrong," and will begin to be mentally pulled
in the right direction. You will have to actually
80 CLAIRVOYANCE
experience this feeling, before you will fully un-
derstand just what I mean.
After some little practice, you will begin to
feel quite distinctly the mental direction, or will-
force, of the projector, which will seem to tell you
to "come this way — now stop — now turn a little
to the right — now a little to the left — now stop
where you are, and put out your right hand —
lower your hand — move your hand a little to the
right — that's it, now you have got it all right."
You will soon learn to distinguish between the
"no, that's wrong" thought, and the "that's
right" one; and between the "go on," and the
"come on" one. By making yourself completely
passive, and receptive and obedient to the
thought and will-impulses of the projector, you
will soon act like a ship under the influence of
the rudder in the hand of the projector.
After you have attained proficiency in receiv-
ing the mental impressions and directions, you
will find yourself attracted or drawn, like a piece
of steel to the magnet, toward the object selected.
It will sometimes seem as if you were being
moved to it even against your own will — and as
if someone else were actually moving your feet
for you. Sometimes the impulse will come so
strong that you will actually rush ahead of the
projector, dragging him along with you, instead
of having him a little in advance, or by your side.
It is all a matter of practice.
You will soon discover the great difference be-
tween different projectors. Some of them will
be in perfect en rapport condition with you, while
MIND READING, AND BEYOND 81
others will fail to get into tune with you. Some
projectors do not seem to know what is required
of them, and usually forget to "will" you to the
object. It helps sometimes to tell them that the
whole thing depends upon their will power, and
that the stronger their will is, the easier it is for
you to find the thing. This puts them on their
mettle, and makes them use their will more
vigorously.
You will soon learn to recognize that peculiar
feeling of "all right," that comes when you finally
stand in front of the desired object. Then you
begin to move your right hand up and down and
around, until you get the right "feel" about that
also, when you should place your hand on the
place which seems to attract you most. You will
find that the hand is just as responsive to the
mental force, as are the feet. You will soon learn
to distinguish between the mental signals : "up,"
"down," "to the right," "to the left," "stop now,
you're right," etc. I cannot tell you just the dif-
ference— you must learn to "feel" them, and you
will soon become expert in this. It is like learn-
ing to skate, run an automobile, operate a type-
writer or anything else — all a matter of exercise
and practice. But it is astonishing how rapidly
one may learn; and how, at times, one seems to
progress by great leaps and bounds. Now I shall
give you the different stages or steps, which you
will do well to follow in your exercises, progress-
ing from the more simple to the more complex
— but be sure to thoroughly master the simple
ones, before you pass on to the more complex
82 CLAIRVOYANCE
one. Be honest and strict with yourself — make
yourself "pass the examination" before promo-
tion, in each and every step.
1. Locations. Begin by finding particular
locations in a room; corners, alcoves, doors, etc.
2. Large Objects. Then begin to find large
objects, such as tables, chairs, book-cases, etc.
3. Small Objects. Then proceed to find small
objects, such as books on a table, sofa-cushions,
ornaments, paper-knives, etc. Gradually work
down to very small objects, such as scarf-pins,
articles of jewelry, pocket-knives, etc.
4. Concealed Objects. Then proceed to find
small objects that have been concealed under
other objects, such as a pocket-book beneath a
sofa-cushion, etc.; or a key in a book; or a key
under a rug, etc.
5. Minute Objects. Then proceed to discover
very small objects, either concealed or else placed
in an inconspicuous place, such as a pin stuck in
the wall, etc. ; or a small bean under a vase, etc.
The public performers of mind reading vary
the above by sensational combinations, but you
will readily see that these are but ingenious ar-
rangements of the above general experiments,
and that no new principle is involved. As these
lessons are designed for serious study and experi-
ment, and not for sensational public perform-
ances, I shall not enter into this phase of the sub-
ject in these pages. The student who understands
the general principles, and is able to perform the
above experiments successfully, will have no di/-
MIND READING, AND BEYOND 83
ficulty in reproducing the genuine feats of the
public mind readers, by simply using his in-
genuity in arranging the stage-effects, etc.
Among other things, he will find that he will be
able to obtain results by interposing a third per-
son between the projector and himself; or by
using a short piece of wire to connect himself and
the projector. Drawing pictures on a blackboard,
or writing out names on a slate, by means of
thought direction, are simply the result of a fine
development of the power of finding the small
article — the impulse to move the hand in a cer-
tain direction comes in precisely the same way.
The public driving feats of the professional mind-
reader are but a more complicated form of the
same general principle — the impression of "direc-
tion" once obtained, the rest is a mere matter of
detail. The opening of the combination of a safe,
though requiring wonderful proficiency on the
part of the operator, is simply an elaboration of
the "direction" movement.
Some recipients are, of course, far more pro-
ficient than are others; but each and every per-
son— any person of average intelligence — will be
able to secure more or less proficiency in these
experiments, provided that patience and prac-
tice are employed. There is no such thing as an
absolute failure possible to anyone who will pro-
ceed intelligently, and will practice sufficiently.
Sometimes, after many discouraging attempts,
the whole thing will flash into one's mind at once,
and after that there will be little or no trouble.
If you are able to witness the demonstrations of
84 CLAIRVOYANCE
some good mind-reader, professional or amateur,
it will help you to "catch the knack" at once.
You will find that these experiments will tend
to greatly and rapidly develop your psychic re-
ceptivity in the direction of the higher phases of
psychic phenomena. You will be surprised to
find yourself catching flashes or glimpses of
higher telepathy, or even clairvoyance. I would
advise every person wishing to cultivate the
higher psychic faculties, to begin by perfecting
himself or herself in these simpler forms of mind-
reading. Besides the benefits obtained, the prac-
tice proves very interesting, and opens many
doors to pleasant social entertainment. But,
never allow the desire for social praise or popu-
larity, in these matters, to spoil you for serious
investigation and experiment.
The Second Step of Development. The stu-
dent, having perfected himself in the experiments
along the lines of the first class of mind-reading,
is now ready for the second step, or experiments
along the lines of the second class of mind-read-
ing, viz., where there is no actual physical contact
between the projector and recipient, but where
there is a close relation in space between the two.
Now, the thoughtful student will naturally
wish to ask a question here, something like this:
"You have told us that there is no real differ-
ence between telepathy at a great distance, and
that in which there is only the slightest differ-
ence in the position of the projector and recipient,
providing, always, that there is no actual phys-
ical contact. This being so, why your insistence
MIND READING, AND BEYOND 85
upon the 'close relation in space' just mentioned?
— what is the reason for this nearness?" Well,
it is like this: While there is no distinction of
space in true telepathy, still in experiments such
as I shall now describe, the physical nearness of
the projector enables him to concentrate more
forcibly, and also gives confidence to the new
beginner in receiving mind-currents. The bene-
fit is solely that of the psychological effect upon
the minds of the two persons, and has nothing to
do with the actual power of the telepathic waves.
It is much easier for a person to concentrate his
thought and will upon a person in actual physical
sight before him, than upon one out of sight.
And, likewise, the recipient finds himself more
confident and at ease when in the actual physical
of the person sending the thoughts and will
power. That is all there is to it. When the per-
sons have acquired familiarity with projecting
and receiving, then this obstacle is overcome, and
long distances have no terror for them.
The best way for the student to start in on this
class of mind-reading, is for him to experiment
occasionally while performing his physical con-
tact mind-reading experiments. For instance,
while engaged in searching for an object let him
disengage his hand from that of the projector for
a moment or so, and then endeavor to receive the
impressions without contact. (This should be
done only in private experiments, not in public
ones.) He will soon discover that he is receiving
thought impulses in spite of the lack of physical
contact — faint, perhaps, but still perceptible. A
86 CLAIRVOYANCE
little practice of this kind will soon convince him
that he is receiving the mental currents direct
from brain to brain. This effect will be increased
if he arranges to have several persons concen-
trate their thoughts and will power upon him
during the experiment. From this stage, he will
gradually develop into the stage of the Willing
Game.
The Willing Game, quite popular in some cir-
cles, is played by one person (usually blind-
folded) being brought into the room in which a
number of persons have previously agreed upon
some object to be found by him, they concentrat-
ing their thought firmly upon the object. The
audience should be taught to not only to think
but also to actively "will" the progress of the
recipient from the start to the finish of the hunt.
They should "will" him along each step of his
journey, and then "will" his hand to the object
itself wherever it be hidden.
An adept in the receiving end of the Willing
Game will be able to perform all the experiments
that I have just pointed out to you in the contact
mind-reading class. In the Willing Game, you
must remember that there is no taking hold of
hands or any other form of physical contact be-
tween projector and recipient. The transmission
of the mental currents must be direct, from brain
to brain. Otherwise, the two classes of experi-
ments are almost identical. There is the same
"willing" toward the object on the part of the
projectors, and the same passive obedience of the
recipient. All the difference is that the current
MIND READING, AND BEYOND 87
now passes over the ether of space, as in the case
of the wireless message, instead of over the wires
of the nervous system of the two persons.
The next step is that of "guessing" the name
of things thought of by the party. I can give you
no better directions than those followed by the
investigators in the Creery children, as related in
a preceding chapter of this book. When you be-
come sufficiently proficient in this class of mind-
reading, you should be able to reproduce every
experiment there mentioned, with at least a fair
degree of success. It is all a matter of patience,
perseverance and practice.
After you have become very proficient in this
class of experiments, you may begin to try ex-
periments at "long distance," that is where the
projector is out of your physical presence. It
makes no difference whether the distance be
merely that between two adjoining rooms, or
else of miles of space. At first, however, near-
ness adds confidence in the majority of cases.
Confidence once gained, the distance may be
lengthened indefinitely, without impairing the
success of the experiments. The long distance
experiments may consist either of the receiving
of single words, names, etc., or else distinct, clear
messages or ideas. Some find it no more difficult
to reproduce simile geometrical designs, such as
circles, squares, triangles, etc., than to reproduce
words or ideas.
In long distance experiments, it is well for the
projector to write down the word or thought he
wishes to transmit, and for the recipient to write
88 CLAIRVOYANCE
down the impressions he receives. These memo-
randa will serve as a record of progress, and will,
moreover, give a scientific value to the experi-
ments.
Some experimentors have been quite success-
ful in experiments along the lines of Automatic
Writing from living persons, produced by means
of long distance telepathy. In these' cases the
recipient sits passively at the hour agreed upon
for the experiment, and the projector concen-
trates intently upon a sentence, or several sen-
tences, one word at a time — at the same time
"willing" the other person to write the word.
The famous investigator of psychic phenomena,
the late W. T. Stead, editor of a London news-
paper, who went down on the "Titanic," was very
successful in experiments of this kind. His writ-
ten records of these are very interesting and in-
structive.
You will, of course, understand that in all cases
of long distance telepathic experiments there
should be an understanding between the two per-
sons regarding the time and duration of the
experiment, so as to obtain the best results. Per-
sonally, however, I have known of some very ex-
cellent results in which the receiving of the mes-
sage occurred several hours after the sending
— thus showing that telepathy is in a measure in-
dependent of time, as well as of space. But, as
a rule, the best results are obtained when the two
persons "sit" simultaneously.
Do not rest content with accepting the reports
of others regarding these things. Try them for
MIND READING, AND BEYOND 89
yourself. You will open up a wonderful world
of new experiences for yourself. But, remember
always, you must proceed step by step, perfect-
ing yourself at each step before proceeding to the
next.
LESSON VI.
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY.
The word "clairvoyance" means "clear see-
ing." In its present usage it covers a wide field
of psychic phenomena; and is used by different
writers to designate phases of psychic phenom-
ena differing widely from each other. The student
is apt to become confused when he meets these
apparently conflicting definitions and usages. In
the glossary of the Society for Psychical Re-
search, the term is defined as: "The faculty or
act of perceiving, as though visually, with some
coincidental truth, some distant scene; it is used
sometimes, but hardly properly, for transcen-
dental vision, or the perception of beings re-
garded as on another plane of existence."
Mrs. Henry Sidgwick, a distinguished writer
on the subject of psychic phenomena, in one of
her reports to the Society for Psychical Re-
search, says: "The word clairvoyant is often
used very loosely and with widely different
meanings. I denote by it a faculty of acquiring
supernormally, but not by reading the minds of
persons present, a knowledge of facts such as we
normally acquire by the use of our senses. I do
not limit it to knowledge that would normally be
acquired by the sense of sight, nor do I limit it
to a knowledge of present facts. A similar knowl-
edge of the past, and if necessary, of future facts
may be included. On the other hand, I exclude
the mere faculty of seeing apparitions or visions,
which is sometimes called clairvoyance."
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY 91
The above definitive explanation of the term
clairvoyance agrees with the idea of the best au-
thorities, and distinguishes between the phenom-
ena of clairvoyance and that of telepathy, on the
one hand; and between the former and that of
seeing apparitions, on the other hand. I, per-
sonally, accept this distinction as both scientific
in form, and as agreeing with the facts of the
case. You will, of course, see that the accept-
ance of the existence of the astral senses throws
light on many obscure points about which the
psychic researchers are in doubt, and reconciles
many apparently opposing facts.
All scientific authorities, as well as the best oc-
cultists, divide the phenomena of clairvoyance
into several well-distinguished classes. The fol-
lowing classification is simple, and indicates
clearly the principal forms of clairvoyant phe-
nomena:
(1) Simple Clairvoyance, in which the clair-
voyant person merely senses the auric emana-
tions of other persons, such as the auric vibra-
tions, colors, etc. ; currents of thought-vibrations,
etc.; but does not see events or scenes removed
in space or time from the observer.
(2) Clairvoyance in Space, in which the clair-
voyant person senses scenes and events removed
in space from the observer; and, often also is able
to sense such things even when they are con-
cealed or obscured by intervening material ob-
jects.
(3) Clairvoyance in Time, in which the clair-
voyant person senses scenes and events which
92 CLAIRVOYANCE
have had their original place in past time; or
scenes and events which will have their original
place in the future.
I shall describe each of these three classes, with
their many variations, as we reach them in their
proper places in these lessons. Before doing so
however, I wish to explain to you the several
methods by which clairvoyant vision is usually
induced. These methods may be designated as
follows:
(1) Psychometry, or the method of getting
en rapport with the astral plane by means of
some physical object connected with the person,
thing, or scene about which you desire to be in-
formed.
(2) Crystal Gazing, etc., or the method of
getting en rapport with the astral plane by means
of gazing into a crystal, magic mirror, etc.
(3) Clairvoyant Reverie, or the method of
getting en rapport with the astral plane by means
of psychic states in which the sights, sounds and
thoughts of the material and physical plane are
shut out of consciousness.
I shall now proceed to give the details regard-
ing each one of these three great classes of meth-
ods inducing clairvoyant vision, or en rapport
conditions with the astral plane.
Psychometry. Psychometry is that form of
clairvoyant phenomena in which the clairvoyant
gets into en rapport relation with the astral plane
by means of the connecting link of material ob-
jects, such as bit of stone, piece of hair, article
of wearing apparel, etc., which has had previous
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY 93
associations with the thing, person or scene re-
garding which clairvoyant vision is required.
Without going into technical occult explana-
tions, I would say that the virtue of these articles
consists entirely of their associative value. That
is to say, they carry in them certain vibrations of
past experience which serve as a connecting link,
or associated filament, with the thing which is
sought to be brought into the field of clairvoyant
vision.
To reach clairvoyantly a thing, scene, or per-
son in this way is akin to the unwinding of a
ball of yarn, when you hold the loose end in your
hand. Or, it is like giving a keen-scented dog a
sniff at a handkerchief once carried by the person
whom you wish him to nose out for you.
A well-known authority on the subject of
psychic phenomena has said on this point: "The
untrained clairvoyant usually cannot find any
particular astral picture when it is wanted, with-
out some special link to put him en rapport with
the subject required. Psychometry is an in-
stance in point. It seems as though there were a
sort of magnetic attachment or affinity between
any particle of matter and the record which con-
tains its history — an affinity which enables it to
act as a kind of conductor between that record
and the faculties of anyone who can read it. For
instance, I once brought from Stonehenge a tiny
fragment of stone, not larger than a pin's head,
and on putting this into an envelope and handing
it to a psychometer who had no idea what it was,
she at once began to describe that wonderful ruin
94 CLAIRVOYANCE
and the desolate country surrounding it, and then
went on to picture vividly what were evidently
scenes from its early history, showing that the
infinitessimal fragment had been sufficient to put
her into communication with the records con-
nected with the spot from which it came. The
scenes through which we pass in the course of
our life seem to act in the same way upon the
cells of our brain as did the history of Stone-
henge upon that particle of stone. They estab-
lish a connection with those cells by means of
which our mind is put en rapport with that par-
ticular portion of the records, and so we 'remem-
ber' what we have seen."
One of the simplest and most common form
of psychometry is that in which the psychom-
etrist is able to tell the physical condition of a
person by means of holding to the forehead, or
even in the hand, some trinket or small article
such as a handkerchief recently worn on the per-
son of the individual regarding whom the in-
formation is sought. In the case of some very
sensitive psychometrists, the psychic person
"takes on" the condition of the other person
whose former article of clothing, trinket, etc., she
is holding. She will often actually experience the
physical pain and distress of the person, and will
be able to indicate from what ailment the person
is suffering. Some persons attain great profi-
ciency in this direction, and are a great assistance
to wise physicians who avail themselves of their
services. Some successful physicians themselves
possess this faculty well developed, and use it to
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY 95
great advantage, though, as a rule they keep very
quiet about it, from fear of creating unfavorable
comment from their fellow-physicians and from
the general public who "do not believe in such
tom-foolery."
A step further is the power of some psychom-
etrists to correctly describe the personal char-
acteristics, and even the past history of persons
with whom they come in contact, or whose "as-
sociated article" they have in their hands. Some
very remarkable instances of this phase of psy-
chometry are related in the books containing
the history of clairvoyance. An interesting
case is that related by Zschokke, the eminent
German writer, who relates in his autobiography
his wonderful experience in this direction.
Listen to the story in his own words: "It has
happened to me occasionally at the first meeting
with a total stranger, when I have been listening
in silence to his conversation, that his past life
up to the present moment, with many minute cir-
cumstances belonging to one or other particular
scene in it, has come across me like a dream, but
distinctly, entirely involuntarily and unsought,
occupying in duration a few minutes. For a long
time I was disposed to consider these fleeting
visions as a trick of the fancy — the more so as
my dream-vision displayed to me the dress and
movements of the actors, the appearance of the
room, the furniture, and other accidents of the
scene; till on one occasion, in a gamesome mood,
I narrated to my family the secret history of a
seamstress who had just quitted the room. I
96 CLAIRVOYANCE
had never seen the person before. Nevertheless,
the hearers were astonished, and laughed and
would not be persuaded but that I had a previous
acquaintance with the former life of the person,
inasmuch as what I had stated was perfectly true.
"I was not less astonished to find that my
dream vision agreed with reality. I then gave
more attention to the subject, and as often as
propriety allowed of it, I related to those whose
lives had so passed before me the substance of
my dream-vision, to obtain from them its con-
tradiction or confirmation. On every occasion
its confirmation followed, not without amaze-
ment on the part of those who gave it. On a
certain fair-day I went into the town of Walds-
hut accompanied by two young foresters, who
are still alive. It was evening, and, tired with
our walk, we went into an inn called the 'Vine/
We took our supper with a numerous company at
the public table, when it happened that they
made themselves merry over the peculiarities of
the Swiss in connection with the belief in mes-
merism, Lavater's physiognomical system, and
the like. One of my companions, whose national
pride was touched by their raillery, begged me
to make some reply, particularly in answer to a
young man of superior appearance who sat op-
posite, and had indulged in unrestrained ridicule.
"It happened that the events of this person's
life had just previously passed before my mind.
I turned to him with the question whether he
would reply to me with truth and candor, if I
narrated to him the most secret passages of his
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY 97
history, he being as little known to me as I to
him. That would, I suggested, go something be-
yond Lavater's physiognomical skill. He prom-
ised that if I told the truth he would admit it
openly. Then I narrated the events with which
my dream vision had furnished me, and the table
learned the history of the young tradesman's life,
of his school years, his peccadilloes, and finally,
of a little act of roguery committed by him on the
strongbox of his employer. I described the un-
inhabited room with its white walls, where to
the right of the brown door there had stood upon
the table the small money-chest, etc. The man,
much struck, admitted the correctness of each
circumstance — even, which I could not expect,
of the last."
The above incident is typical of this class of
psychometry, and many persons have had at least
flashes of this phase of the power. The only re-
markable thing about this particular case is its
faithfulness regarding details — this shows a very
fine development of the astral sense. The feature
that makes it psychometric, instead of pure clair-
voyance, is that the presence of the other person
was necessary to produce the phenomenon — a bit
of clothing would probably have answered as
well. Zschokke does not seem to have been able
to manifest time-clairvoyance independent of
the presence of the person concerned — he needs
the associated link, or loose end of the psychic
ball of yarn.
Next in order in the list of the phenomena of
psychometry is that in which the psychometrist
98 CLAIRVOYANCE
is able to describe a distant scene by means of
a bit of mineral, plant, or similar object, once
located at that place. In such cases, the psy-
chometrist gets en rapport with the distant scene
by means of the connecting link mentioned.
Having obtained this, he is able to relate the
events that are happening on that scene at that
particular moment. Some very interesting cases
are mentioned in which the psychometrist has
been able to "spy" in on a certain place, by means
of some small article which has recently been
located in that place. For instance I once gave
a young psychometrist a penholder from the
office of a lawyer, a friend of mine, located about
eight hundred miles from the psychometrist. She
gave a perfect picture of the interior of the office,
the scene across the street visible from the office
window, and certain events that were happening
in the office at that moment, which were verified
by careful inquiry as to persons and time. Every
occultist, or investigator of psychic phenomena
has experienced many cases of this kind.
Another phase of psychometry is that in which
the psychometer is able to sense the conditions
existing underground, by means of a piece of
mineral or metal which originally was located
there. Some wonderful instances of phycho-
metric discernment of mines, etc., have been re-
corded. In this phase of psychometry, all that
is needed is a piece of the coal, mineral or metal
which has come from the mine. Following up
this psychic "lead" the psychometrist is able to
describe the veins or strata of the surrounding
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY 99
land, although they have not as yet been uncov-
ered or discovered.
Still another form of psychometric discern-
ment is that in which the psychometrist gets en
rapport with the past history or an object, or of
its surroundings, by means of the object itself.
In this way, the psychometrist holding in his
hand, or pressing to his head, a bullet from a bat-
tle field, is able to picture the battle itself. Or,
given a piece of ancient pottery or stone imple-
ment, the psychometrist is able to picture the
time and peoples connected with the object in
the past — sometimes after many centuries are
past. I once handed a good psychometrist a bit
of ornament taken from an Egyptian mummy
over three thousand years old. Though the psy-
chometrist did not know what the object was, or
from whence it had come, she was able to pic-
ture not only the scenes in which the Egyptian
had lived, but also the scenes connected with the
manufacture of the ornament, some three hun-
dred years before that time — for it turned out
that the ornament itself was an antique when the
Egyptian had acquired it. In another case, I had
the psychometrist describe in detail the animal
life, and the physical phenomena, of the age in
which a fossil had existed when alive — many
thousands of years ago. In the proper place in
this book, I will explain just how it is possible to
penetrate the secrets of the past by psychometric
vision — that is to say, the psychic laws making
the same possible.
Some of the most remarkable of recorded in-
100 CLAIRVOYANCE
stances 01 this form of psychometry known to the
Western world are those related in the works of
a geologist named Denton, who some fifty years
ago conducted a series of investigations into the
phenomena of psychometry. His recorded ex-
periments fill several volumes. Being a geol-
ogist, he was able to select the best subjects for
the experiments, and also to verify and decide
upon the accuracy of the reports given by the
psychometrists. His wife, herself, was a gifted
psychometrist, and it has been said of her, by
good authority, that "she is able, by putting a
piece of matter (whatever be its nature) to her
head, to see, either with her eyes closed or open,
all that the piece of matter, figuratively speak-
ing, ever saw, heard, or experienced." The fol-
lowing examples will give a good idea of the
Denton experiments, which are typical of this
class of psychometry.
Dr. Denton gave the psychometrist a small
fragment broken from a large meteorite. She
held it to her head, and reported: "This is curi-
ous. There is nothing at all to be seen. I feel as
if I were in the air. No, not in the air either,
but in nothing, no place. I am utterly unable to
describe it; it seems high, however I feel as
though I were rising, and my eyes are carried up-
wards; but I look around in vain; there is noth-
ing to be seen. I see clouds, now, but nothing
else. They are so close to me that I seem to be
in them. My head, and neck and eyes are
affected. My eyes are carried up, and I cannot
roll them down. Now the clouds appear lighter
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY 101
and lighter, and look as though the sunlight
would burst through them. As the clouds sepa-
rate, I can see a star or two, and then the moon
instead of the sun. The moon seems near, and
looks coarse and rough, and paler and larger in
size than I ever saw it before. What a strange
feeling comes over me! It appears as if I were
going right to the moon, and it looks as if the
moon were coming to me. It affects me ter-
ribly."
Dr. Denton adds: "She was too much affected
to continue the experiment longer. Had this
aerolite at some period of its history, come within
the sphere of the moon's attraction, and had its
velocity so increased that its augmented centrif-
ugal force had carried it off into space again,
whence, drawn by the superior attractive force
of the earth, it had fallen and ended its career
forever?"
At another time, Dr. Denton tested the psy-
chometrist with a whalebone walking cane. She
supposed it to be wood, but when she began to
report her psychic impressions, they came as fol-
lows : "I feel as though I were a monster. There
is nothing of a tree about it, and it is useless for
me to go further. I feel like vomiting. Now I
want to plunge into the water. I believe that I
am going to have a fit. My jaws are large
enough to take down a house at a gulp. I now
know what this is — it is whalebone. I see the
inside of the whale's mouth. It has no teeth.
It has a slimy look, but I only get a glimpse
102 CLAIRVOYANCE
of it. Now, I see the whole animal. What an
awful looking creature."
Another time, Dr. Denton gave the psychom-
etrist a minute piece of the enamel of the tooth of
a mastodon, which had been found thirty feet
below the surface of the earth. The psychom-
etrist had not the slightest knowledge of the
character of the tiny flake of enamel handed her,
but nevertheless reported: "My impression is
that it is a part of some monstrous animal, prob-
ably part of a tooth. I feel like a perfect monster,
with heavy legs, unwieldy head, and very large
body. I go down to a shallow stream to drink.
I can hardly speak, my jaws are so heavy. I
feel like getting down on all fours. What a noise
comes through the woods. I have an impulse to
answer it. My ears are very large and leathery,
and I can almost fancy they flap in my face as I
move my head. There are some older ones than
I. It seems so out of keeping to be talking with
these heavy jaws. They are dark brown, as if
they had been completely tanned. There is one
old fellow, with large tusks, that looks very
tough. I see several younger ones. In fact, there
is a whole herd. My upper lip moves curiously;
I can flap it up. It seems strange to me how it is
done. There is a plant growing here, higher than
my head. It is nearly as thick as my wrist, very
juicy, sweet, and tender — something like green
corn in taste, but sweeter. It is not the taste it
would have to a human being — oh no ! it is sick-
enish, and very unpleasant to the human taste."
These instances might be multiplied indefi-
CLAIRVOYANT PSYCHOMETRY 103
nitely, but the principle is the same in each. In
my own experience, I gave a small piece from
the Great Pyramid of Egypt to a psychometrist
who was uneducated and who knew nothing of
ancient Egypt or its history. Notwithstanding
this, she gave me such a detailed and complete
account of the life of ancient Egypt, which was
in such complete accordance with the opinions of
the best authorities, that I would hesitate about
publishing the report, for it certainly would be
regarded as rank imposture by the average scien-
tific authority. Some day, however, I may pub-
lish this.
There are no special directions to be given the
student in psychometry. All that can be done is
to suggest that each person should try the ex-
periments for himself, in order to find out
whether he has, or has not, the psychometric fac-
ulty. It may be developed by the methods that
will be given to develop all psychic powers, in
another part of this book. But much will depend
upon actual practice and exercise. Take strange
objects, and, sitting in a quiet room with the ob-
ject held to your forehead, shut out all thoughts
of the outside world, and forget all personal
affairs. In a short time, if the conditions are all
right, you will begin to have flashes of scenes
connected with the history of the object. At first
rather disconnected and more or less confused,
there will soon come to you a clearing away of
the scene, and the pictures will become quite
plain. Practice will develop the power. Practice
only when alone, or when in the presence of some
104 CLAIRVOYANCE
sympathetic friend or friends. Always avoid dis-
cordant and inharmonious company when prac-
ticing psychic powers. The best psychometrists
usually keep the physical eyes closed when prac-
ticing their power.
You have doubtless heard the sensing of sealed
letters spoken of as clairvoyance. But this is
merely one form of psychometry. The letter is
a very good connecting medium in psychometric
experiments. I advise you to begin your experi-
ments with old letters. You will be surprised to
discover how readily you will begin to receive
psychic impressions from the letters, either from
the person who wrote them, or from the place
in which they were written, or from some one
connected with the subsequent history. One of
the most interesting experiments I ever wit-
nessed in psychometry, was a case in which a let-
ter that had been forwarded from place to place,
until it had gone completely around the globe,
was psychometrized by a young Hindu maiden.
Although ignorant of the outside world, she was
able to picture the people and scenery of every
part of the globe in which the letter had traveled.
Her report was really an interesting "travel-
ogue" of a trip around the world, given in
tabloid form. You may obtain some interesting
results in psychometrizing old letters — but al-
ways be conscientious about it, and refrain from
divulging the secrets that will become yours in
the course of these experiments. Be honorable
on the astral plane, as well as on the physical —
more so, rather than less.
LESSON VII.
CLAIRVOYANT CRYSTAL GAZING.
As I have informed you in the preceding les-
son, Crystal Gazing is the second method of get-
ting en rapport with the astral plane. Under the
general term "Crystal Gazing" I include the en-
tire body of phenomena connected with the use
of the crystal, magic mirror, etc., the underlying
principle being the same in all of such cases.
The crystal, etc., serves to focus the psychic
energy of the person, in such a way that the
astral senses are induced to function more
readily than ordinarily. The student is cautioned
against regarding the crystal, or magic mirror,
as possessing any particular magic power in it-
self. On the contrary, the crystal, or magic mir-
ror serves merely as a physical instrument for the
astral vision, just as the telescope or microscope
performs a similar office for the physical vision.
Some persons are superstitious regarding the
crystal, and accord to it some weird super-
natural power, but the true occultist, understand-
ing the laws of the phenomena arising from its
use, does not fall into this error.
But, notwithstanding what I have just said, I
would be neglecting my full duty in the matter
if I failed to call your attention to the fact that
the continued use of a particular crystal often
has the effect of polarizing its molecules so as to
render it a far more efficient instrument as
time passes by. The longer the crystal is used
106 CLAIRVOYANCE
by one person, the better does it seem to serve
the uses of that person. I agree with many users
of the crystal in their belief that each person
should keep his crystal for his own personal use,
and not allow it to be used indiscriminately by
strangers or persons not in sympathy with occult
thought. The crystal tends to become polarized
according to the requirements of the person
habitually using it, and it is foolish to allow this
to be interfered with.
The use of crystals and other bright, shining
objects, has been common to psychic investi-
gators of all times, and in practically all lands. In
the earlier days of the race, pieces of clear quartz
or shining pebbles were generally employed.
Sometimes pieces of polished metal were so used.
In fact, nearly every object capable of being pol-
ished has been employed in this way at some
time, by some person. In our own day, the same
condition exists. In Australia the native sooth-
sayers and magicians employ water and other
shining objects, and, in some cases, even bright
flame, sparks, or glowing embers. In New
Zealand, the natives frequently employ drops of
blood held in the hollow of the hand. The Fijians
fill a hole with water, and gaze into it. South
American tribes use the polished surface of black,
or dark colored stones. The American Indians
use water, or shining pieces or flint or quartz.
Shining pieces of metal are frequently used by
the primitive races. Lang, writing on the sub-
ject, has said: "They stare into a crystal ball;
a cup; a mirror; a blot of ink (Egypt and India) ;
CRYSTAL GAZING 107
a drop of blood (the Maoris of New Zealand);
a bowl of water (American Indians) ; a pond
(Roman and African) ; water in a glass bowl
(Fez) ; or almost any polished surface, etc."
In the present-day revival of interest in crystal-
gazing among the wealthier classes of Europe
and America, some of the high-priced teachers
have insisted upon their pupils purchasing pure
crystal globes, claiming that these alone are
capable of serving the purpose fully. But, as
such crystals are very expensive, this advice has
prevented many from experimenting. But, the
advice is erroneous, for any globe of clear quartz,
or even moulded glass, will serve the purpose
equally well, and there is no need of spending
twenty-five to fifty dollars for a pure crystal
globe.
For that matter, you may obtain very good re-
sults from the use of a watch-crystal laid over a
piece of black velvet. Some, today, use with the
best effect small polished pieces of silver or other
bright metal. Others follow the old plan of using
a large drop of ink, poured into a small butter
plate. Some have small cups painted black on
the inside, into which they pour water — and ob-
tain excellent results therefrom.
Above all, I caution the student to pay no at-
tention to instructions regarding the necessity of
performing incantations or ceremonies over the
crystal or other object employed in crystal-gaz-
ing. This is but a bit of idle superstition, and
serves no useful purpose except, possibly, that of
giving the person confidence in the thing. All
108 CLAIRVOYANCE
ceremonies of this kind have for their purpose
merely the holding of the attention of the per-
son investigating, and giving him confidence in
the result — the latter having a decided psycho-
logical value, of course.
There are but few general directions necessary
for the person wishing to experiment in crystal
gazing. The principal thing is to maintain quiet,
and an earnest, serious state of mind — do not
make a merry game of it, if you wish to obtain
results. Again, always have the light behind
your back, instead of facing you. Gaze calmly
at the crystal, but do not strain your eyes. Do
not try to avoid winking your eyes — there is a
difference between "gazing" and "staring," re-
member. Some good authorities advise making
funnels of the hands, and using them as you
would a pair of opera glasses.
In many cases, a number of trials are required
before you will be able to get good results. In
others, at least some results are obtained at the
first trial. It is a good plan to try to bring into
vision something that you have already seen with
the physical eyes — some familiar object. The
first sign of actual psychic seeing in the crystal
usually appears as a cloudy appearance, or
"milky-mist," the crystal gradually losing its
transparency. In this milky cloud then gradu-
ally appears a form, or face, or scene of some
kind, more or less plainly defined. If you have
ever developed a photographic film or plate, you
will know how the picture gradually comes into
view.
CRYSTAL GAZING 109
W. T. Stead, the eminent English investigator
of psychic phenomena, has written as follows re-
garding the phenomena of crystal-gazing:
"There are some persons who cannot look into
an ordinary globular bottle without seeing pic-
tures form themselves without any effort or will
on their part, in the crystal globe. Crystal-gaz-
ing seems to be the least dangerous and most
simple of all forms of experimenting. You sim-
ply look into a crystal globe the size of a five-
shilling piece, or a water-bottle which is full of
clear water, and which is placed so that too much
light does not fall upon it, and then simply look
at it. You make no incantations, and engage in
no mumbo-jumbo business; you simply look at
it for two or three minutes, taking care not to tire
yourself, winking as much as you please, but fix-
ing your thought upon whatever you wish to see.
Then, if you have the faculty, the glass will cloud
over with a milky mist, and in the centre the
image is gradually precipitated in just the same
way as a photograph forms on the sensitive
plate."
The same authority relates the following inter-
esting experiment with the crystal: "Miss X.,
upon looking into the crystal on two occasions
as a test, to see if she could see me when she
was several miles off, saw not me, but a differ-
ent friend of mine on each occasion. She had
never seen either of my friends before, but im-
mediately identified them both on seeing them
afterward at my office. On one of the evenings
on which we experimented in the vain attempts
110 CLAIRVOYANCE
to photograph a 'double,' I dined with Madam C.
and her friend at a neighboring restaurant. As
she glanced at the water-bottle, Madam C. saw
a picture beginning to form, and, looking at it
from curiosity, described with considerable detail
an elderly gentleman whom she had never seen
before, and whom I did not in the least recognize
from her description at the moment. Three
hours afterward, when the seance was over,
Madam C, entered the room and recognized Mr.
Elliott, of Messrs. Elliott & Fry, as the gentle-
man whom she had seen and described in the
water-bottle at the restaurant. On another oc-
casion the picture was less agreeable; it was an
old man lying dead in bed with some one weeping
at his feet; but who it was, or what it related
to, no one knew."
Andrew Lang, another prominent investigator
of psychic phenomena, gives the following inter-
esting experiment in crystal-gazing: "I had
given a glass ball to a young lady, Miss Baillie,
who had scarcely any success with it. She lent
it to Miss Leslie, who saw a large, square, old-
fashioned red sofa covered with muslin (which
she afterward found in the next country-house
she visited). Miss Baillie's brother, a young
athlete, laughed at these experiments, took the
ball into his study, and came back looking 'gey
gash.' He admitted that he had seen a vision —
somebody he knew, under a lamp. He said that
he would discover during the week whether or
not he had seen right. This was at 5:30 on a
Sunday afternoon. On Tuesday, Mr. Baillie was
CRYSTAL GAZING 111
at a dance in a town forty miles from his home,
and met a Miss Preston. 'On Sunday/ he said,
'about half-past-five, you were sitting under a
standard lamp, in a dress I never saw you wear,
a blue blouse with lace over the shoulders, pour-
ing out tea for a man in blue serge, whose back
was toward me, so that I only saw the tip of his
mustache.' 'Why, the blinds must have been up,'
said Miss Preston. 'I was at Dulby,' said Mr.
Baillie, and he undeniably was."
Miss X., the well-known contributor to the
English magazine, "Borderland," several years
ago, made a somewhat extended inquiry into the
phenomena of crystal-gazing. From her experi-
ments, she made the following classification of
the phenomena of crystal-vision, which I here-
with reproduce for your benefit. Her classifica-
tion is as follows:
"1. Images of something unconsciously ob-
served. New reproductions, voluntary or spon-
taneous, and bringing no fresh knowledge to the
mind.
"2. Images of ideas unconsciously acquired
from others. Some memory or imaginative ef-
fect, which does not come from the gazer's ordi-
nary self. Revivals of memory. Illustrations of
thought.
"3. Images, clairvoyant or prophetic. Pic-
tures giving information as to something past,
present, or future, which the gazer has no other
chance of knowing."
As a matter of fact, each and every form or
phase of clairvoyance possible under other meth-
112 CLAIRVOYANCE
ods of inducing clairvoyant vision, is possible in
crystal-gazing. It is a mistake to consider
crystal-gazing as a separate and distinct form of
psychic phenomena. Crystal-gazing is merely
one particular form or method of inducing
psychic or clairvoyant vision. If you will keep
this in mind, you will avoid many common er-
rors and misunderstandings in the matter.
In order to give you the benefit of as many
points of view as possible, I shall now quote from
an old English writer on the subject of the use
of the crystal. I do this realizing that sometimes
a particular student will get more from one point
of view, than from another — some particular
phrasing will seem to reach his understanding,
where others fail. The directions of the English
authority are as follows:
"What is desired through the regular use of
the translucent sphere is to cultivate a personal
degree of clairvoyant power, so that visions of
things or events, past, present, and future, may
appear clearly to the interior vision, or eye of
the soul. In the pursuit of this effort only, the
crystal becomes at once both a beautiful, inter-
esting and harmless channel of pleasure and in-
struction, shorn of dangers, and rendered con-
ducive to mental development.
"To the attainment of this desirable end, at-
tention is asked to the following practical direc-
tions, which, if carefully followed, will lead to
success :
"(1) Select a quiet room where you will be
entirely undisturbed, taking care that it is as far
CRYSTAL GAZING 113
as possible free from mirrors, ornaments, pic-
tures, glaring colors, and the like, which may
otherwise district the attention. The room
should be of comfortable temperature, in ac-
cordance with the time of year, neither hot nor
cold. About 60 to 65 deg. Fahr. is suitable in
most cases, though allowance can be made where
necessary for natural differences in the tempera-
ments of various persons. Thus thin, nervous,
delicately-organized individuals, and those of
lymphatic and soft, easy-going, passive types, re-
quire a slightly warmer apartment than the more
positive class who are known by their dark eyes,
hair and complexion, combined with prominent
joints. Should a fire, or any form of artificial
light be necessary, it should be well screened off,
so as to prevent the light rays from being re-
flected in, or in any manner directly reaching the
crystal. The room should not be dark, but
rather shadowed, or charged with a dull light,
somewhat such as prevails on a cloudy or wet
day.
"(2) The crystal should be placed on its
stand on a table, or it may rest on a black vel-
vet cushion, but in either case it should be par-
tially surrounded by a black silk or similar wrap
or screen, so adjusted as to cut off any undesir-
able reflection. Before beginning to experiment,
remember that most frequently nothing will be
seen on the first occasion, and possibly not for
several sittings; though some sitters, if strongly
gifted with psychic powers in a state of uncon-
scious, and sometimes conscious degree of un-
114 CLAIRVOYANCE
foldment, may be fortunate enough to obtain
good results at the very first trial. If, therefore,
nothing is perceived during the first few at-
tempts, do not despair or become impatient, or
imagine that you will never see anything. There
is a royal road to crystal vision, but it is open
only to the combined password of Calmness, Pa-
tience, and Perseverance. If at the first at-
tempt to ride a bicycle, failure ensues, the only
way to learn is to pay attention to the necessary
rules, and to persevere daily until the ability to
ride comes naturally. Thus it is with the would-
be seer. Persevere in accordance with these sim-
ple directions, and success will sooner or later
crown your efforts.
"(3) Commence by sitting comfortably with
the eyes fixed upon the crystal, not by a fierce
stare, but with a steady, calm gaze, for ten min-
utes only, on the first occasion. In taking the
time it is best to hang your watch at a distance,
where, while the face is clearly visible, the tick-
ing is rendered inaudible. When the time is up,
carefully put the crystal away in its case, and
keep it in a dark place, under lock and key, allow-
ing no one but yourself to handle it. At the sec-
ond sitting, which should be at the same place,
in the same position, and at the same time, you
may increase the length of the effort to fifteen
minutes, and continue for this period during the
next five or six sittings, after which the time may
be gradually increased, but should in no case ex-
ceed one hour. The precise order of repetition is
always to be followed until the experimenter has
CRYSTAL GAZING 115
cuveloped an almost automatic ability to readily
obtain results, when it needs no longer to be ad-
hered to.
"(4) Any person, or persons, admitted to the
room, and allowed to remain while you sit,
should (a) keep absolute silence, and (b) remain
seated at a distance from you. When you have
developed your latent powers, questions may, of
course, be put to you by one of those present, but
even then in a very gentle, or low and slow tone
of voice; never suddenly, or in a forceful manner.
"(5) When you find the crystal begins to
look dull or cloudy, with small pin-points of light
glittering therein, like tiny stars, you may know
that you are commencing to obtain that for
which you seek — viz., crystalline vision. There-
fore, persevere with confidence. This condition
may, or may not, continue for several sittings,
the crystal seeming at times to alternately appear
and disappear, as in a mist. By and by this hazy
appearance, in its turn, will give place quite sud-
denly to a blindness of the senses to all else but
a blue or bluish ocean of space, against which, as
if it were a background, the vision will be clearly
apparent.
"(6) The crystal should not be used soon
after taking a meal, and care should be taken in
matters of diet to partake only of digestible
foods, and to avoid alcoholic beverages. Plain and
nourishing food, and outdoor exercise, with con-
tentment of mind, or love of simplicity in living,
are great aids to success. Mental anxiety, or
ill-health, are not conducive to the desired end.
116 CLAIRVOYANCE
Attention to correct breathing is of importance.
"(7) As regards the time at which events
seen will come to pass, each seer is usually im-
pressed with regard thereto; but, as a general
rule, visions appearing in the extreme back-
ground indicate time more remote, either past or
future, than those perceived nearer at hand, while
those appearing in the foreground, or closer to
the seer, denote the present or immediate future.
"(8) Two principal classes of vision will pre-
sent themselves to the sitter — (a) the Symbolic,
indicated by the appearance of symbols such as
a flag, boat, knife, gold, etc., and (b) Actual
Scenes and Personages, in action or otherwise.
Persons of a positive type of organization, the
more active, excitable, yet decided type, are most
likely to perceive symbolically, or allegorically;
while those of a passive nature usually receive
direct or literal revelations. Both classes will
find it necessary to carefully cultivate truthful-
ness, unselfishness, gratitude for what is shown,
and absolute confidence in the love, wisdom, and
guidance of God Himself."
As the student proceeds with the study of these
lessons, he will become acquainted with various
details and methods concerned with the various
phases of clairvoyance, which knowledge he may
then combine with the above, the whole aiding
him in the successful manifestation of the psychic
phenomena of crystal-gazing, which, as I have
said, is merely one phase of clairvoyance and un-
der the same general laws and rules of manifesta-
tion. Remember that present, past and future
CRYSTAL GAZING 117
clairvoyance all is possible to the highly devel-
oped crystal gazer.
The Astral Tube. Closely allied with the phe-
nomena of crystal-gazing, and that of psychom-
etry, is that which occultists know as "the astral
tube," although this psychic channel may be de-
veloped in ordinary clairvoyance by means of
the power of concentrated attention, etc. I shall
not enter into a detailed or technical discussion
of the astral tube, at this place, but I wish to
give you a general and comprehensive view of it
and its workings.
In case of the strong concentration of the
mind, in cases of psychometry or crystal-gazing,
a channel or "line of force" is set up in the astral
substance which composes the basis of the astral
plane. This is like the wake of a ship made on
the surface of the water through which the ship
has passed. Or it is like a current of magnetic
force in the ether. It is caused by a polarization
of the particles composing the astral substance,
which manifest in a current of intense vibrations
in the astral substance, which thus serve as a
ready channel for the transmission of psychic
force or astral energy.
The astral tube serves as a ready conductor of
the vibrations, currents and waves of energy on
the astral plane which carry to the astral senses
of the person the perception of the things, ob-
jects and scenes far removed from him in space
and time. How these things far removed in
space and time are perceived by the astral seer
is explained in subsequent lessons of this course.
118 CLAIRVOYANCE
At this place we are concerned merely with the
"channel" through which the currents of energy
flow, and which has been called the astral tube.
As a writer well says: "Through the astral
tube the astral senses actually 'sense' the sights,
and often the sounds, being manifested at a dis-
tance, just as one may see distant sights through
a telescope, or hear distant sounds through a
telephone. The astral tube is used in a variety
of forms of psychic phenomena. It is often used
unconsciously, and springs into existence spon-
taneously, under the strong influence of a vivid
emotion, desire or will. It is used by the trained
psychometrist, without the use of any 'starting
point,' of 'focal centre,' simply by the use of his
trained, developed and concentrated will. But its
most familiar and common use is in connection
with some object serving as a starting point or
focal centre. The starting point or focal centre,
above mentioned, is generally either what is
known as the 'associated object' in the class of
phenomena generally known as psychometry, or
else a glass or crystal ball, or similar polished
surface, in what is known as crystal-gazing."
Another authority tells his readers that:
"Astral sight, when it is cramped by being di-
rected along what is practically a tube, is limited
very much as physical sight would be under sim-
ilar circumstances, though if possessed in per-
fection it will continue to show, even at that dis-
tance, the auras, and therefore all the emotions
and most of the thoughts of the people under ob-
servation. * * * But, it may be said, the mere
CRYSTAL GAZING 119
fact that he is using astral sight ought to enable
him to see things from all sides at once. And
so it would, if he were using that sight in a nor-
mal way upon an object which was fairly near
him — within his astral reach, as it were; but at
a distance of hundreds or thousands of miles the
case is very different. Astral sight gives us the
advantage of an additional dimension, but there
is still such a thing as position in that dimension,
and it is naturally a potent factor in limiting the
use of the powers on that plane. * * * The limi-
tations resemble those of a man using a telescope
on the physical plane. The experimenter, for
example, has a particular field of view which can-
not be enlarged or altered; he is looking at his
scene from a certain direction, and he cannot sud-
denly turn it all around and see how it looks
from the other side. If he has sufficient psychic
energy to spare, he may drop altogether the
telescope he is using, and manufacture an entirely
new one for himself which will approach his ob-
jective somewhat differently; but this is not a
course at all likely to be adopted in practice."
The student will find that, as we progress,
many of these points which now seem com-
plicated and obscure will gradually take on the
aspect of simplicity and clearness. We must
crawl before we can walk, in psychic research as
well as in everything else.
LESSON VIII.
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE.
In the preceding two chapters, I have asked
you to consider the first two methods of inducing
the clairvoyant phenomena, namely, Psychom-
etry, and Crystal-Gazing, respectively. In these
cases you have seen how the clairvoyant gets en
rapport with the astral plane by means of phys-
ical objects, in the case of psychometric clair-
voyance; or by means of a shining object, in the
case of crystal gazing. Let us now consider the
third method of inducing the clairvoyant condi-
tion or state, i. e., by means of what may be called
Clairvoyant Reverie, in which the clairvoyant
gets en rapport with the astral plane by means
of psychic states in which the sights, sounds and
thoughts of the material and physical plane are
shut out of consciousness.
The student of the general subject of clairvoy-
ance will soon be impressed with two facts con-
cerning the production of clairvoyant phenom-
ena, namely, (1) that in the majority of the re-
corded cases of the investigators the clairvoyant
phenomena were obtained when the clairvoyant
was in the state of sleep, or at least semi-sleep or
drowsiness, the visioning appearing more or less
like a vivid dream; and (2) that in the case of
the clairvoyant voluntarily entering en rapport
with the astral plane, he or she would enter into
what seemed to be a kind of trance condition, in
some cases an absolute unconsciousness of the
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE 121
outside world being manifested. The student,
noting these facts, is apt to arrive at the con-
clusion that all clairvoyance is accompanied by
the condition of sleep, or trance, and that no
clairvoyant phenomena are possible unless this
psychic condition is first obtained. But this is
only a half-truth as we shall see in a moment.
In the first place, the student arriving at this
conclusion seems to have ignored the fact that
the phenomena of psychometry and crystal gaz-
ing, respectively, are as true instances of clair-
voyance as are those which are manifested in the
sleep or trance condition. It is true that some
psychometrists produce phenomena when they
are in a state of psychic quiescence, but, on the
other hand, many clairvoyant psychometrists
merely concentrate the attention on the object
before them, and remain perfectly wide-awake
and conscious on the physical plane. Likewise,
the average crystal gazer remains perfectly wide-
awake and conscious on the physical plane.
When the student takes these facts into consid-
eration, he begins to see that the trance
condition, and similar psychic states, are simply
particular methods of inducing the en rapport
condition for the clairvoyant, and are not insep-
arably bound up with the phenomena of clairvoy-
ance.
As the student progresses, moreover, he will
see that even in the case of Clairvoyant Reverie,
the third method of inducing the astral en rap-
port condition, the clairvoyant does not always
lose consciousness. In the case of many ad-
122 CLAIRVOYANCE
vanced and exceptionally well-developed clair-
voyants, no trance or sleep condition is induced.
In such cases the clairvoyant merely "shuts out"
the outside world of sights, sounds and thoughts,
by an effort of trained will, and then concentrates
steadily on the phenomena of the astral plane.
For that matter, the skilled and advanced oc-
cultist is able to function on the astral plane by
simply shifting his consciousness from one plane
to another, as the typist shifts from the small
letters of the keyboard to the capital letters, by
a mere pressure on the shift-key of the type-
writer.
The only reason that many clairvoyants mani-
festing along the lines of the third method,
known as "clairvoyant reverie," fall into the
trance or sleep condition, is that they have not as
yet acquired the rare art of controlling their con-
scious attention at will — this is something that
requires great practice. They find it easier to
drop into the condition of semi-trance, or semi-
sleep, than it is to deliberately shut out the outer
world by an act of pure will. Moreover, you will
find that in the majority of the recorded cases of
the investigators, the clairvoyance was more or
less spontaneous on the part of the clairvoyant
person, and was not produced by an act of will.
As we proceed to consider the various forms and
phases of clairvoyant phenomena, in these les-
sons, you will notice this fact. There are but few
recorded cases of voluntary clairvoyance in the
books of the investigators — the skilled clairvoy-
ants, and more particularly the advanced occult-
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE 123
ists, avoid the investigators rather than seek
them; they have no desire to be reported as "typ-
ical cases" of interesting psychic phenomena —
they leave that to the amateurs, and those to
whom the phenomena come as a wonderful
revelation akin to a miracle. This accounts for
the apparent predominance of this form of clair-
voyance— the secret is that the net of the in-
vestigators has caught only a certain kind of
psychic fish, while the others escape attention.
All this would be of no practical importance,
however, were it not for the fact that the aver-
age student is so impressed by the fact that he
must learn to induce the trance condition in order
to manifest clairvoyant phenomena, that he does
not even think of attempting to do the work
otherwise. The power of auto-suggestion oper-
ates here, as you will see by a moment's thought,
and erects an obstacle to his advance along vol-
untary lines. More than this, this mistaken idea
tends to encourage the student to cultivate the
trance condition, or at least some abnormal
psychic condition, by artificial means. I am posi-
tively opposed to the inducing of psychic con-
ditions by artificial means, for I consider such
practices most injurious and harmful for the per-
son using such methods. Outside of anything
else, it tends to render the person negative,
psychically, instead of positive — it tends to make
him or her subject to the psychic influence of
others, on both the physical and astral plane, in-
stead of retaining his or her own self-control and
mastery.
124 CLAIRVOYANCE
The best authorities among the occultists in-
struct their pupils that the state of clairvoyant
reverie may be safely and effectively induced by
the practice of mental concentration alone. They
advice positively against artificial methods. A
little common sense will show that they are right
in this matter. All that is needed is that the con-
sciousness shall be focused to a point — become
"one pointed" as the Hindu Yogis say. The in-
telligent practice of concentration accomplishes
this, without the necessity of any artificial meth-
ods of development, or the induction of abnormal
psychic states.
If you will stop a moment and realize how
easily you concentrate your attention when you
are witnessing an interesting play, or listening
to a beautiful rendition of some great master-
piece of musical composition, or gazing at some
miracle of art, you will see what I mean. In the
cases just mentioned, while your attention is
completely occupied with the interesting thing
before you, so that you have almost completely
shut out the outer world of sound, sight and
thought, you are, nevertheless, perfectly wide
awake and your consciousness is alert. The same
thing is true when you are reading a very inter-
esting book — the world is shut out from your
consciousness, and you are oblivious to the sights
and sounds around you. At the risk of being
considered flippant, I would remind you of the
common spectacle of two lovers so wrapped up
in each other's company that they forget that
there is a smiling world of people around them
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE 125
— time and space are forgotten to the two lov-
ers— to them there is only one world, with but
two persons in it. Again, how often have you
fallen into what is known as a "brown study,"
or "day dream," in which you huve been so
occupied with the thoughts and fancies float-
ing through your mind, that you forgot all
else. Well, then, this will give you a com-
mon-sense idea of the state that the occultists
teach may be induced in order to enter into the
state of en rapport with the astral plane — the
state in which clairvoyance is possible. Whether
you are seeking clairvoyance by the method of
psychometry, or by crystal gazing, or by clair-
voyant reverie — this will give you the key to the
state. It is a perfectly natural state — nothing
abnormal about it, you will notice.
To some who may think that I am laying too
much stress on the undesirability of artificial
methods of inducing the clairvoyant condition, I
would say that they are probably not aware of
the erroneous and often harmful teachings on the
subject that are being promulgated by ignorant
or misinformed teachers — " a little learning is a
dangerous thing," in many cases. It may sur-
prise some of my students to learn that some of
this class of teachers are instructing their pupils
to practice methods of self-hypnosis by gazing
steadily at a bright object until they fall uncon-
scious; or by gazing "cross eyed" at the tip of
the nose, or at an object held between the two
eyebrows. These are familiar methods of cer-
tain schools of hypnotism, and result in produc-
126 CLAIRVOYANCE
ing a state of artificial hypnosis, more or less
deep. Such a state is most undesirable, not only
by reason of its immediate effects, but also by
reason of the fact that it often results in a con-
dition of abnormal sensitiveness to the will of
others, or even to the thoughts and feelings of
others, on both the astral and the physical planes
of life. I emphatically warn my students against
any such practices, or anything resembling them.
While I dislike to dwell on the subject, I feel
that I should call the attention of my students to
the fact that certain teachers seek to produce the
abnormal psychic condition by means of exhaust-
ing breathing exercises, which make the person
dizzy and sleepy. This is all wrong. While
rhythmic breathing exercises have a certain value
in psychic phenomena, and are harmless when
properly practiced, nevertheless such practices
as those to which I have alluded are harmful to
the nervous system of the person, and also tend
to induce undesirable psychic conditions. Again,
some teachers have sought to have their students
hold their breath for comparatively long periods
of time, in order to bring about abnormal psychic
states. The slightest knowledge of physiology
informs one that such a practice must be harm-
ful; it causes the blood to become thick and im-
pure, and deficient in oxygen. It certainly will
produce a kind of drowsiness, for the same rea-
son that impure air in a room will do the same
thing — in both cases the blood stream is poisoned
and made impure. The purpose of rational and
normal breathing is to obviate just this thing —
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE 127
so these teachers are reversing a natural law of
the body, in order to produce an abnormal
psychic state. With all the energy in me, I cau-
tion you against this kind of thing.
Along the same line, I protest and warn you
against the practices advised by certain teachers
of "psychic development," who seek to have their
pupils induce abnormal physical and psychic con-
ditions by means of drugs, odor of certain chem-
icals, gases, etc. Such practices, as all true
occultists know, belong to the clans of the Black
Magicians, or devil worshippers, of the savage
races — they have no place in true occult teach-
ings. Common sense alone should warn persons
away from such things — but it seems to fail some
of them. I assert without fear of intelligent con-
tradiction, that no true occultist ever coun-
tenances any such practices as these.
All the true teachers are vigorous in their de-
nunciation of such false teachings and harmful
practices. In this same category, I place the
methods which are taught by certain persons,
namely, that of inducing abnormal physical and
psychic condition of giddiness and haziness by
means of "whirling" around in a circle until one
drops from giddiness, or until one "feels queer
in the head." This is a revival of the practices
of certain fanatics in Persia and India, who per-
form it as a religious rite until they fall into what
they consider a "holy sleep," but which is nothing
more than an abnormal and unhealthful physical
and psychic condition. Such practices are a
downward step, not an upward one. It seems a
128 CLAIRVOYANCE
pity that the necessity has arisen for such warn-
ings as these — but my duty, as I see it, is very
plain. To all who are tempted to "develop" in
this way, I say, positively, "DON'T!"
The scientific, rational way to develop the
astral senses is to first acquire the art of con-
centrating. Bear in mind that in concentration
the person, while shutting out the impressions of
the outside world in general, nevertheless focuses
and concentrates his attention upon the one mat-
ter before him. This is quite a different thing
from making oneself sensitive to every current
of thought and feeling that may be in the psychic
atmosphere. True concentration renders one
positive, while the other methods render one
negative. Contrary to the common opinion,
psychic concentration is a positive state, not a
negative — an active state, not a passive one. The
person who is able to concentrate strongly is a
master, while one who opens himself to "con-
trol," either physical or astral, is more or less of
a slave to other minds.
The student who will begin by experimenting
along the lines of contact mind-reading, and who
then advances along the lines of true telepathy,
as explained in the earlier chapters of this book,
will have made a good start, and considerable
progress, along the road to clairvoyant develop-
ment. The rest will be largely a matter of exer-
cise and practice. He will be aided by practicing
concentration along the general lines of the best
occult teaching. Such practice may consist of
concentration upon almost any physical object,
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE 129
keeping the thing well before the mind and atten-
tion. Do not tire the attention by practicing too
long at one time. The following general rules
will help you in developing concentration:
(1) The attention attaches more readily to
interesting rather than uninteresting things.
Therefore, select some interesting thing to study
and analyze by concentrated thought.
(2) The attention will decline in strength un-
less there is a variation in the stimulus. There-
fore, keep up the power of concentration by
either changing the object you are observing; or
else by discovering some new proerties, qual-
ities or attributes in it.
(3) The things you wish to shut out of con-
sciousness can best be shut out by your con-
centration upon some other thing — the attention
can dwell only upon one thing at a time, if
focused upon that one thing.
(4) The power of applying your attention,
steady and undissipated, to a single object, is a
mark of strong will and superior mental dis-
cipline— weak-minds cannot do this. Therefore,
in cultivating concentrated attention you are
really strengthening your mind and will.
(5) To develop concentrated attention, you
must learn to analyze, analyze, and analyze the
thing upon which you are bestowing concen-
trated attention. Therefore, proceed by select-
ing an object and analyzing it by concentrated
attention, taking one part after another, one by
one, until you have analyzed and mastered the
130 CLAIRVOYANCE
whole object. Give it the same attention that
the lover gives his loved one; the musician his
favorite composition; the artist his favorite work
of art; and the booklover his favorite book —
when you have accomplished this, you have mas-
tered concentration, and will be able to apply the
mind "one pointed" upon anything you wish,
physical or astral; and, consequently will have
no trouble in shutting-out disturbing impres-
sions.
(6) Learn to concentrate on the physical
plane, and you will be able to concentrate on the
astral plane as well. By the one who has mas-
tered concentration, trances and abnormal
psychic states will not be needed. The needle-
pointed mind is able to pierce the astral veil at
will, while the blunt-pointed mind is resisted and
defeated by the astral envelope, which while thin
is very tough and unyielding.
A well-known authority on psychic develop-
ment has well said: "Occasional flashes of clair-
voyance sometimes come to the highly cultured
and spiritual-minded man, even though he may
never have heard of the possibility of training
such a faculty. In his case such glimpses usually
signify that he is approaching that stage in his
evolution when these powers will naturally be-
gin to manifest themselves. Their appearance
should serve as an additional stimulus to him to
strive to maintain that high standard of moral
purity and mental balance without which clair-
voyance is a curse and not a blessing to its pos-
sessor. Between those who are entirely unim-
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE 131
pressionable and those who are in full possession
of clairvoyant power, there are many interme-
diate stages. Students often ask how this clair-
voyant faculty will first be manifested in them-
selves— how they may know when they have
reached the stage at which its first faint fore-
shadowings are beginning to be visible. Cases
differ so widely that it is impossible to give to
this question any answer that will be universally
applicable.
"Some people begin by a plunge, as it were, and
under some unusual stimulus become able just
for once to see some striking vision; and very
often in such a case, because the experience does
not repeat itself, the seer comes in time to be-
lieve that on that occasion he must have been the
victim of hallucination. Others begin by becom-
ing intermittently conscious of the brilliant col-
ors and vibrations of the human aura; yet others
find themselves with increasing frequency seeing
and hearing something to which those around
them are blind and deaf; others, again, see faces,
landscapes, or colored clouds floating before their
eyes in the dark before they sink to rest; while
perhaps the commonest experience of all is that
of those who begin to recollect with greater and
greater clearness what they have seen and heard
on other planes during sleep."
The authority in question gives the following
excellent advice regarding the subject of the de-
velopment of clairvoyant power and astral vision-
ing: "Now the fact is that there are many
methods by which it may be developed, but only
132 CLAIRVOYANCE
one which can be at all safely recommended for
general use — that of which we shall speak last
of all. Among the less advanced nations of the
world the clairvoyant state has been produced in
various objectionable ways; among some of the
non-Aryan tribes of India, by the use of intoxi-
cating drugs or the inhaling of stupefying fumes;
among the dervishes, by whirling in a mad dance
of religious fervor until vertigo and insensibility
supervene; among the followers of the abomin-
able practices of the Voodoo cult, by frightful
sacrifices and loathsome rites of black magic.
Methods such as these are happily not in vogue
in our own race, yet even among us large num-
bers of dabblers in this ancient art adopt some
plan of self-hypnotization, such as gazing at a
bright spot, or the repetition of some formula un-
til a condition of semi-stupefaction is produced;
while yet another school among them would en-
deavor to arrive at similar results by the use of
some of the Indian systems of regulation of the
breath. All these methods are unequivocally to
be condemned as quite unsafe for the practice of
the ordinary man who has no idea of what he
is doing — who is simply making vague experi-
ments in an unknown world. Even the method
of obtaining clairvoyance by allowing oneself to
be mesmerized by another person is one from
which I should myself shrink with the most de-
cided distaste; and assuredly it should never be
attempted except under conditions of absolute
trust and affection between the magnetiser and
the magnetised, and a perfection of purity in
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE 133
heart and soul, in mind and intention, such as
is rarely to be seen among any but the great-
est of saints.
"Yet there is one practice which is advised by
all religions alike — which if adopted carefully
and reverently can do no harm to any human
being, yet from which a very pure type of clair-
voyance has sometimes been developed; and that
is the practice of meditation . Let a man choose
a certain time every day — a time when he can
rely upon being quiet and undisturbed, though
preferably in the daytime rather than at night —
and set himself at that time to keep his mind for
a few minutes entirely free from all earthly
thoughts of any kind whatever, and, when that
is achieved, to direct the whole force of his be-
ing towards the highest ideal that he happens to
know. He will find that to gain such perfect con-
trol of thought is enormously more difficult than
he supposes, but when he attains it it cannot but
be in every way most beneficial to him, and as
he grows more and more able to elevate and con-
centrate his thought, he may gradually find that
new worlds are opening before his sight. As a
preliminary training towards the satisfactory
achievement of such meditation, he will find it
desirable to make a practice of concentration in
the affairs of daily life — even in the smallest of
them. If he writes a letter, let him think of
nothing else but that letter until it is finished;
if he reads a book, let him see to it that his
thought is never allowed to wander from his au-
thor's meaning . He must learn to hold his mind
134 CLAIRVOYANCE
in check, and to be master of that also, as well
as of his lower passions; he must patiently labor
to acquire absolute control of his thoughts, so
that he will always know exactly what he is
thinking about, and why — so that he can use
his mind, and turn it or hold it still, as a prac-
ticed swordsman turns his weapon where he
will."
I have given the above full quotation from this
authority, not merely because that from another
angle he states the same general principles as
do I; but also because his personal experience in
actual clairvoyant phenomena is so extended and
varied that any word from him on the subject of
the development of clairvoyant power must have
a value of its own. While I differ from this
authority on some points of detail of theory and
practice, nevertheless I gladly testify to the
soundness of his views as above quoted, and pass
them on to my students for careful consideration
and attention. The student will do well to heed
what he has to say, and to combine such opin-
ion with what I have uttered in the earlier part
of this chapter — there will be found a close agree-
ment in principle and practice.
And, now let us pass on to a consideration of
the various forms and phases of the clairvoy-
ant phenomena itself. The subject is fascinat-
ing, and I am sure that you will enjoy this little
excursion into the strange realm of thought re-
garding the astral phenomena of clairvoyance.
But, be sure to master each lesson before pro-
ceeding to the rest, as otherwise you will have to
CLAIRVOYANT REVERIE 135
turn back the leaves of the course in order to pick
up some point of teaching that you have
neglected.
LESSON IX.
SIMPLE CLAIRVOYANCE.
In a previous chapter we have seen that there
are three well-defined classes of clairvoyance,
namely, (1) Simple clairvoyance; (2) Clairvoy-
ance in space; and (3) Clairvoyance in Time. I
shall now consider these in sequence, beginning
with the first, Simple Clairvoyance.
In simple clairvoyance the clairvoyant person
merely senses the auric emanations of other per-
sons, such as the auric vibrations, colors, etc.,
currents of thought vibrations, etc., but does not
see events or scenes removed in space or time
from the observer. There are other phenomena
peculiar to this class of clairvoyance which I shall
note as we progress with this chapter.
An authority on the subject of astral phenom-
ena has written interestingly, as follows, regard-
ing some of the phases of simple clairvoyance:
"When we come to consider the additional facil-
ities which it offers in the observation of animate
objects, we see still more clearly the advantages
of astral vision. It exhibits to the clairvoyant
the aura of plants and animals, and thus in the
case of the latter their desires and emotions, and
whatever thoughts they may have, are all plainly
shown before his eyes. But it is in dealing with
human beings that he will most appreciate the
value of this faculty, for he will often be able
to help them far more effectually when he guides
himself by the information which it gives him.
SIMPLE CLAIRVOYANCE 137
"He will be able to see the aura as far up as
the astral body, and though that leaves all the
higher part of a man still hidden from his gaze,
he will nevertheless find it possible by careful
observation to learn a good deal about the higher
part from what is within his reach. His capacity
of examination of the etheric double will give
him considerable advantage in locating and
classifying any defects or diseases of the nervous
system, while from the appearance of the astral
body he will at once be aware of all the emotions,
passions, desires and tendencies of the man be-
fore him, and even of very many of his thoughts
also.
"As he looks at a person he will see him sur-
rounded by the luminous mist of the astral aura,
flashing with all sorts of brilliant colors, and con-
stantly changing in hue and brilliancy with every
variation of the person's thoughts and feelings.
He will see this aura flooded with the beautiful
rose-color of pure affection, the rich blue of de-
votional feeling, the hard, dull brown of selfish-
ness, the deep scarlet of anger, the horrible lurid
red of sensuality, the livid grey of fear, the black
clouds of hatred and malice, or any of the other
hundredfold indications so easily to be read in
it by the practiced eye; and thus it will be im-
possible for any persons to conceal from him the
real state of their feelings on any subject. Not
only does the astral aura show him the temporary
result of the emotion passing through it at the
moment, but it also gives him, by an arrange-
ment and proportion of its colors when in a con-
138 CLAIRVOYANCE
dition of comparative rest, a clue to the general
disposition and character of its owner."
By simple clairvoyance in a certain stage of
development the clairvoyant person is able to
sense the presence of the human aura, by means
of his astral sight. The human aura, as all stu-
dents of occultism know, is that peculiar emana-
tion of astral vibrations that extends from each
living human being, surrounding him in an egg-
shaped form for a distance of two to three feet on
all sides. This peculiar nebulous envelope is not
visible to the physical sight, and may be dis-
cerned only by means of the astral senses. It,
however, may be dimly "felt" by many persons
coming into the presence of other persons, and
constitutes a personal atmosphere which is
sensed by other persons.
The trained clairvoyant vision sees the human
aura as a nebulous hazy substance, like a lumi-
nous cloud, surrounding the person for two or
three feet on each side of his body, being more
dense near the body and gradually becoming less
dense as it extends away from the body. It has
a phosphorescent appearance, with a peculiar
tremulous motion manifesting through its sub-
stance. The clairvoyant sees the human aura as
composed of all the colors of the spectrum, the
combination shifting with the changing mental
and emotional states of the person. But, in a
general way, it may be said that each person has
his or her or distinctive astral auric colors, de-
pending upon his or her general character or
personality. Each mental state, or emotional
SIMPLE CLAIRVOYANCE 139
manifestation, has its own particular shade or
combination of shades of auric coloring. This
beautiful kaleidoscopic spectacle has its own
meaning to the advanced occultist with clairvoy-
ant vision, for he is able to read the character and
general mental states of the person by means of
studying his astral auric colors. I have ex-
plained these auric colors, and their meanings, in
my little book entitled "The Human Aura."
The human aura is not always in a state of
calm phosphorescence, however. On the con-
trary, it sometimes manifests great flames, like
those of a fiery furnace, which shoot forth in
great tongues, and dart forth suddenly in certain
directions toward the objects attracting them.
Under great emotional excitement the auric
flames move around in swift circling whirlpools,
or else swirl away from a centre. Again, it seems
to throw forth tiny glistening sparks of astral
vibrations, some of which travel for great dis-
tance.
The clairvoyant vision is also able to discern
what is called the "prana aura" of a person. By
this term is indicated that peculiar emanation of
vital force which surrounds the physical body
of each and every person. In fact, many persons
of but slight clairvoyant power, who cannot
sense the auric colors, are able to perceive this
prana-aura without trouble. It is sometimes
called the "health aura," or "physical aura." It
is colorless, or rather about the shade of clear
glass, diamond, or water. It is streaked with
very minute, bristle-like lines. In a state of good
140 CLAIRVOYANCE
health, these fine lines are stiff like toothbrush
bristles; while, in cases of poor health, these lines
droop, curl and present a furlike appearance. It
is sometimes filled with minute sparkling par-
ticles, like tiny electric sparks in rapid vibratory-
motion.
To the clairvoyant vision the prana-aura ap-
pears like the vibrating heated air arising from
a fire, or stove, or from the heated earth in sum-
mer. If the student will close his eyes partially,
and will peer through narrowed eyelids, he will
in all probability be able to perceive this prana-
aura surrounding the body of some healthy,
vigorous person — particularly if the person is
sitting in a dim light. Looking closely, he will
see the peculiar vibratory motion, like heated air,
at a distance of about two inches from the body
of the person. It requires a little practice in or-
der to acquire the knack of perceiving these
vibrations — a little experimenting in order to get
just the right light on the person — but practice
will bring success, and you will be repaid for your
trouble.
In the same way, the student may by practice
acquire the faculty to perceiving his own prana-
aura. The simplest way to obtain this last men-
tioned result is to place your fingers (spread out
in fan-shape) against a black background, in a
dim light. Then gaze at the fingers with nar-
rowed eyelids, and half-closed eyes. After a little
practice, you will see a fine thin line surrounding
your fingers on all sides — a semi-luminous bor-
der of prana-aura. In most cases this border
SIMPLE CLAIRVOYANCE 141
of aura is colorless, but sometimes a very pale
yellowish hue is perceived. The stronger the
vital force of the person, the stronger and
brighter will this border of prana-aura appear.
The aura surrounding the fingers will appear
very much like the semi-luminous radiance sur-
rounding a gas-flame, or the flame of a candle,
which is familiar to nearly everyone.
Another peculiar phenomenon of the astral
plane, perceived by clairvoyants of a certain de-
gree of development, is that which is known as
the "thought-form." A thought-form is a spe-
cialized grouping of astral substance, crystalized
by the strong thought impulses or vibrations of a
person thinking, or manifesting strong emotional
excitement. It is generated in the aura of the
person, in the first place, but is then thrown off
or emitted from the atmosphere of the person,
and is sent off into space. A thought-form is
really but a strongly manifested thought or feel-
ing which has taken form in the astral substance.
Its power and duration depend upon the degree
of force of the thought or feeling manifesting it.
These thought-forms differ very materially
from one another in form and general appear-
ance. The most common form is that of a tiny
series of waves, similar to those caused by the
dropping of a pebble in a pond of water. Some-
times the thought-form takes on the appearance
of a whirlpool, rotating around a centre, and
moving through space as well. Another form is
like that of the pin-wheel fireworks, swirling
away from its centre as it moves through space.
142 CLAIRVOYANCE
Still another form is that of a whirling ring, like
that emitted from a smokestack of a locomotive,
or the mouth of a smoker — the familiar "ring" of
the smoker. Others have the form and appear-
ance of semi-luminous globes, glowing like a
giant opal.
Other thought-forms are emitted in jet-like
streams, like steam puffed out from a tea-kettle.
Again, it will appear as a series of short puffs of
steam-like appearance. Again, it will twist along
like an eel or snake. Another time it will twist
its way like a corkscrew. At other times it will
appear as a bomb, or series of bombs projected
from the aura of the thinker. Sometimes, as in
the case of a vigorous thinker or speaker, these
thought-form bombs will be seen to explode
when they reach the aura of the person addressed
or thought of. Other forms appear like nebulous
things resembling an octopus, whose twining
tentacles twist around the person to whom they
are directed.
Each thought-form bears the same color that
it possessed when generated in the aura of its
creator, though the colors seem to fade with time.
Many of them glow with a dull phosphorescence,
instead of bright coloring. The atmosphere of
every person, and every place, is filled with vari-
ous thought-forms emanated from the person, or
persons who inhabit the place. Each building
has its own distinctive thought-forms, which per-
meate its mental atmosphere, and which are
clearly discernible by trained clairvoyant vision.
I here take the liberty of quoting a few para-
SIMPLE CLAIRVOYANCE 143
graphs from my little book entitled "The Astral
World," in which the phenomena of the astral
plane are explained in detail. I reproduce them
here in order to show you what you may see on
the astral plane when your clairvoyant vision is
sufficiently developed to function there. The
words are addressed to one who is sensing on the
astral plane.
"Notice that Deautiful spiritual blue around
that woman's head! And see that ugly muddy
red around that man passing her! Here comes
an intellectual giant — see that beautiful golden
yellow around his head, like a nimbus! But I
don't exactly like that shade of red around his
body — and there is too marked an absence of blue
in his aura! He lacks harmonious development.
Do you notice those great clouds of semi-lumi-
nous substance, which are slowly floating along?
— notice how the colors vary in them. Those are
clouds of thought-vibrations, representing the
composite thought of a multitude of people. Also
notice how each body of thought is drawing
to itself little fragments of similar thought-
forms and energy. You see here the tendency of
thought-forms to attract others of their kind —
how like the proverbial birds of a feather, they
flock together — how thoughts come home, bring-
ing their friends with them — how each man
creates his own thought atmosphere.
"Speaking of atmospheres, do you notice that
each shop we pass has its own peculiar thought-
atmosphere? If you look into the houses on
either side of the street, you will see that the
144 CLAIRVOYANCE
same thing is true. The very street itself has its
own atmosphere, created by the composite
thought of those inhabiting and frequenting it.
No ! do not pass down that side street — its astral
atmosphere is too depressing, and its colors too
horrible and disgusting for you to witness just
now — you might get discouraged and fly back
to your physical body for relief. Look at those
thought-forms flying through the atmosphere!
What a variety of form and coloring! Some most
beautiful, the majority quite neutral in tint, and
occasionally a fierce, fiery one tearing its way
along toward its mark. Observe those whirling
and swirling thought-forms as they are thrown
off from that business-house. Across the street,
notice that great octopus monster of a thought-
form, with its great tentacles striving to wind
around persons and draw them into that flashy
dance-hall and dram-shop. A devilish monster
which we would do well to destroy. Turn your
concentrated thought upon it, and will it out of
existence — there, that's the right way; watch
it sicken and shrivel ! But, alas ! more of its kind
will come forth from that place."
The above represents the sights common to
the advanced occultist who explores the astral
plane either in his astral body, or else by means
of clairvoyant vision. To such a one, these sights
are just as natural as those of the physical plane
to the person functioning by ordinary physical
senses. One is as natural as is the other — there
is nothing supernatural about either.
But there are other, and even more wonderful
SIMPLE CLAIRVOYANCE 145
attributes of astral visioning than that which we
have just related. Let us take a general survey
of these, so that you may be familiar with what
you hope to see on the astral plane, and which
you will see when you have sufficiently developed
your clairvoyant powers.
What would you think if you could "see
through a brick wall?" Well, the clairvoyant is
able to do this. For that matter, the physical
X Rays are able to penetrate through solid sub-
stances, and the astral vibrations are even more
subtle than these. It seems strange to hear of
this kind of visioning as purely natural, doesn't
it? It smacks strongly of the old supernatural
tales — but it is as simply natural as is the X Ray.
The advanced clairvoyant is able to see through
the most solid objects, and inside of anything,
for that matter. The astral senses register the
subtle vibrations of the astral plane, just as the
physical eye registers the ordinary rays of light-
energy. You are able to see through solid glass,
with the physical eye, are you not? Well, in
the same way the clairvoyant sees through solid
steel or granite. It is all a matter of registering
vibrations of energy — nothing more, and noth-
ing less.
It is in this way that the trained clairvoyant is
able to read from closed books, sealed letters, etc.
In the same way, he is able to pierce the dense
soil, and to see far down into the depths of the
earth, subject to certain limitations. Veins of
coal, oil, and other substances have been discov-
ered clairvoyantly in this way. Not every clair-
146 CLAIRVOYANCE
voyant is able to do this, but the advanced ones
have done it. In the same way, the trained clair-
voyant is able to see inside the bodies of sick per-
sons, and to diagnose their ailments, providing,
of course, he is familiar with the appearance of
the organs in health and in disease, and has a
sufficient knowledge of physiology and pathol-
ogy to interpret what he sees.
An authority on the phenomena of the astral
plane has written entertainingly and correctly
regarding this phase of simple clairvoyance, as
follows: "The possession of this extraordinary
and scarcely expressible power, then, must al-
ways be borne in mind through all that follows.
It lays every point in the interior of every solid
body absolutely open to the gaze of the seer,
just as every point in the interior of a circle lies
open to the gaze of a man looking down upon it.
But even this is by no means all that it gives to
its possessor. He sees not only the inside as
well as the outside of every object, but also its
astral counterpart. Every atom and molecule of
physical matter has its corresponding astral
atoms and molecules, and the mass which is built
up out of these is clearly visible to the clairvoy-
ant. Usually the astral form of any object pro-
jects somewhat beyond the physical part of it,
and thus metals, stones and other things are
seen surrounded by an astral aura.
"It will be seen at once that even in the study
of inorganic matter a man gains immensely by
the acquisition of this vision. Not only does he
see the astral part of the object at which he looks,
SIMPLE CLAIRVOYANCE 147
which before was wholly hidden from him; not
only does he see much more of its physical con-
stitution than he did before, but even what was
visible to him before is now seen much more
clearly and truly. * * * Another strange power
of which he may find himself in possession is that
of magnifying at will the minutest physical or
astral particle to any desired size, as through a
microscope — though no microscope ever made,
or ever likely to be made, possesses even a thou-
sandth part of this psychic magnifying power.
By its means the hypothetical molecule and atom
postulated by science become visible and living
realities to the occult student, and on this closer
examination he finds them to be much more com-
plex in their structure than the scientific man has
yet realized them to be. It also enables him to
follow with the closest attention and the most
lively interest all kinds of electrical, magnetic,
and other etheric action; and when some of the
specialists in these branches of science are able to
develop the power to see these things whereof
they write so facilely, some very wonderful and
beautiful revelations may be expected.
"This is one of the siddihis or powers de-
scribed in the Oriental books as accruing to the
man who devotes himself to spiritual develop-
ment, though the name under which it is there
mentioned might not be immediately recogniz-
able. It is referred to as 'the power of making
oneself large or small at will/ and the reason of
a description which appears so oddly to reverse
the fact is that in reality the method by which
148 CLAIRVOYANCE
this feat is performed is precisely that indicated
in these ancient books. It is by the use of tempo-
rary visual machinery of inconceivable minute-
ness that the world of the infinitely little is
so clearly seen; and in the same way (or rather
in the opposite way) it is by enormously increas-
ing the size of the machinery used that it be-
comes possible to increase the breadth of one's
view — in the physical sense as well as, let us
hope, in the moral — far beyond anything that
science has ever dreamt of as possible for man.
So that the alteration in size is really in the ve-
hicle of the student's consciousness, and not in
anything outside of himself; and the old Oriental
books have, after all, put the case more accurately
than have we. I have indicated, though only in
the roughest outlines, what a trained student,
possessed of full astral vision, would see in the
immensely wider world to which that vision in-
troduced him; but I have said nothing of the
stupendous change in his mental attitude which
comes from the experimental certainty regarding
matters of paramount importance. The differ-
ence between even the profoundest intellectual
conviction, and the precise knowledge gained by
direct personal experience, must be felt in order
to be appreciated."
Now, here at this place, I wish to call the at-
tention of the student to the fact that while the
above stated phenomena strictly belong to the
class of "simple clairvoyance," rather than to
"space clairvoyance," or "time clairvoyance" re-
spectively, nevertheless the same phenomena
SIMPLE CLAIRVOYANCE 149
may be manifested in connection with that of
these other classes of clairvoyance. For instance,
in space clairvoyance the trained clairvoyant is
able not only to perceive things happening at
points far distant, but may also (if highly devel-
oped psychically) be able to perceive the details
just mentioned as well as if he were at that dis-
tant point in person. Likewise, in time clair-
voyance, the clairvoyant may exercise the power
of magnifying vision regarding the object far
distant in time, just as if he were living in that
time. So here as elsewhere we find the differ-
ent classes of phenomena shading and blending
into each other. At the best, classifications are
useful principally for convenience in intellectual
consideration and reasoning.
In the same way, the clairvoyant may manifest
the above mentioned forms of astral sensing in
cases when the astral vision has been awakened
by psychometry, or by crystal gazing, as well as
in those cases in which the condition has been
brought about through meditation, or similar
methods.
I would also call the attention of the student
to the fact that in the above description of the
phenomena of simple clairvoyance I have made
no mention of the sights of the astral plane which
often become visible to the clairvoyant, and
which have to do with astral bodies, astral shells,
the disembodied souls of those who have passed
on to other planes of existence, etc. I shall take
up these matters in other parts of this course, and
shall not dwell upon them in this place. But, I
150 CLAIRVOYANCE
wish you to remember that the same power
which enables you to sense other objects by
means of the astral scenes, is the same that is
called into operation in the cases to which I have
just referred.
The astral plane is a wonderful plane or field of
being, containing many strange and wonderful
beings and things. The person living on the
physical plane may visit the astral plane in the
astral body; and, again, he may perceive the hap-
penings and scenes of that plane by means of the
awakened and developed astral senses. Some
clairvoyants find it easy to function in one way,
and some in another. It is reserved for the scien-
tifically developed clairvoyant to manifest the
well-rounded power to perceive the phenomena
of the astral plane in its wonderful entirety.
Finally, you will see by reference to other
chapters of this book, that one may manifest sim-
ple clairvoyant powers (as well as the more com-
plicated ones of time and space clairvoyance) not
only in the ordinary waking state, but also in the
state of dreams. In fact, some of the most strik-
ing psychic phenomena are manifested when the
seer is in the dream state. As we proceed, you
will find that every phase of the great subject will
fit into its place, and will be found to blend with
every other phase. There will be found a logical
harmony and unity of thought pervading the
whole subject. But we must use single bricks
and stones as we build — it is only in the com-
pleted structure that we may perceive the har-
monious unity.
LESSON X.
CLAIRVOYANCE OF DISTANT SCENES.
Let us now consider the phenomena of the sec-
ond class of clairvoyance, namely, Clairvoyance
in Space.
In space clairvoyance the clairvoyant person
senses scenes and events removed in space from
the observer — that is to say, scenes and events
situated outside of the range of the physical
vision of the clairvoyant. In this class also is in-
cluded certain phenomena in which the clairvoy-
ant vision is able to discern things that may be
concealed or obscured by intervening material
objects. Some of the many different forms and
phases of space clairvoyance are illustrated by
the following examples, all taken from the best
sources.
Bushnell relates the following well-known
case of space clairvoyance: "Capt. Yount, of
Napa Valley, California, one midwinter's night
had a dream in which he saw what appeared to
be a company of emigrants arrested by the snows
of the mountains, and perishing rapidly by cold
and hunger. He noted the very cast of the
scenery, marked by a huge, perpendicular front
of white-rock cliff; he saw the men cutting off
what appeared to be tree-tops rising out of deep
gulfs of snow; he distinguished the very features
of the persons, and their look of peculiar distress.
He awoke profoundly impressed by the distinct-
ness and apparent reality of the dream. He at
152 CLAIRVOYANCE
length fell asleep, and dreamed exactly the same
dream over again. In the morning he could not
expel it from his mind. Falling in shortly after
with an old hunter comrade, he told his story,
and was only the more deeply impressed by him
recognizing without hesitation the scenery of the
dream. This comrade came over the Sierra by
the Carson Valley Pass, and declared that a spot
in the Pass exactly answered his description.
"By this the unsophistical patriarch was de-
cided. He immediately collected a company of
men, with mules and blankets and all necessary
provisions. The neighbors were laughing mean-
time at his credulity. 'No matter,' he said, 'I am
able to do this, and I will, for I verily believe
that the fact is according to my dream.' The
men were sent into the mountains one hundred
and fifty miles distant, direct to the Carson Val-
ley Pass. And there they found the company
exactly in the condition of the dream, and
brought in the remnant alive."
In connection with this case, some leading,
occultists are of the opinion that the thought-
waves from the minds of the distressed lost per-
sons reached Capt. Yount in his sleep, and
awakened his subconscious attention. Having
natural clairvoyant power, though previously un-
aware of it, he naturally directed his astral vision
to the source of the mental currents, and per-
ceived clairvoyantly the scene described in the
story. Not having any acquaintance with any of
the lost party, it was only by reason of the men-
tal currents of distress so sent out that his atten-
DISTANT SCENES 153
tion was attracted. This is a very interesting
case, because several psychic factors are involved
in it, as I have just said.
In the following case, there is found a connect-
ing link of acquaintance with a person playing a
prominent part in the scene, although there was
no conscious appeal to the clairvoyant, nor con-
scious interest on her part regarding the case.
The story is well-known, and appears in the Pro-
ceedings of the Society for Psychical Research.
It runs as follows:
"Mrs. Broughton awoke one night in 1844, and
roused her husband, telling him that something
dreadful had happened in France. He begged
her to go asleep again, and not trouble him. She
assured him that she was not asleep when she
saw what she insisted on telling him — what
she saw in fact. She saw, first, a carriage acci-
dent, or rather, the scene of such an accident
which had occurred a few moments before.
What she saw was the result of the accident — a
broken carriage, a crowd collected, a figure
gently raised and carried into the nearest house,
then a figure lying on a bed, which she recog-
nized as the Duke of Orleans. Gradually friends
collected around the bed — among them several
members of the French royal family — the queen,
then the king, all silently, tearfully, watching the
evidently dying duke. One man (she could see
his back, but did not know who he was) was
a doctor. He stood bending over the duke, feel-
ing his pulse, with his watch in the other hand.
And then all passed away, and she saw no more.
154 CLAIRVOYANCE
"As soon as it was daylight she wrote down in
her journal all that she had seen. It was before
the days of the telegraph, and two or more days
passed before the newspapers announced 'The
Death of the Duke of Orleans.' Visiting Paris a
short time afterwards, she saw and recognized
the place of the accident, and received the ex-
planation of her impression. The doctor who
attended the dying duke was an old friend of
hers, and as he watched by the bed his mind had
been constantly occupied with her and her
family."
In many cases of clairvoyance of this kind,
there is found to exist a strong connecting link
of mutual interest or affection, over which flows
the strong attention-arousing force of need or
distress, which calls into operation the clairvoy-
ant visioning.
In other cases there seems to be lacking any
connecting link, although, even in such cases
there may be a subconscious link connecting the
clairvoyant with the scene or event. An interest-
ing example of this last mentioned phase is that
related by W. T. Stead, the English editor and
author, as having happened to himself. Mr.
Stead's recital follows:
"I got into bed and was not able to go to
sleep. I shut my eyes and waited for sleep to
come; instead of sleep, however, there came
to me a succession of curiously vivid clairvoyant
pictures. There was no light in the room, and
it was perfectly dark; I had my eyes shut also.
But, notwithstanding the darkness, I suddenly
DISTANT SCENES 155
was conscious of looking at a scene of singular
beauty. It was as if I saw a living miniature
about the size of a magic-lantern slide. At this
moment I can recall the scene as if I saw it again.
It was a seaside piece. The moon was shining
upon the water, which rippled slowly on to the
beach. Right before me a long mole ran into the
water. On either side of the mole irregular rocks
stood up above the sea-level. On the shore stood
several houses, square and rude, which resembled
nothing that I had ever seen in house archi-
tecture. No one was stirring, but the moon was
there and the sea and the gleam of the moon-
light on the rippling waters, just as if I had been
looking on the actual scene. It was so beautiful
that I remember thinking that if it continued I
should be so interested in looking at it that I
should never go asleep. I was wide awake, and
at the same time that I saw the scene I distinctly
heard the dripping of the rain outside the win-
dow. Then, suddenly without any apparent ob-
ject or reason, the scene changed.
"The moonlight sea vanished, and in its place
I was looking right into the interior of a read-
ing-room. It seemed as if it had been used as a
school-room in the daytime, and was employed
as a reading-room in the evening. I remember
seeing one reader who had a curious resemblance
to Tim Harrington, although it was not he, hold
up a magazine or book in his hand and laugh.
It was not a picture — it was there. The scene
was just as if you were looking through an opera
glass; you saw the play of the muscles, the
156 CLAIRVOYANCE
gleaming of the eye, every movement of the un-
known persons in the unnamed place into which
you were gazing. I saw all that without opening
my eyes, nor did my eyes have anything to do
with it. You see such things as these as if it
were with another sense which is more inside
your head than in your eyes. The pictures were
apropos of nothing; they had been suggested
by nothing I had been reading or talking of; they
simply came as if I had been able to look through
a glass at what was occurring somewhere else in
the world. I had my peep, and then it passed."
An interesting case of space clairvoyance is
that related of Swedenborg, on the best author-
ity. The story runs that in the latter part of
September, 1759, at four o'clock one Saturday
afternoon, Swedenborg arrived home from Eng-
land, and disembarked at the town of Gothen-
burg. A friend, Mr. W. Castel, met him and in-
vited him to dinner, at which meal there were
fifteen persons gathered around the table in
honor of the guest. At six o'clock, Swedenborg
went out a few minutes, returning to the table
shortly thereafter, looking pale and excited.
When questioned by the guests he replied that
there was a fire at Stockholm, two hundred miles
distant, and that the fire was steadily spreading.
He grew very restless, and frequently left the
room. He said that the house of one of his
friends, whose name he mentioned, was already
in ashes, and that his own was in danger. At
eight o'clock, after he had been out again, he
returned crying out cheerfully, "Thank heaven!
DISTANT SCENES 157
the fire is out, the third door from my house!"
The news of the strange happening greatly ex-
cited the people of the town, and the city officials
made inquiry regarding it. Swedenborg was
summoned before the authorities, and requested
to relate in detail what he had seen. Answering
the questions put to him, he told when and how
the fire started; how it had begun; how, when
and where it had stopped; the time it had lasted;
the number of houses destroyed or damaged, and
the number of persons injured. On the follow-
ing Monday morning a courier arrived from
Stockholm, bringing news of the fire, having left
the town while it was still burning. On the next
day after, Tuesday morning, another courier ar-
rived at the city hall with a full report of the fire,
which corresponded precisely with the vision of
Swedenborg. The fire had stopped precisely at
eight o'clock, the very minute that Swedenborg
had so announced it to the company.
A similar case is related by Stead, having been
told to him by the wife of a Dean in the Episcopal
Church. He relates it as follows: "I was stay-
ing in Virginia, some hundred miles away from
home, when one morning about eleven o'clock I
felt an overpowering sleepiness, which drowsi-
ness was quite unusual, and which caused me to
lie down. In my sleep I saw quite distinctly my
home in Richmond in flames. The fire had
broken out in one wing of the house, which I saw
with dismay was where I kept all my best
dresses. The people were all trying to check the
flames, but it was no use. My husband was there,
158 CLAIRVOYANCE
walking about before the burning house, carry-
ing a portrait in his hand. Everything was quite
clear and distinct, exactly as if I had actually
been present and seen everything. After a time,
I woke up, and going down stairs told my friends
the strange dream I had had. They laughed at
me, and made such game of my vision that I did
my best to think no more about it. I was travel-
ing about, a day or two passed, and when Sun-
day came I found myself in a church where some
relatives were worshipping. When I entered
the pew they looked very strange, and as soon as
the service was over I asked them what was the
matter. 'Don't be alarmed,' they said, 'there is
nothing serious.' Then they handed me a post-
card from my husband which simply said, 'House
burned out; covered by insurance.' The day was
the date upon which my dream occurred. I has-
tened home, and then I learned that everything
had happened exactly as I had seen it. The fire
had broken out in the wing I had seen blazing.
My clothes were all burned, and the oddest thing
about it was that my husband, having rescued a
favorite picture from the burning building, had
carried it about among the crowd for some time
before he could find a place in which to put it
safely."
Another case, related by Stead, the same au-
thority, runs as follows: "The father of a son
who had sailed on the 'Strathmore,' an emigrant
ship outbound from the Clyde saw one night the
ship foundering amid the waves, and saw that
his son, with some others, had escaped safely to a
DISTANT SCENES 159
desert island near which the wreck had taken
place. He was so much impressed by this vision
that he wrote to the owner of the 'Strathmore'
telling him what he had seen. His information
was scouted; but after a while the 'Strathmore*
became overdue, and the owner became uneasy.
Day followed day, and still no tidings of the mis-
sing ship. Then like Pharaoh's butler, the owner
remembered his sins one day, and hunted up the
letter describing the vision. It supplied at least
a theory to account for the ship's disappearance.
All outward-bound ships were requested to look
out for any survivors on the island indicated in
the vision. These orders were obeyed, and the
survivors of the 'Strathmore' were found exactly
where the father had seen them."
The Society for Psychical Research mentions
another interesting case, as follows: "Dr. Go-
linski, a physician of Kremeutchug, Russia, was
taking an after-dinner nap in the afternoon,
about half-past three o'clock. He had a vision
in which he saw himself called out on a profes-
sional visit, which took him to a little room
with dark hangings. To the right of the door he
saw a chest of drawers, upon which rested a lit-
tle paraffine lamp of special pattern, different
from anything he had ever seen before. On the
left of the door, he saw a woman suffering from a
severe hemorrhage. He then saw himself giv-
ing her professional treatment. Then he awoke,
suddenly, and saw that it was just half-past four
o'clock. Within ten minutes after he awoke, he
was called out on a professional visit, and on en-
160 CLAIRVOYANCE
tering the bedroom he saw all the details that had
appeared to him in his vision. There was the
chest of drawers — there was the peculiar lamp —
there was the woman on the bed, suffering from
the hemorrhage. Upon inquiry, he found that
she had grown worse between three and four
o'clock, and had anxiously desired that he come
to her about that time, finally dispatching a mes-
senger for him at half-past four, the moment at
which he awoke.
Another, and a most peculiar, phase of space
clairvoyance is that in which certain persons so
awaken the astral senses of other persons that
these persons perceive the first person — usually
in the form of seemingly seeing the person pres-
ent in the immediate vicinity, just as one would
see a ghostly visitor. In some cases there is
manifested double-clairvoyance, both persons
visioning clairvoyantly; in other cases, only the
person "visited" astrally senses the occurrence.
The following cases illustrate this form of space
clairvoyance.
W. T. Stead relates the case of a lady well
known to him, who spontaneously developed the
power of awakening astral perception in others.
She seemed to "materialize" in their presence.
Her power in this direction became a source of
considerable anxiety and worry to her friends to
whom she would pay unexpected and involun-
tary visits, frightening them out of their wits by
the appearance of her "ghost." They naturally
thought that she had died suddenly and had ap-
peared to them in ghostly form. The lady, her-
DISTANT SCENES 161
self, was totally unconscious of the appearance,
though she admitted that at or about the times
of the appearances she had been thinking of her
friends whom she visited astrally.
The German writer, Jung Stilling, mentions
the case of a man of good character who had de-
veloped power of this kind, but also was con-
scious of his visits. He exerted the power
consciously by an effort of will, it seems. At one
time he was consulted by the wife of a sea cap-
tain whose husband was on a long voyage to
Europe and Asia (sailing from America). His
ship was long overdue, and his wife was quite
worried about him. She consulted the gentle-
man in question, and he promised to do what
he could for her. Leaving the room he threw
himself on a couch and was seen by the lady
(who peered through the half-opened door) to
be in a state of semi-trance. Finally he returned
and told her that he had visited her husband in a
coffee-house in London, and gave her husband's
reasons for not writing, adding that her husband
would soon return to America. When her hus-
hand returned several months later, the wife
asked him about the matter. He informed her
that the clairvoyant's report was correct in every
particular. Upon being introduced to the clair-
voyant, the captain manifested great surprise,
saying that he had met the man in question on a
certain day in a coffee-house in London, and that
the man had told him that his wife was worried
about him, and that he had told the man that he
had been prevented from writing for several rea-
162 CLAIRVOYANCE
sons, and that he was on the eve of beginning his
return voyage to America. He added that when
he looked for the man a few moments afterwards,
the stranger had apparently lost himself in the
crowd, disappeared and was seen no more by
him.
The Society for Psychical Research gives
prominence to the celebrated case of the mem-
ber of the London Stock Exchange, whose iden-
tity it conceals under the initials "S. H. B.," who
possessed this power of voluntary awakening of
astral sight in others by means of his "appear-
ance" to them. The man relates his experience
to the Society as follows: "One Sunday night
in November, 1881, I was in Kildare Gardens,
when I willed very strongly that I would visit in
the spirit two lady friends, the Misses X., who
were living three miles off, in Hogarth Road. I
willed that I should do this at one o'clock in the
morning, and having willed it, I went to sleep.
Next Thursday, when I first met my friends,
the elder lady told me that she woke up and saw
my apparition advancing to her bedside. She
screamed and woke her sisters, who also saw
me." (The report includes the signed statement
of the ladies, giving the time of the appearance,
and the details thereof.)
"Again, on December 1, 1882, I was at
Southall. At half-past nine I sat down to en-
deavor to fix my mind so strongly upon the in-
terior of a house at Kew, where Miss V. and her
sister lived, that I seemed to be actually in the
house. I was conscious, but was in a kind of
DISTANT SCENES 163
mesmeric sleep. When I went to bed that night,
I willed to be in the front bedroom of that house
at Kew at twelve, and to make my presence felt
by the inmates. Next day I went to Kew. Miss
V.'s married sister told me, without any prompt-
ing from me, that she had seen me in the passage
going from one room to another at half-past nine
o'clock, and that at twelve, when she was wide
awake, she saw me come to the front bedroom,
where she slept, and take her hair, which is very
long, into my hand. She said I then took her
hand, and gazed into the palm intently. She said,
'You need not look at the lines, for I never have
any trouble.' She then woke her sister. When
Mrs. L. told me this, I took out the entry that I
had made the previous night and read it to her.
Mrs. L. is quite sure she was not dreaming. She
had only seen me once before, two years previ-
ously. Again, on March 22, 1884, I wrote to Mr.
Gurney, of the Psychical Research Society, tell-
ing him that I was going to make my presence
felt by Miss V., at 44 Norland Square, at mid-
night. Ten days afterwards, I saw Miss V.,
when she voluntarily told me that on Saturday
at midnight, she distinctly saw me, when she was
quite wide awake."
The records of the psychic researchers are
filled with numerous accounts of cases in which
similar astral projections have occurred when the
person was on his or her death-bed, but was still
alive. It would seem that under such circum-
stances the astral senses are very much freer
from the interference of the physical senses, and
164 CLAIRVOYANCE
tend to manifest very strongly in the form of
appearances to persons in whom the dying per-
son is attached by the ties of affection. Many
who read this course have known of cases of this
kind, for they are of quite frequent occurrence.
The student will notice that in the majority of
the cases cited in this chapter the clairvoyant has
been in a state of sleep, or semi-sleep — often in
a dream condition. But you must not jump to
the conclusion that this condition is always nec-
essary for the manifestation of this phenomenon.
On the contrary, the advanced and well devel-
oped clairvoyants usually assume merely a con-
dition of deep reverie or meditation, shutting out
the sounds and thoughts of the physical plane,
so as to be able to function better on the astral
plane.
The reason that so many recorded cases have
occurred when the clairvoyant person was asleep,
and the vision appeared as a dream, is simply be-
cause in such a condition the physical senses of
the person are stilled and at rest, and there is less
likelihood of interference from them, and a better
opportunity for the astral senses to function
effectively. It is like the familiar cases in which
one becomes so wrapped up in viewing a beau-
tiful work of art, or in listening to a beautiful
musical rendition, that he or she forgets all about
the sights and sounds of the world outside. One
sometimes gets into this same condition when
reading an interesting book, or when witnessing
an interesting play. When the psychic powers
are concentrated upon any one channel of vision,
DISTANT SCENES 165
the others fail to register a clear impression. The
same rule holds good on the astral plane, as on
the physical.
There are certain psychic conditions which are
especially conducive to the manifestation of clair-
voyant phenomena, as all students of the subject
know very well. These conditions are somewhat
hard to induce, at least until the clairvoyant has
had considerable experience and practice. But,
in the state of sleep, the person induces the de-
sired conditions, in many cases, though he is not
consciously doing so. As might naturally be
expected, therefore, the majority of the recorded
cases of clairvoyance have occurred when the
clairvoyant person has been asleep.
I should also state, once more, tnat in many
cases in which the clairvoyant has witnessed the
"appearance" of another person, as in the cases
such as I have just mentioned, there is always
the possibility of the person having actually ap-
peared in his astral body, unconsciously to him-
self of course. No one but a skilled occultist is
able to distinguish between cases of this kind.
The line between this class of clairvoyance and
astral appearance is very thin, and, in fact, the
two classes of phenomena shade and blend into
each other. In reality, when one gets down to
bottom principles, there is very little difference
between the actual appearance in the astral body,
and the strong projection of one's presence by
means of will, conscious or unconscious, along
the lines of awakening the clairvoyant vision of
others. To attempt to explain the slight points
166 CLAIRVOYANCE
of difference here, would only involve the student
in a mass of technical description which would
tend to confuse, rather than to enlighten him —
from this I refrain.
LESSON XI.
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE PAST
The third great class of clairvoyant phe-
nomena, known as Time Clairvoyance, is divided
into two sub-classes, as follows: (1) Past-Time
Clairvoyance; and (2) Future-Time Clairvoy-
ance. The characteristics of each of these sub-
classes is indicated by its name.
Past-Time Clairvoyance, as indicated by the
name, is that class of clairvoyant phenomena
which is concerned with the perception of facts,
events and happenings of past time. Whether
the happening is that of five minutes ago, or of
five thousand years ago, the principles involved
are precisely the same. One is no more or less
wonderful than is the other.
Many students confess themselves perplexed
when they are first confronted with this class of
phenomena. While they find it comparatively
easy to see how by astral vision the clairvoyant
is able to sense events happening at that moment,
though thousands of miles away from the ob-
server, they cannot at first understand how one
can "see" a thing no longer in existence, but
which disappeared from sight thousands of years
ago. Naturally, they ask to be informed how
this is possible, before proceeding to develop the
faculty itself. Believing that this question is now
being asked by you, the student of these lessons,
I shall pause for a few moments and show you
168 CLAIRVOYANCE
"just how" this wonderful thing becomes pos-
sible to the clairvoyant.
In the first place, it would undoubtedly be im-
possible to perceive a thing, even by astral vision,
if it had entirely disappeared at some time in the
past — this would be beyond all natural powers,
astral as well as physical. But, as a matter of
fact, the things of the past have not entirely dis-
appeared, but, on the contrary, while having dis-
appeared on the physical plane they still exist on
the astral plane. I shall endeavor to explain this
wonderful fact of nature to you in plain terms,
although it belongs to one of the most mys-
terious classes of the occult facts of the universe.
In the occult teachings we find many refer-
ences to "the Akashic Records," or what is some-
times called "the records of the Astral Light."
Without going into technical occult definitions
and explanations, I will say to you that the gist
of this occult teaching is that in that high form
of the universal substance which is called the
Universal Ether there is found to be recorded all
the happenings of the entire World Cycle of
which the present time is a part. All that has
happened from the very beginning of this World
Cycle, millions of years ago, is preserved on these
astral records, and may be read by the advanced
clairvoyant or other person possessing occult
powers of this kind. These records perish only
with the termination of a World Cycle, which
will not happen for millions of years yet to come.
To those who cannot accept the reasonableness
of this occult fact, I would say that there are
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE PAST 169
analogies to be found on other planes of natural
manifestation. For instance, as astronomy-
teaches us, a star may be blotted out of existence,
and yet its light will persist long after (perhaps
until the end of world-time) traveling along at
the rate of 186,000 miles each second. The light
that we now see coming from the distant stars
has left those stars many years ago — in some
cases thousands of years ago. We see them not as
they are now, but as they were at the time the ray
of light left them, many years ago. The astrono-
mers inform us that if one of these stars had been
sands) of years ago, we would still see it as
in actual existence. In fact, it is believed that
some of these stars which we see twinkling at
night have actually been blotted out hundreds of
years ago. We will not be aware of this fact
until the light rays suddenly cease reaching us,
after their journey of billions of miles and hun-
dreds of years. A star blotted out of existence
today would be seen by our children, and chil-
dren's children.
The heat from a stove will be felt in a room
long after the stove has been removed from it.
A room will long contain the odor of something
that has been removed from it. It is said that in
one of the old mosques of Persia there may be
perceived the faint odor of the musk that was
exposed there hundrds of years ago — the very
walls are saturated with the pungent odor.
Again, is it not wonderful that our memories pre-
serve the images of the sounds and forms which
were placed there perhaps fifty years and more
170 CLAIRVOYANCE
ago? How do these memory images survive and
exist ? Though we may have thought of the past
thing for half a lifetime, yet, suddenly its image
flashes into our consciousness. Surely this is as
wonderful as the Akashic Records, though its
"commonness" makes it lose its wonderful ap-
pearance to us.
Camille Flammarion, the eminent French as-
tronomer, in a book written over twenty-five
years ago, and which is now out of print, I be-
lieve, pictured a possible condition of affairs in
which a disembodied soul would be able to per-
ceive events that happened in the past, by simply
taking a position in space in which he would be
able to catch the light-waves that emanated from
a distant planet at that particular time in the past
the happenings of which he wanted to perceive.
The little book was called "Lumen" — I advise
you to read it, if you can find it in your public
libraries.
Another writer has written somewhat along
the same lines. I herewith give you a quotation
from him, that you may get the idea he wishes
to express — it will help you in your conception of
the Akashic Records. He says : "When we see
anything, whether it be the book we hold in our
hands, or a star millions of miles away, we do so
by means of a vibration in the ether, commonly
called a ray of light, which passes from the ob-
ject seen to our eyes. Now the speed with which
this vibration passes is so great — about 186,000
miles in a second — that when we are considering
any object in our own world we may regard it as
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE PAST 171
practically instantaneous. When, however, we
come to deal with interplanetary distances we
have to take the speed of light into consideration,
for an appreciable period is occupied in travers-
ing these vast spaces. For example, it takes
eight minutes and a quarter for light to travel to
us from the sun, so that when we look at the solar
orb we see it by means of a ray of light which left
it more than eight minutes ago. From this fol-
lows a very curious result. The ray of light by
which we see the sun can obviously report to us
only the state of affairs which existed in that
luminary when it started on its journey, and
would not be in the least affected by anything
that happened after it left; so that we really see
the sun not as it is, but as it was eight minutes
ago. That is to say that if anything important
took place in the sun — the formation of a new
sun-spot, for instance — an astronomer who was
watching the orb through his telescope at the
time would be unaware of the incident while it
was happening, since the ray of light bearing the
news would not reach him until more than eight
minutes later.
"The difference is more striking when we con-
sider the fixed stars, because in their case the
distances are so enormously greater. The pole
star, for example, is so far off that light, traveling
at the inconceivable speed above mentioned,
takes a little more than fifty years to reach our
eyes; and from that follows the strange but in-
evitable inference that we see the pole star not
as or where it is at this moment, but as and where
172 CLAIRVOYANCE
it was fifty years ago. Nay, if tomorrow some
cosmic catastrophe were to shatter the pole star
into fragments, we should still see it peacefully
shining in the sky all the rest of our lives; our
children would grow up to middle-age and gather
their children about them in turn before the
news of that tremendous accident reached any
terrestial eye. In the same way there are other
stars so far distant that light takes thousands of
years to travel from them to us, and with refer-
ence to their condition our information is there-
fore thousands of years behind time. Now carry
the argument a step farther. Suppose that we
were able to place a man at the distance of
186,000 miles from the earth, and yet to endow
him with the wonderful faculty of being able
from that distance to see what was happening
here as clearly as though he were still close be-
side us. It is evident that a man so placed would
see everything a second after the time it really
happened, and so at the present moment he
would be seeing what happened a second ago.
Double that distance, and he would be two sec-
onds behind time, and so on; remove him to the
distance of the sun (still allowing him to pre-
serve the same mysterious power of sight) and
he would look down and watch you doing not
what you are doing now, but what you were
doing eight minutes and a quarter ago. Carry
him to the pole star, and he would see passing
before his eyes the events of fifty years ago; he
would be watching the childish gambols of those
who at the same moment were really middle-
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE PAST 173
aged men. Marvellous as this may sound, it is
literally and scientifically true, and cannot be
denied."
Flammarion, in his story, called "Lumen,"
makes his spirit hero pass at will along the ray
of light from the earth, seeing the things of
different eras of earth-time. He even made him
travel backward along that ray, thus seeing the
happenings in reverse order, as in a moving pic-
ture running backward. This story is of the
greatest interest to the occultist, for while the
Akashic Records are not the same as the light
records, yet the analogy is so marked in many
ways that the occultist sees here another ex-
emplification of the old occult axiom that "as
above, so below; as below, so above."
I take the liberty of quoting here from my
little book, "The Astral World," in order to give
you some further idea of the nature of these
records in the Astral Light. The reader is sup-
posed to be travelling in his astral body, having
the phenomena of the astral pointed out to him
by a competent occultist acting as his guide. The
occultist-guide says to the student: "Changing
our vibrations, we find ourselves entering a
strange region, the nature of which you at first
fail to discern. Pausing a moment until your
astral vision becomes attuned to the peculiar
vibrations of this region, you will find that you
are becoming gradually aware of what may be
called an immense picture gallery, spreading out
in all directions, and apparently bearing a direct
relation to every point of space on the surface of
174 CLAIRVOYANCE
the earth. At first, you find it difficult to decipher
the meaning of this great array of pictures. The
trouble arises from the fact that they are ar-
ranged not one after the other in sequence on a
flat plane; but rather in sequence, one after
another, in a peculiar order which may be called
the order of 'X-ness in space,' because it is neither
the dimension of length, breadth, or depth — it is
practically the order of the fourth dimension in
space, which cannot be described in terms of ordi-
nary spatial dimension. Again, you find upon
closely examining the pictures that they are very
minute — practically microscopic in size — and re-
quire the use of the peculiar magnifying power of
astral vision to bring them up to a size capable of
being recognized by your faculty of visual recog-
nition.
"The astral vision, when developed, is capable,
of magnifying any object, material or astral, to
an enormous degree — for instance, the trained
occultist is able to perceive the whirling atoms
and corpuscles of matter, by means of this pecu-
liarity of astral vision. Likewise, he is able to
plainly perceive many fine vibrations of light
which are invisible to the ordinary sight. In
fact, the peculiar Astral Light which pervades
this region is due to the power of the astral vision
to perceive and register these fine vibrations of
light. Bring this power of magnifying into oper-
ation, and you will see that each of the little
points and details of the great world picture so
spread before you in the Astral Light is really a
complete scene of a certain place on earth, at a
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE PAST 175
certain period in the history of the earth. It re-
sembles one of the small views in a series of mov-
ing pictures — a single view of a roll-film. It is
fixed, and not in motion, and yet we can move
forward along the fourth dimension, and thus
obtain a moving picture of the history of any
point on the surface of the earth, or even com-
bine the various points into a large moving pic-
ture, in the same way. Let us prove this by
actual experiment. Close your eyes for a
moment, while we travel back in time (so to
speak) along the series of these astral records —
for, indeed, they travel back to the beginning of
the history of the earth. Now open your eyes!
Looking around you, you perceive the pictured
representation of strange scenes filled with per-
sons wearing a peculiar garb — but all is still, no
life, no motion.
"Now, let us move forward in time, at much
higher rate than than in which the astral views
were registered. You now see flying before you
the great movement of life on a certain point ot
space, in a far distant age. From birth to death
you see the life of these strange people, all in the
space of a few moments. Great battles are
fought, and cities rise before your eyes, all in a
great moving picture flying at a tremendous
speed. Now stop, and then let us move back-
ward in time, still gazing at the moving pictures.
You see a strange sight, like that of 'reversing
the film' in a moving picture. You see every-
thing moving backward — cities crumbling into
nothingness, men arising from their graves, and
176 CLAIRVOYANCE
growing younger each second until they are
finally born as babes — everything moving back-
ward in time, instead of forward. You can thus
witness any great historical event, or follow the
career of any great personage from birth to death
— or backward. You will notice, moreover, that
everything is semi-transparent, and that accord-
ingly you can see the picture of what is going on
inside of buildings as well as outside of them.
Nothing escapes the Astral Light Records.
Nothing can be concealed from it. By traveling
to any point in time, on the fourth dimension,
you may begin at that point, and see a moving
picture of the history of any part of the earth
from that time to the present — or you may re-
verse the sequence by travelling backward, as we
have seen. You may also travel in the Astral,
on ordinary space dimensions, and thus see what
happened simultaneously all over the earth, at
any special moment of past-time, if you wish."
Now, I do not for a moment wish you to under-
stand that the above experience is possible to
every clairvoyant who is able to sense past-time
events and happenings. On the contrary, the
above experience is possible only to the advanced
occultist, or to the student whom he may take
with him on an astral trip, in the astral body.
The clairvoyant merely catches glimpses of cer-
tain phases and fields of the great astral record
region or state. For that matter, the ordinary
clairvoyant merely sees a reflection of the true
Astral Light pictures — a reflection similar to
that of a landscape reflected in a pond. More-
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE PAST 177
over, this reflection may be (and frequently is)
disturbed as if by the ripples and waves of the
pond in which the landscape is reflected. But,
still, even the ordinary clairvoyant is able to se-
cure results which are wonderful enough in all
truth, and which far transcend the power of the
person functioning on the physical plane alone.
Past-time clairvoyance is frequently induced
by means of psychometry, in which the clair-
voyant is able to have "the loose end" to unwind
the ball of time. But, still, in some cases the
clairvoyant is able to get en rapport with the
astral records of past-time by the ordinary meth-
ods of meditation, etc. The main obstacle in the
last mentioned case is the difficulty of coming in
contact with the exact period of past-time sought
for — in psychometry, the vibrations of the "asso-
ciated object" supplies the missing-link.
Lacking the "associated object," the clair-
voyant may obtain the link by bringing into the
imagination some associated scene of that time —
something else that happened about the same
time. All that is needed is to get hold of some-
thing associated in space or in time with the
sought for scene. All that is needed is the "loose
end" of association. Sometimes the clairvoyant
senses some past-time experience, the place and
time of which is unknown to him. In such cases,
it is necessary for him to get hold of some "loose
end" by which he may work out the solution.
For instance, the picture of a certain building or
personage, or historical happening, may give the
key to the mystery.
178 CLAIRVOYANCE
In very high forms of past-time clairvoyance,
the clairvoyant is able not only to perceive the
actual happenings of the past, but also to actually
sense the thought and feelings of the actors
therein — for these, too, are recorded on the astral
plane. In other cases, the clairvoyant person is
able to picture scenes and happenings relating to
his past incarnations, even though he is not able
to sense other past-time events and scenes. But,
here again, many good past-time clairvoyants are
not able to catch these glimpses of their own past
lives, though able to perceive those of other per-
sons. All these variations are due to certain
technical differences into which I cannot go into
detail at this place. Again some persons are
able to perceive events that have happened to
persons present before them, but are not able
to contact past-time events in the ordinary way.
There are a thousand-and-one variations in clair-
voyant work. Only the highly advanced occultist
is master of all of them. But, still, every one may
develop himself or herself, from humble begin-
nings.
In concluding this lesson, I wish to call your
attention to the following advice from a man
well advanced in the knowledge of the astral
plane. He says: "It would be well for all stu-
dents to bear in mind that occultism is the
apotheosis of common-sense, and that every
vision that comes to them is not necessarily a
picture from the Akashic Records, nor every ex-
perience a revelation from on high. It is far bet-
ter to err on the side of healthy skepticism, than
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE PAST 179
of over-credulity; and it is an admirable rule
never to hunt about for an occult explanation of
anything when a plain and obvious physical one
is available. Our duty is to endeaveor to keep
our balance always, and never to lose our self-
control, but to take a reasonable, common-sense
view of whatever may happen to us, so that we
may be wiser occultists, and more useful helpers
than we have ever been before.
"We find examples of all degrees of the power
to see into this 'memory of nature,' from the
trained man who can consult the records for him-
self at will, down to the person who gets nothing
but occasional vague glimpses, or has perhaps
had only once such glimpse. But even the man
who possesses this faculty only partially and
occasionally still finds it of the deepest interest.
The psychometer, who needs an object physically
connected with the past in order to bring it all
into life again around him ; and the crystal-gazer
who can sometimes direct his less certain astral
telescope to some historic scene of long ago, may
both derive the greatest enjoyment from the
exercise of their respective gifts, even though
they may not always understand exactly how
their results are obtained, and may not have them
fully under control under all circumstances.
"In many cases of the lower manifestations of
these powers we find that they are exercised un-
consciously. Many a crystal-gazer watches
scenes from the past without being able to dis-
tinguish them from visions of the present. And
many a vaguely-psychic person finds pictures
180 CLAIRVOYANCE
constantly arising before his eyes, without ever
realizing that he is in effect psychometrizing the
various objects around him, as he happens to
touch them or stand near them. An interesting
variant of this class of psychics is the man who
is able to psychometrize persons only, and not
inanimate objects as is more usual. In most
cases this faculty shows itself erratically, so that
such a psychic will, when introduced to a
stranger, often see in a flash some prominent
event in that stranger's earlier life, but on similar
occasions will receive no special impression.
More rarely we meet with someone who gets
detailed visions of the past life of nearly everyone
whom he encounters. It may easily happen,
moreover, that a person may see a picture of the
past without recognizing it as such, unless there
happens to be in it something which attracts spe-
cial attention, such as a figure in armor, or in
antique costume. It is probable, therefore, that
occasional glimpses of these astral reflections of
the akashic records are commoner than the pub-
lished accounts would lead us to believe."
I would say to my students, make haste slowly.
Do not try to rush development too rapidly.
Perfect and develop yourself in one line of
psychic power, before seeking another. Take
things cooly, and do not lose your head because
you happen to achieve some wonderful phe-
nomena. Do not become conceited and vain-
glorious. And, finally, do not prostitute your
powers to ignoble ends, and make a cheap show
of them. By cheapening and prostituting the
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE PAST 181
higher psychic powers, the student frequently
ends by losing them altogether. Moderation in
all things is the safe policy. And it always is
well for the occultist to resist temptation to use
his powers for unworthy, sensational, or purely
selfish purposes.
LESSON XII.
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE FUTURE
Future-Time Clairvoyance, as indicated by its
name, is that class of clairvoyant phenomena
which is concerned with the perception of facts,
events and happenings of future time. In this
class of clairvoyant phenomena naturally fall all
genuine cases of prophecy, prevision, foretelling,
second-sight, etc. History, theological and secu-
lar, is rilled with instances of the foretelling of
the future by prophets, wise men, and others.
By many, such powers are generally regarded as
supernatural or divine. Without wishing to com-
bat such theories and beliefs, I would say that
the advanced occultists account for all such phe-
nomena under the general laws of clairvoyance.
But while the phenomena itself is very well
known, and is accepted as genuine in even many
cases in which past-time clairvoyance is doubted,
still it is even more difficult to explain than is
past-time clairvoyance based on the Akashic
Records or the Astral Light. To the person not
well versed in occult knowledge, and esoteric
principles, it is deemed impossible to intelligently
account for the perception of an event before it
has actually happened — perhaps years before its
actual happening. While I cannot hope to make
this matter absolutely clear to the person who is
not an advanced student of occultism, still I shall
try to throw at least some light on the underlying
principles of this wonderful class of occult phe-
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE FUTURE 183
nomena. The main point for the student to
realize is that there are natural laws underlying
this phenomenon, and that it is not a matter of
supernatural power, or necessarily of divine
special dispensation.
In the first place, in some of the simpler forms
of future-time clairvoyance, there is merely a
high development of subconscious reasoning
from analogy. That is to say, the subconscious
mental faculties of the person reason out that
such-and-so being the case, then it follows that
so-and-so will result, unless something entirely
unexpected should prevent or intervene. This is
merely an extension of certain forms of reason-
ing that we perform ordinarily. For instance,
we see a child playing with a sharp tool, and we
naturally reason that it will cut itself. We see
a man acting in certain ways which generally
lead to certain ends, and we naturally reason that
the expected result will occur. The more experi-
ence that the observer has had, and the keener
his faculty of perception and his power of de-
ductive reasoning, the wider will be the range of
his power in the direction of predicting future
results from present happenings and conditions.
In this connection, we must remember that the
ordinary clairvoyant has easier access to his sub-
conscious mentality than has the average person.
The subconscious mind perceives and notes many
little things that the conscious mind overlooks,
and therefore has better data from which to
reason. Moreover, as all students of the sub-
conscious know, these wonderful subconscious
184 CLAIRVOYANCE
mental factulties have a very highly developed
power of reasoning deductively from a given
premise or fact. In fact, the subconscious facul-
ties are almost perfect reasoning machines, pro-
viding they are supplied with correct data in the
first place. Much of the so-called "intuitive rea-
soning" of persons arises from the operations of
the subconscious mental faculties just men-
tioned.
But, you may say, this is very interesting, but
it is not clairvoyance. Certainly, good student,
but still clairvoyance plays an important part
even in this elementary form of prevision and
future-seeing. You must remember that by clair-
voyant vision the real thoughts and feelings of a
person may be perceived. But, unless the atten-
tion of the clairvoyant is specially directed to
this, the conscious mind does not note it, and the
matter reaches the subconscious faculties with-
out interference or conscious knowledge on the
part of the clairvoyant. This being so, it will be
seen that the subconscious mind of the clair-
voyant is able to reason deductively, in such
cases, far beyond the power of even the sub-
conscious mind of the ordinary person — it has
fuller data and more complete material to work
upon, of course.
It has become a proverb of the race that "com-
ing events cast their shadows before"; and many
persons frequently have little flashes of future-
time seeing without realizing that they are really
exercising elementary clairvoyant powers. The
combination of even a simple form of clairvoy-
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE FUTURE 185
ance and an active subconscious mind will often
produce very wonderful results — although not of
course the more complex phenomena of full clair-
voyance and prevision. Some persons have
claimed that even this form of prevision implies
something like fate or predestination, but this is
not fully true, for we must remember the fact
that in some cases it is possible to so act in ac-
cordance with a clairvoyant warning of this kind
that the impending calamity may be escaped.
But, on the other hand, we must also remember
that every event is the result of certain preceding
events, without which it could not have hap-
pened, and which existing it must happen unless
some new element intervenes. There is such a
thing as cause and effect, we must remember —
and if we can reason clearly from one to the other
with sufficient clearness, then we may actually
prophesy certain things in advance, always mak-
ing allowance for the intervention of the unex-
pected.
An authority says on this phase of the ques-
tion: "There is no doubt whatever that, just as
what is happening now is the result of causes set
in motion in the past, so what will happen in the
future will be the result of causes already in
operation. Even on this plane of life we can
calculate that if certain actions are performed,
certain results will follow; but our reckoning is
constantly liable to be disturbed by the inter-
ference of factors which we have not been able
to take into account. But if we raise our con-
sciousness to the higher planes we can see much
186 CLAIRVOYANCE
further into the results of our actions. We can
trace, for example, the effect of a casual word,
not only upon the person to whom it was ad-
dressed, but through him on many others as it
is passed on in widening circles, until it seems to
have affected the whole country; and one glimpse
of such a vision is more efficient than any number
of moral precepts in impressing upon us the
necessity of extreme circumspection in thought,
word, and deed. Not only can we from that plane
see thus fully the result of every action, but we
can also see where and in what way the results of
other actions apparently quite unconnected with
it will interfere with and modify it. In fact, it
may be said that the results of all causes at
present in action are clearly visible — that the fu-
ture, as it would be if no entirely new causes
should arise, lies open before our gaze.
"New causes of course do arise, because man's
will is free; but in the case of all ordinary people
the use which they make of their freedom may
be calculated beforehand with considerable ac-
curacy. The average man has so little real will
that he is very much the creature of circum-
stances; his action in previous lives places him
amid certain surroundings, and their influence
upon him is so very much the most important
factor in his life-story that his future course may
be predicted with almost mathematical certainty.
With the developed man the case is different; for
him also the main events of life are arranged by
his past actions, but the way in which he will
allow them to affect him, the methods by which
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE FUTURE 187
he will deal with them and perhaps triumph over
them — these are all his own, and they cannot be
foreseen even on the mental plane except as
probabilities.
"Looking down on man's life in this way from
above, it seems as though his free will could be
exercised only in certain crises in his career. He
arrives at a point in his life where there are
obviously two or three alternative courses open
before him; he is absolutely free to choose which
of them he pleases, and although someone who
knew his nature thoroughly well might feel
almost certain what his choice would be, such
knowledge on his friend's part is in no sense a
compelling force. But when he has chosen, he
has to go through with it and take the conse-
quences; having entered upon a particular path
he may, in many cases, be forced to go on for a
very long time before he has any opportunity to
turn aside. His position is somewhat like that
of a driver of a train; when he comes to a junc-
tion he may have the points set either this way
or that, and so can pass on to Whichever line he
pleases, but when he has passed on to one of
them he is compelled to run on along the line
which he has selected until he reaches another
set of points, where again an opportunity of
choice is offered to him."
But, interesting and wonderful as this phase
of future-time clairvoyance undoubtedly is, it
pales before the fuller and more complete phases.
And, in the latter, we must look elsewhere for the
explanation — or approach to an explanation.
188 CLAIRVOYANCE
The explanation of this higher form of future-
time clairvoyance must be looked for in a new
conception of the nature and meaning of time. It
is difficult to approach this question without be-
coming at once involved in technical metaphysi-
cal discussion. As an example of this difficulty,
I invite you to consider the following from Sir
Oliver Lodge, in his address to the British Asso-
ciation, at Cardiff, several years ago. While what
he says is very clear to the mind of a person
trained along these lines of subtle thought, it
will be almost like Greek to the average person.
Sir Oliver Lodge said:
"A luminous and helpful idea is that time is
but a relative mode of regarding things; we pro-
gress through phenomena at a certain definite
pace, and this subjective advance we interpret in
an objective manner, as if events moved neces-
sarily in this order and at this precise rate. But
that may be only one mode of regarding them.
The events may be in some sense of existence
always, both past and future, and it may be we
who are arriving at them, not they which are
happening. The analogy of a traveller in a rail-
way train is useful; if he could never leave the
train nor alter its pace he would probably con-
sider the landscapes as necessarily successive and
be unable to conceive their co-existence * * *
We perceive, therefore, a possible fourth dimen-
sional aspect about time, the inexorableness of
whose flow may be a natural part of our present
limitations. And if we once grasp the idea that
past and future may be actually existing, we can
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE FUTURE 189
recognize that they may have a controlling influ-
ence on all present action, and the two together
may constitute the 'higher plane' or totality of
things after which, as it seems to me, we are im-
pelled to seek, in connection with the directing of
form or determinism, and the action of living
being consciously directed to a definite and pre-
conceived end."
Sir Oliver's illustration is somewhat akin to
that of a person who sees a moving-picture show
for the first time, and does not know how it is
produced. To him it looks as if the events of the
pictured story actually were developing and hap-
pening in time, whereas, in reality the whole pic-
ture is existing at one time. Its past, present and
future is already pictured, and may be seen by
one who knows the secret and how to look for
the past or future scene; while, to the ordinary
observer, the scene progresses in sequence, the
present being followed by something else which
is at this moment "in the future," and therefore,
unknowable. To the senses of the ordinary ob-
server only the present is in existence; while, in
fact, the "future" is equally truly in existence at
the same time, although not evident to the senses
of the observer. Think over this a little, and let
the idea sink into your mind — it may help you to
understand something concerning the mystery of
future-time clairvoyance, prevision, or second-
sight.
Time, you know, is far more relative than we
generally conceive it. It is a scientific fact that
a person in the dream state may cover years of
190 CLAIRVOYANCE
time in a dream that occupies only a few seconds
of time. Persons have nodded and awakened
immediately afterwards (as proved by others
present in the room), and yet in that moment's
time they have dreamed of long journeys to for-
eign lands, great campaigns of war, etc. More-
over, a loud sound (a pistol sLot, for instance)
which has awakened a sleeping person, has also
set into effect a dream-state train of circum-
stances, constituting a long dream-state story
which, after many events and happenings, termi-
nated in the shot of a firing-squad — and then the
man awoke. Now in this last mentioned case, not
only has the dreamer experienced events covering
a long time, all in the space of a second of time;
but, also, the very sound which terminated the
dream, also induced it from the very beginning —
the last thing caused the first things to appear
and proceed in sequence to the last! Persons un-
der the influence of chloroform, or 'laughing
gas," have similar experiences — often the first
sound heard at the moment of recovering con-
sciousness seems to be the last thing in a long
dream which preceded it, though the long dream
was really caused by the final sound. Now, re-
member, that here not only did past, present and
future exist at the same moment of time; but,
also, the future caused the past and present to
come into being.
On the physical plane, we have analogies
illustrating this fact. It is said that in every
acorn rests and exists, in miniature, the form of
the future oak. And, some go so far as to say
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE FUTURE 191
that the oak is the "ultimate cause" of the acorn
— that the idea of the oak caused the acorn to be
at all. In the same way, the "idea" of the man
must be in the infant boy, from the moment of
birth, and even from the moment of conception.
But, let us pass on to the bold conception of the
most advanced metaphysicians — they have a still
more dazzling explanation, let us listen to it.
These occultists and metaphysicians who have
thought long and deeply upon the ultimate facts
and nature of the universe, have dared to think
that there must exist some absolute consciousness
— some absolute mind — which must perceive the
past, present and future of the universe as one
happening; as simultaneously and actively pres-
ent at one moment of absolute time. They
reason that just as man may see as one happen-
ing of a moment of his time some particular event
which might appear as a year to some minute
form of life and mind — the microscopic creatures
in a drop of water, for instance; so that which
seems as a year, or a hundred years, to the mind
of man may appear as the happening of a single
moment of a higher scale of time to some exalted
Being or form of consciousness on a higher plane.
You remember that it is said that "a thousand
years is but as a day to the Lord ;" and the Hindu
Vedas tell us that "the creation, duration, and de-
struction of the universe, is as but the time of the
twinkling of an eye to Brahman." I shall not
proceed further along this line — I have given you
a very strong hint here; you must work it out
for yourself, if you feel so disposed. But there
192 CLAIRVOYANCE
are certain consequences arising from this ulti-
mate universal fact, which I must mention be-
fore passing on.
The high occult teachings hold that there is a
plane of the higher astral world which may be
said to carry a reflection of the Universal Mind
— just as a lake contains a reflection of the dis-
tant mountain. Well, then, the clairvoyant
vision at times is able to penetrate to the realm
of that astral reflecting medium, and see some-
what dimly what is pictured there. As the fu-
ture may be discerned in this reflected picture,
by the clairvoyant mind, we see how future-see-
ing, prevision, and second-sight may be ex-
plained scientifically.
A writer has said: "On this plane, in some
manner which down here is totally inexplicable,
the past, the present, and the future, are all there
existing simultaneously. One can only accept
this fact, for its cause lies in the faculty of that
exalted plane, and the way in which this higher
faculty works is naturally quite incomprehensible
to the physical brain. Yet now and then one
may meet with a hint that seems to bring us a
trifle nearer to a dim possibility of comprehen-
sion. When the pupil's consciousness is fully de-
veloped upon this higher plane, therefore, per-
fect prevision is possible to him, though he may
not — nay, he certainly will not — be able to bring
the whole result of his sight through fully and
in order into his physical consciousness. Still,
a great deal of clear foresight is obviously within
his power whenever he likes to exercise it; and
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE FUTURE 193
even when he is not exercising it, frequent
flashes of foreknowledge come through into his
ordinary life, so that he often has an instantane-
ous intuition as to how things will turn out."
The same writer says: "Short of perfect pre-
vision we find that all degrees of this type of clair-
voyance exist, from the occasional vague pre-
monitions which cannot in any true sense be
called sight at all, up to frequent and fairly com-
plete second-sight. The faculty to which this
latter somewhat misleading name has been given
is an extremely interesting one, and would well
repay more careful and systematic study than has
hitherto been given to it. It is best known to
us as a not infrequent possession of the Scottish
Highlanders, though it is by no means confined
to them. Occasional instances of it have ap-
peared in almost every nation, but it has always
been commonest among mountaineers and men
of lonely life. With us in England it is often
spoken of as if it were the exclusive appanage
of the Celtic race, but in reality it has appeared
among similarly situated peoples the world over,
it is stated, for example, to be very common
among the Westphalian peasantry.
"Sometimes the second-sight consists of a
picture clearly foreshowing some coming event;
more frequently, perhaps, the glimpse of the fu-
ture is given in some symbolical appearance. It
is noteworthy that the events foreseen are in-
variably unpleasant ones — death being the com-
monest of all; I do not recollect a single instance
in which the second-sight has shown anything
194 CLAIRVOYANCE
which was not of the most gloomy nature. It
has a ghastly symbolism of its own — a symbol-
ism of shrouds and corpse-candles, and other
funeral horrors. In some cases.it appears to be
to a certain extent dependent upon locality, for
it is stated that inhabitants of the Isle of Skye
who possess the faculty often lose it when they
leave the island, even though it be only to cross
to the mainland. The gift of such sight is some-
times hereditary in a family for generations, but
this is not an invariable rule, for it often appears
sporadically in one member of a family other-
wise free from its lugubrious influence.
"There may be still some people who deny the
possibility of prevision, but such denial simply
shows their ignorance of the evidence on the sub-
ject. The large number of authenticated cases
leave no room for doubt as to the fact, but many
of them are of such a nature as to render a rea-
sonable explanation by no means easy to find. It
is evident that the Ego possesses a certain
amount of previsional faculty, and if the events
foreseen were always of great importance, one
might suppose that an extraordinary stimulus
had enabled him for that occasion only to make a
clear impression of what he saw upon his lower
personality. No doubt that is the explanation
of many of the cases in which death or grave
disaster is foreseen, but there are a large num-
ber of instances on record to which it does not
seem to apply, since the events foretold are fre-
quently trivial and unimportant."
In the following chapter I shall present to
CLAIRVOYANCE OF THE FUTURE 195
your consideration some very remarkable cases
of future-time clairvoyance, prevision, or second-
sight; some of these are historical cases, and all
are vouched for by the best authorities. I quote
these cases not merely for their own interesting
features, but also to give you an idea of how
remarkable some of these instances are; and also
to give you a clear conception of the way in
which this form of clairvoyance tends to mani-
fest itself.
Before passing on to these interesting cases,
however, I wish to remind you that in future-
time clairvoyance, as well as in past-time clair-
voyance, the phenomenon may be manifested in
many ways and according to several methods.
That is to say, that in future-time clairvoyance
the vision may come in the state of meditation
or reverie; it may come along the lines of psy-
chometry, some associated object or person sup-
plying the connecting link; or, again, it may
come as the result of crystal-gazing, etc. This
is as we might naturally expect, for this form of
clairvoyance is merely one special and particular
phase of clairvoyance in general, and of course,
comes under the general laws and rules govern-
ing all clairvoyant phenomena.
Future-time clairvoyance, prevision and sec-
ond-sight may, like any other form of clairvoy-
ance, be developed and unfolded, by means of
the same rules and methods that I have already
suggested to you in the preceding lessons. It is
all a matter of attention, application, patience,
exercise and practice. I may say, however, that
196 CLAIRVOYANCE
the strong desire and wish for the perception of
future events, held firmly in mind during the
practicing and exercising, will tend to unfold
and develop the clairvoyant faculties in this par-
ticular direction. Strong desire, and earnest at-
tention in the desired direction, will do much to
cultivate, develop and unfold any psychic faculty.
Just as meditation and reverie about past times
and things tend to develop past-time clairvoy-
ance, so will meditation and reverie about future
time and things tend to develop prevision and the
seeing of future things. This, indeed, is the very
first step toward the attainment of this form of
clairvoyance. The attention clears the psychic
path, over which the astral faculties travel. In
the astral, as on the physical, the rule is: always
look where you are going — look ahead on the
path over which you wish to travel.
LESSON XIII.
SECOND-SIGHT, PREVISION, ETC.
Notwithstanding the difficulties in the way of
an intelligent explanation of the phenomena of
future-time clairvoyance, second-sight, prevision,
etc., of which I have spoken in the preceding
lesson, the human race has always had a lively
reminder of the existence of such phenomena;
and the records of the race have always contained
many instances of the manifestation thereof.
Among all peoples, in all lands, in all times, there
have been noted remarkable instances of the
power of certain persons to peer into, and cor-
rectly report from, the mysterious regions of
the future. Passing from the traditional reports
of the race, and the minor instances known to
almost every person, we find that the scientific
investigators of psychic phenomena have gath-
ered together an enormous array of well authen-
ticated cases of this class. The reports of the
Society for Psychical research contain hundreds
of such cases, which the student may read and
study with interest and profit.
It is not my intention to present a full history
of the reports of this character. Rather, I shall
call your attention to a few striking cases, in or-
der to illustrate the phenomenon clearly and
forcibly. There is such a wealth of material of
this kind that it embarrases one who wishes to
select from it. However, I shall do the best I
can in that direction. Following, to commence
198 CLAIRVOYANCE
with, I give you extracts from a well known case
reported by a prominent member of the Theo-
sophical Society, which has attracted much atten-
tion. It was related to this person by one of the
actors in the scene. It happened in India. A
party of English army officers was entering a
dense jungle. Then follows the story, as below:
"We plunged into the jungle, and had walked
on for about an hour without much success, when
Cameron, who happened to be next to me,
stopped suddenly, turned pale as death, and,
pointing straight before him, cried in accents of
horror: "See! see! merciful heavens, look there!"
"Where? what? what is it?" we all shouted con-
fusedly, as we rushed up to him, and looked
around in expectation of encountering a tiger — a
cobra — we hardly knew knew what, but as-
suredly something terrible, since it had been suf-
ficient to cause such evident emotion in our
usually self-contained comrade. But neither
tiger nor cobra was visible — nothing but Cam-
eron pointing with ghastly haggard face and
starting eyeballs at something we could not see.
" 'Cameron ! Cameron !' cried I, seizing his
arm, 'for heavens sake speak ! What is the mat-
ter?' Scarcely were the words out of my mouth
when a low but very peculiar sound struck upon
my ear, and Cameron, dropping his pointing
hand, said in a hoarse, strained voice, 'There!
you heard it? Thank God it's over!' and fell
to the ground insensible. There was a momen-
tary confusion while we unfastened his collar,
and I dashed in his face some water which I
SECOND-SIGHT, PREVISION, ETC. 199
fortunately had in my flask, while another tried
to pour brandy between his clenched teeth; and
under cover of it I whispered to the man next to
me (one of our greatest skeptics, by the way),
'Beauchamp, did you hear anything?' 'Why,
yes,' he replied, 'a curious sound, very; a sort of
crash or rattle far away in the distance, yet very
distinct; if the thing were not utterly impossible,
I could have sworn that it was the rattle of mus-
ketry.' 'Just, my impression,' murmured I; 'but
hush ! he is recovering.'
"In a minute or two he was able to speak feebly,
and began to thank us and apologize for giving
trouble; and soon he sat up, leaning against a
tree, and in a firm, though low voice said: 'My
dear friends, I feel that I owe you an explanation
of my extraordinary behavior. It is an explana-
tion that I would fain avoid giving; but it must
come some time, and so may as well be given
now. You may perhaps have noticed that when
during our voyage you all joined in scoffing at
dreams, portents and visions, I invariably
avoided giving any opinion on the subject. I
did so because, while I had no desire to court
ridicule or provoke discussion, I was unable to
agree with you, knowing only too well from my
own dread experience that the world which men
agree to call that of the supernatural is just as
real as — nay, perhaps even more real than — this
world we see about us. In other words, I, like
many of my countrymen, am cursed with the
gift of second-sight — that awful faculty which
200 CLAIRVOYANCE
foretells in vision calamities that are shortly to
occur.
" 'Such a vision I had just now, and its excep-
tional horror moved me as you have seen. I saw
before me a corpse — not that of one who has died
a peaceful, natural death, but that of the victim
of some terrible accident; a ghastly, shapeless
mass, with a face swollen, crushed, unrecogniz-
able. I saw this dreadful object placed in a
coffin, and the funeral service performed over it.
I saw the burial-ground, I saw the clergyman:
and though I had never seen either before, I can
picture both perfectly in my mind's eye now; I
saw you, myself, Beauchamp, all of us and many
more, standing round as mourners; I saw the sol-
diers raise their muskets after the service was
over; I heard the volley they fired — and then I
knew no more.' As he spoke of that volley of
musketry I glanced across with a shudder at
Beauchamp, and the look of stony horror on that
handsome skeptic's face was not to be forgotten."
Omitting the somewhat long recital of events
which followed, I would say that later in the
same day the party of young officers and soldiers
discovered the body of their commanding officer
in the shocking condition so vividly and graphic-
ally described by young Cameron. The story
proceeds as follows:
"When, on the following evening, we arrived
at our destination, and our melancholy deposi-
tion had been taken down by the proper author-
ities, Cameron and I went out for a quiet walk,
to endeavor with the assistance of the soothing
SECOND-SIGHT, PREVISION, ETC 201
influence of nature to shake off something of the
gloom which paralyzed our spirits. Suddenly he
clutched my arm, and, pointing through some
rude railings, said in a trembling voice, 'Yes,
there it is ! that is the burial-ground of yesterday.'
And, when later on we were introduced to the
chaplain of the post, I noticed, though my friends
did not, the irrepressible shudder with which
Cameron took his hand, and I knew that he had
recognized the clergyman of his vision."
The story concludes with the statement that
in all the little details, as well as the main points,
the scene at the burial of the commanding officer
corresponded exactly with the vision of Cameron.
This story brings out the fact that the Scotch
people are especially given to manifestations of
second-sight — particularly the Highlanders or
mountain people of that land. It is hard to find
a Scotchman, who, in his heart, does not believe
in second-sight, and who has not known of some
well authenticated instance of its manifestation.
In other lands, certain races, or sub-races, seem
to be specially favored (or cursed, as Cameron
asserted) with this power. It will be noticed,
usually, that such people dwell, or have dwelt in
the highlands or mountains of their country.
There seems to be something in the mountains
and hills which tends to develop and encourage
this power in those dwelling among them. The
story is also remarkable in the fact that the im-
pression was so strong in the mind of Cameron
that it actually communicated itself by clairaudi-
ence to those near to him — this is quite unusual,
202 CLAIRVOYANCE
though not without correspondence in other
cases. Otherwise, the case is merely a typical
one, and may be duplicated in the experience of
thousands of other men and women.
George Fox, the pioneer Quaker, had this fac-
ulty well developed, and numerous instances of
its manifestation by him are recorded. For in-
stance, he foretold the death of Cromwell, when
he met him ridings at Hampton Court; he said
that he felt "a waft of death" around and about
Cromwell ; and Cromwell died shortly afterwards.
Fox also publicly foretold the dissolution of the
Rump Parliament of England; the restoration of
Charles II; and the Great Fire of London — these
are historical facts, remember. For that matter,
history contains many instances of this kind : the
prophecy of Caesar's death, and its further pre-
vision by his wife, for instance. The Bible pro-
phecies and predictions, major and minor, give
us semi-historical instances.
A celebrated historical instance of remarkable
second-sight and prevision, is that of Cazotte,
whose wonderful prediction and its literal fulfil-
ment are matters of French history. Dumas has
woven the fact into one of his stories, in a dra-
matic manner — but even so he does not make the
tale any more wonderful than the bare facts.
Here is the recital of the case by La Harpe, the
French writer, who was a personal witness of the
occurrence, and whose testimony was corrob-
orated by many others who were present at the
time. La Harpe says :
"It appears as but yesterday, and yet, neverthe-
SECOND-SIGHT, PREVISION, ETC 203
less, it was at the beginning of the year 1788. We
were dining with one of our brethren at the
Academy — a man of considerable wealth and
genius. The conversation became serious; much
admiration was expressed on the revolution in
thought which Voltaire had effected, and it was
agreed that it was his first claim to the reputa-
tion he enjoyed. We concluded that the revolu-
tion must soon be consummated; that it was in-
dispensable that superstition and fanaticism
should give way to philosophy, and we began to
calculate the probability of the period when this
should be, and which of the present company
should live to see it. The oldest complained that
they could scarcely flatter themselves with the
hope; the younger rejoiced that they might en-
tertain this very probable expectation; and they
congratulated the Academy especially for hav-
ing prepared this great work, and for having been
the rallying point, the centre, and the prime
mover of the liberty of thought.
"One only of the guests had not taken part
in all the joyousness of this conversation, and
had even gently and cheerfully checked our
splendid enthusiasm. This was Cazotte, an
amiable and original man, but unhappily infatu-
ated with the reveries of the illumaniti. He
spoke, and with the most serious tone, saying:
'Gentleman, be satisfied; you will all see this
great and sublime revolution, which you so much
desire. You know that I am a little inclined to
prophesy; I repeat, you will see it.' He was an-
swered by the common rejoinder: 'One need not
204 CLAIRVOYANCE
be a conjuror to see that/ He answered: 'Be
it so; but perhaps one must be a little more than
conjuror for what remains for me to tell you.
Do you know what will be the consequences of
this revolution — what will be the consequence to
all of you, and what will be the immediate result
— the well-established effect — the thoroughly
recognized consequences to all of you who are
here present?'
" 'Ah' said Condorcet, with his insolent and
half-suppressed smile, 'let us hear — a philosopher
is not sorry to encounter a prophet — let us hear!'
Cazotte replied: 'You, Monsier de Condorcet
— you will yield up your last breath on the floor
of a dungeon; you will die from poison, which
you will have taken in order to escape from
execution — from poison which the happiness of
that time will oblige you to carry about your
person. You, Monsieur de Chamfort, you will
open your veins with twenty-two cuts of a razor,
and yet will not die till some months after-
ward.' These personages looked at each other,
and laughed again. Cazotte continued: 'You,
Monsieur Vicq d'Azir, you will not open your
own veins, but you will cause yourself to be
bled six times in one day, during a paroxysm of
the gout, in order to make more sure of your end,
and you will die in the night.'
"Cazotte went on : 'You, Monsieur de Nicolai,
you will die on the scaffold ; you, Monsieur Bailly,
on the scaffold; you, Monsieur de Malesherbes,
on the scaffold. 'Ah, God be thanked,' exclaimed
Roucher, 'and what of I?' Cazotte replied:
SECOND-SIGHT, PREVISION, ETC 205
'You? you also will die on the scaffold.' 'Yes,' re-
plied Chamfort, 'but when will all this happen?'
Cazotte answered : 'Six years will not pass over,
before all that I have said to you shall be accom-
plished.' Here I (La Harpe) spoke, saying:
'Here are some astonishing miracles, but you
have not included me in your list.' Cazotte an-
swered me, saying: 'But you will be there, as an
equally extraordinary miracle; you will then be
a Christian!' Vehement exclamations on all
sides followed this startling assertion. 'Ah !' said
Chamfort, 'I am conforted; if we shall perish only
when La Harpe shall be a Christian, we are im-
mortal;'
"Then observed Madame la Duchesse de
Grammont: 'As for that, we women, we are
happy to be counted for nothing in these revolu-
tions: when I say for nothing, it is not that we
do not always mix ourselves up with them a lit-
tle; but it is a received maxim that they take no
notice of us, and of our sex.' 'Your sex, ladies'
said Cazotte, 'your sex will not protect you this
time; and you had far better meddle with noth-
ing, for you will be treated entirely as men, with-
out any difference whatever.' 'But what, then,
are you really telling us of Monsieur Cazotte?
You are preaching to us the end of the world.'
'I know nothing on that subject; but what I do
know is, that you Madame la Duchesse, will be
conducted to the scaffold, you and many other
ladies with you, in the cart of the executioner,
and with your hands tied behind your backs.
'Ah ! I hope that in that case, I shall at least have
206 CLAIRVOYANCE
a carriage hung in black.' 'No, madame; higher
ladies than yourself will go, like you, in the com-
mon car, with their hands tied behind them.'
'Higher ladies! what! the princesses of the
blood ?' 'Yea, and still more exalted personages!'
replied Cazotte.
"Here a sensible emotion pervaded the whole
company, and the countenance of the host was
dark and lowering — they began to feel that the
joke was becoming too serious. Madame de
Grammont, in order to dissipate the cloud, took
no notice of the reply, and contented herself with
saying in a careless tone: 'You see, that he will
not leave me even a confessor!' 'No, madame!'
replied Cazotte, 'you will not have one — neither
you, nor any one besides. The last victim to
whom this favor will be afforded will be — ' Here
he stopped for a moment. 'Well ! who then will
be the happy mortal to whom this prerogative
will be given?' Cazotte replied: 'It is the only
one which he will have then retained — and that
will be the King of France !' " This last start-
ling prediction caused the company to disband
in something like terror and dismay, for the
mere mention of such thing was akin to treason.
The amazing sequel to this strange story is
that within the six years allotted by the proph-
ecy, every detail thereof was verified absolutely.
The facts are known to all students of the French
Revolution, and may be verified by reference to
any history of that terrible period. To appre-
ciate the startling nature of the prophecy when
made, one needs but to be acquainted with the
SECOND-SIGHT, PREVISION, ETC 207
position and characteristics of the persons whose
destinies were foretold. This celebrated instance
of highly advanced future-time clairvoyance, or
prevision, has never been equalled. The reason,
perhaps, is that Cazotte indeed was an advanced
and highly developd occultist — the account men-
tions this, you will notice. This class of persons
very seldom prophecy in this way, for reasons
known to all occultists. The ordinary cases re-
corded are those in which the manifestation is
that of a person of lesser powers and less perfect
development.
Advanced occultists know the danger of a care-
less use of this power. They know that (omit-
ting other and very important reasons) such
revelations would work a terrible effect upon the
minds of persons not sufficiently well balanced to
stand the disclosure. Moreover, they know that
if the average person knew the principal details
of his future life on earth, then he would loss all
interest in it — it would become stale and would
lose the attraction of the unknown. In such a
case, the pleasant things to come would lose their
attractiveness by reason of having been dwelt on
so long that their flavor was lost; and the un-
pleasant things would become unbearable by rea-
son of the continual anticipation of them. We
are apt to discount our pleasures by dwelling too
much upon them in anticipation; and, as we all
know, the dread of a coming evil often is worse
than the thing itself — we suffer a thousand pangs
in anticipation to one in reality. But, as I have
intimated, there are other, and still more serious
208 CLAIRVOYANCE
reasons why the advanced occultists do not in-
dulge in public prophecies of this kind. It is
probable that Cazotte decided to, and was per-
mitted to, make his celebrated prophecy for some
important occult reason of which La Harpe had
no knowledge — it doubtless was a part of the
working out of some great plan, and it may have
accomplished results undreamed of by us. At
any rate, it was something very much out of the
ordinary, even in the case of advanced occultists
and masters of esoteric knowledge.
Another case which has a historic value is the
well-known case concerning the assassination of
Spencer Perceval, the Chancellor of the Ex-
chequer, in England, which occurred in the lobby
of the House of Commons. The persons who
have a knowledge of the case report that some
nine days before the tragic occurrence a Cornish
mine manager, named John Williams, had a
vision, three times in succession, in which he saw
a small man, dressed in a blue coat and white
waistcoat, enter the lobby of the House of Com-
mons; whereupon another man, dressed in a
snuff-colored coat, stepped forward, and, draw-
ing a pistol from an inside pocket fired at and
shot the small man, the bullet lodging in the
left breast. In the vision, Williams turned and
asked some bystander the name of the victim;
the bystander replied that the stricken man was
Mr. Spencer Perceval, the Chancellor of the Ex-
chequer. The valuable feature of the case, from
a scientific standpoint, lies in the fact that Wil-
liams was very much impressed by his thrice-
SECOND-SIGHT, PREVISION, ETC 209
repeated vision, and was greatly disturbed there-
by. His anxiety was so great that he spoke of
the matter to several friends, and asked them
whether it would not be well for him to go to
London for the purpose of warning Mr. Perceval.
His friends ridiculed the whole matter, and per-
suaded him to give up the idea of visiting London
for the purpose named. Those who had a knowl-
edge of the vision were greatly startled and
shocked when several days afterward the assassi-
nation occurred, agreeing in perfect detail with
the vision of the Cornishman. The case, vouched
for as it was by a number of reliable persons who
had been consulted by Williams, attracted much
attention at the time, and has since passed into
the history of remarkable instances of prevision.
In some cases, however, the prevision seems to
come as a warning, and in many cases the heed-
ing of the warning has prevented the unpleasant
features from materializing as seen in the vision.
Up to the point of the action upon the warning
the occurrence agree perfectly with the vision —
but the moment the warned person acts so as to
prevent the occurrence, the whole train of cir-
cumstances is broken. There is an occult ex-
planation of this, but it is too technical to men-
tion at this place.
What is known to psychic researchers as "the
Hannah Green case" is of this character. This
story, briefly, is that Hannah Green, a house-
keeper of Oxfordshire, dreamt that she, having
been left alone in the house of a Sunday evening,
heard a knock at the door. Opening the door she
210 CLAIRVOYANCE
found a tramp who tried to force his way into
the house. She struggled to prevent his en-
trance, but he struck her with a bludgeon and
rendered her insensible, whereupon he entered
the house and robbed it. She related the vision
to her friends, but, as nothing happened for some
time, the matter almost passed from her mind.
But, some seven years afterward, she was left
in charge of the house on a certain Sunday eve-
ning; during the evening she was startled by a
sudden knock at the door, and her former vision
was recalled to her memory quite vividly. She
refused to go to the door, remembering the warn-
ing, but instead went up to a landing on the stair
and looked out the window, she saw at the door
the very tramp whom she had seen in the vision
some seven years before, armed with a bludgeon,
and striving to force an entrance into the house.
She took steps to frighten away the rascal, and
she was saved from the unpleasant conclusion of
her vision. Many similar cases are recorded.
In some cases persons have been warned by
symbols of various kinds; or else have had pre-
vision in the same way. For instance, many cases
are known in which the vision is that of the un-
dertaker's wagon standing before the door of the
person who dies sometime afterward. Or, the
person is visioned clad in a shroud. The vari-
ations of this class are innumerable. Speak to
the average dweller in the highlands of Scotland,
or certain counties in Ireland, regarding this —
you will be furnished with a wealth of illustra-
tions and examples.
SECOND-SIGHT, PREVISION, ETC 211
This phase of the general subject of clairvoy-
ance is very fascinating to the student and in-
vestigator, and is one in which the highest
psychic or astral powers of sensing are called into
play. In fact, as I have said, there is here a re-
flection of something very much higher than the
astral or psychic planes of being. The student
catches a glimpse of regions infinitely higher
and grander. He begins to realize at least some-
thing of the existence of that Universal Con-
sciousness "in which we live, and move, and have
our being;" and of the reality of the Eternal
Now, in which past, present and future are
blended as one fact of infinite consciousness. He
sees the signboard pointing to marvelous truths^
LESSON XIV.
ASTRAL-BODY TRAVELING
There is much confusion existing in the minds
of the average students of occultism concerning
the distinction between astral visioning by means
of the astral senses in clairvoyance, and the
visioning of the astral senses during the travels
of the astral body away from the physical body.
There is such a close connection between the two
several phases of occult phenomena that it is
easy to mistake one for the other; in fact, there
is often such a blending of the two that it is quite
difficult to distinguish between them. However,
in this lesson I shall endeavor to bring out the
characteristics of astral body visioning, that the
student may learn to distinguish them from those
of the ordinary clairvoyant astral visioning, and
recognize them when he experiences them.
The main points of distinction are these:
When visioning clairvoyantly by means of the
astral senses, as described in the preceding chap-
ters of this book, the clairvoyant usually per-
ceives the scene, person or event as a picture on
a flat surface. It is true that there is generally
a perfect perspective, similar to that of a good
stereoscopic view, or that of a high-grade mov-
ing picture photograph — the figures "stand out,"
and do not appear "flat" as in the case of an ordi-
nary photograph; but still at the best it is like
looking at a moving picture, inasmuch as the
whole scene is all in front of you. Visioning in
the astral body, on the contrary, gives you an "all
ASTRAL-BODY TRAVELING 213
around" view of the scene. That is to say, in
such case you see the thing just as you would
were you there in your physical body — you see
in front of you; on the sides of you, out of the
corner of your eye; if you turn your head, you
may see in any direction; and you may turn
around and see what is happening behind you.
in the first case you are merely gazing at an
astral picture in front of you; while in the second
place you are actually there in person.
There are some limitations to this "seeing all
around" when in the astral body, however, which
I should note in passing. For instance, if when
in the astral body you examine the akashic rec-
ords of the past, or else peer into the scenes of
the future, you will see these things merely as a
picture, and will not be conscious of being pres-
ent personally in the scene. (An apparent excep-
tion is to be noted here, also, viz., if your past-
time visioning includes the perception of your-
self in a former incarnation, you may be con-
scious of living and acting in your former per-
sonality; again, if you are psychometrizing from
fossil remains, or anything concerned with a liv-
ing creature of the past, you may "take on" the
mental or emotional conditions of that creature,
and seem to sense things from the inside, rather
than from the outside. This, of course, is also a
characteristic of the ordinary clairvoyant vision
of the past.) But when, in the astral body, you
perceive a present-time scene in space, you are,
to all intents and purposes, an actual partici-
pant— you are actually present at the place and
214 CLAIRVOYANCE
time. The sense of "being actually present in
the body" is the leading characteristic of the
astral body visioning, and distinguishes it from
the "picture seeing" sensing of ordinary clairvoy-
ance. This is stating the matter is as plain and
simple form as is possible, ignoring many tech-
nical details and particulars.
You, being a student of occultism, of course
know that the astral body is a fine counterpart
of the physical body, composed of a far more
subtle form of substance than is the latter, that
under certain conditions you may travel in your
astral body, detached from your physical body
(except being connected with it with a slender
astral cord, bearing a close resemblance to the
umbilical cord which connects the newborn babe
with the placenta in the womb of its mother),
and explore the realms of the astral plane. This
projection of the astral body, as a rule, occurs
only when the physical body is stilled in sleep, or
in trance condition. In fact, the astral body fre-
quently is projected by us during the course of
our ordinary sleep, but we fail to remember what
we have seen in our astral journeys, except, oc-
casionally, dim flashes of partial recollection
upon awakening. In some cases, however, our
astral visioning is so distinct and vivid, that we
awaken with a sense of having had a peculiar
experience, and as having actually been out of
the physical body at the time.
In some cases, the person traveling in the
astral is able to actually take part in the distant
scene, and may, under certain circumstances ac-
ASTRAL-BODY TRAVELING 215
tually materialize himself so as to be seen by
persons in their physical bodies. I am speak-
ing now, of course, of the untrained person. The
trained and developed occultist, of course, is able
to do these things deliberately and consciously,
instead of unconsciously and without intention
as in the case of the ordinary person. I shall
quote here from another writer on the subject,
whose point of view, in connection with my own,
may serve to bring about a clear understanding
in the mind of the student — it is always well to
view any subject from as many angles as possible.
This writer says:
"We enter here upon an entirely new variety
of clairvoyance, in which the consciousness of
the seer no longer remains in or closely connected
with his physical body, but is definitely trans-
ferred to the scene which he is examining.
Though it has no doubt greater dangers for the
untrained seer than either of the other methods,
it is yet quite the most satisfactory form of clair-
voyance open to him. In this case the man's
body is either asleep or in a trance, and its organs
are consequently not available for use while the
vision is going on, so that all description of what
is seen, and all questioning as to further par-
ticulars, must be postponed until the wanderer
returns to this plane. On the other hand, the
sight is much fuller and more perfect; the man
hears as well as sees everything which passes be-
fore him, and can move about freely at will with-
in the very wide limits of the astral plane. He
has also the immense advantage of being able to
216 CLAIRVOYANCE
take part, as it were, in the scenes which come be-
fore his eyes — of conversing at will with various
entities on the astral plane, and from whom so
much information that is curious and interesting
may be obtained. If in addition he can learn how
to materialize himself (a matter of no great dif-
ficulty for him when once the knack is acquired),
he will be able to take part in physical events or
conversations at a distance, and to show himself
to an absent friend at will.
"Again, he will have the additional power of
being able to hunt about for what he wants. By
means of the other varieties of clairvoyance, for
all practical purposes he may find a person or
place only when he is already acquainted with it;
or, when he is put en rapport with it by touching
something physically connected with it, as in
psychometry. By the use of the astral body,
however, a man can move about quite freely, and
rapidly in any direction, and can (for example)
find without difficulty any place pointed out upon
a map, without either any previous knowledge of
the spot or any object to establish a connection
with it. He can also readily rise high into the
air so as to gain a bird's eye view of the coun-
try which he is examining, so as to observe its
extent, the contour of its coastline, or its general
character. Indeed, in every way his power and
freedom are far greater when he uses this method
than they are in any of the lesser forms of clair-
voyance."
In many well authenticated cases, we may see
that the soul of a dying person, one whose phys-
ASTRAL-BODY TRAVELING 217
ical end is approaching, visits friends and rela-
tives is the astral body, and in many cases mate-
rializes and even speaks to them. In such cases
the dying person accomplishes the feat of astral
manifestation without any special occult knowl-
edge; the weakened links between the physical
and the higher phases of the soul render the tem-
porary passing-out comparatively easy, and the
strong desire of the dying person furnishes the
motive power necessary. Such visits, however,
are often found to be merely the strongly charged
thought of the dying person, along the lines of
telepathy, as I have previously explained to you.
But in many cases there can be no doubt that the
phenomenon is a clear case of astral visitation
and materialization.
The records of the Society for Psychical Re-
search contain many instances of this kind; and
similar instances are to be found in other records
of psychical research. I shall quote a few of
these cases for you, that you may get a clear
idea of the characteristics thereof. Andrew Lang,
an eminent student and investigator along the
lines of the psychic and occult, gives us the fol-
lowing case, of which he says, "Not many stories
have such good evidence in their favor." The
story as related by Mr. Lang in one of his books
is as follows:
"Mary, the wife of John Goffe of Rochester,
being afflicted with a long illness, removed to
her fathers house at West Mailing, about nine
miles from her own. The day before her death
she grew very impatiently desirous to see her two
218 CLAIRVOYANCE
children, whom she had left at home to the care
of a nurse. She was too ill to be moved, and be-
tween one and two o'clock in the morning she
fell into a trance. One widow, Turner, who
watched with her that night, says that her eyes
were open and fixed, and her jaw fallen. Mrs.
Turner put her hand to her mouth, but could
perceive no breath. She thought her to be in a
fit, and doubted whether she were dead or alive.
The next morning the dying woman told her
mother that she had been at home with her chil-
dren, saying, 'I was with them last night when I
was asleep.'
"The nurse at Rochester, widow Alexander by
name, affirms that a little before two o'clock that
morning she saw the likeness of the said Mary
Goffe come out of the next chamber (where the
elder child lay in a bed by itself), the door being
left open, and stood by her bedside for about a
quarter of an hour; the younger child was there
lying by her. Her eyes moved and her mouth
went, but she said nothing. The nurse, more-
over says that she was perfectly awake; it was
then daylight, being one of the longest days of
the year. She sat up in bed and looked stead-
fastly on the apparition. In that time she heard
the bridge clock strike two, and a while after
said: Tn the name of the Father, Son and Holy
Ghost, what art thou?' Thereupon the appari-
tion removed and went away; she slipped out of
her clothes and followed, but what became on't
she cannot tell."
In the case just mentioned, Mr. Lang states
ASTRAL-BODY TRAVELING 219
that the nurse was so frightened that she was
afraid to return to bed. As soon as the neigh-
bors were up and about she told them of what
she had seen; but they told her that she had been
dreaming. It was only when, later on, news
came of what had happened at the other end of
the line — the bedside of the dying woman, that
they realized just what had happened.
In a work by Rev. F. G. Lee, there are several
other cases of this kind quoted, all of which are
stated by Mr. Lee to be thoroughly well authenti-
cated. In one of the cases a mother, when dying
in Egypt, appears to her children in Torquay, and
is clearly seen in broad daylight by all five chil-
dren and also by the nursemaid. In another, a
Quaker lady dying at ,Cockermouth is clearly
seen and recognized in daylight by her three chil-
dren at Seattle, the remainder of the story being
almost identical with that of the GofTe case just
quoted.
In the records of the Society for Psychical Re-
search, the following case appears, the person
reporting it being said to be of good character
and reputation for truthfulness and reliability.
The story is as follows: "One morning in De-
cember, 1836, A. had the following dream, or
he would prefer to call it, revelation. He found
himself suddenly at the gate of Major N. M.'s
avenue, many miles from his home. Close to his
was a group of persons, one of whom was a
woman with a basket on her arm, the rest were
men, four of whom were tenants of his own,
while the others were unknown to him. Some of
220 CLAIRVOYANCE
the strangers seemed to be assaulting H. W., one
of his tenants, and he interfered. A. says, 'I
struck violently at the man on my left, and then
with greater violence at the man's face on my
right. Finding, to my surprise, that I had not
knocked down either, I struck again and again
with all the violence of a man frenzied at the
sight of my poor friend's murder. To my great
amazement I saw my arms, although visible to
my eye, were without substance, and the bodies
of the men I struck at and my own came close
together after each blow, through the shadowy
arms I struck with. My blows were delivered
with more extreme violence than I ever think I
exerted, but I became painfully convinced of my
incompetency. I have no consciousness of what
happened after this feeling of unsubstantiality
came upon me.'
"Next morning, A. experienced the stiffness
and soreness of violent bodily exercise, and was
informed by his wife that in the course of the
night he had much alarmed her by striking out
again and again in a terrific manner, 'as if fight-
ing for his life.' He, in turn, informed her of his
dream, and begged her to remember the names
of those actors in it who were known to him. On
the morning of the following day (Wednesday)
A. received a letter from his agent, who resided
in the town close to the scene of the dream, in-
forming him that his tenant had been found on
Tuesday morning at Major N. M.'s gate, speech-
less and apparently dying from a fracture of the
ASTRAL-BODY TRAVELING 221
skull, and that there was no trace of the murder-
ers.
"That night A. started for the town, and ar-
rived there on Thursday morning. On his way
to a meeting of magistrates, he met the senior
magistrate of that part of the country, and re-
quested him to give orders for the arrest of the
three men whom, besides H. W., he had recog-
nized in his dream, and to have them examined
separately. This was at once done. The three
men gave identical accounts of the occurrence,
and all named the woman who was with them.
She was then arrested and gave precisely similar
testimony. They said that between eleven and
twelve on the Monday night they had been walk-
ing homewards altogether along the road, when
they were overtaken by three strangers, two of
whom savagely assaulted H. W., while the other
prevented his friends from interfering. H. W.
did not die, but was never the same man after-
wards; he subsequently emigrated."
Stead, the English editor and psychical re-
searcher, relates the following case, which he ac-
cepts as truthful and correct, after careful in-
vestigation of the circumstances and of the char-
acter and reputation of the person relating it.
The story proceeds as follows:
"St. Eglos is situated about ten miles from the
Atlantic, and not quite so far from the old market
town of Trebodwina. Hart and George Northey
were brothers, and from childhood their lives
had been marked by the strongest brotherly af-
fection. Hart and George Northey had never
222 CLAIRVOYANCE
been separated from their birth until George be-
came a sailor, Hart meantime joining his father
in business. On the 8th of February, 1840, while
George Northey's ship was lying in port at St.
Helena, he had the following strange dream:
"Last night I dreamt that my brother was
at Trebodwina Market, and that I was with him,
quite close by his side, during the whole of the
market transactions. Although I could see and
hear which passed around me, I felt sure that it
was not my bodily presence which thus accom-
panied him, but my shadow or rather my spir-
itual presence, for he seemed quite unconscious
that I was near him. I felt that my being thus
present in this strange way betokened some hid-
den danger which he was destined to meet, and
which I know my presence could not avert, for
I could not speak to warn him of his peril."
The story then proceeds to relate how Hart
collected considerable money at Trebodwina
Market, and then started to ride homeward.
George tells what happened to his brother on the
way, as follows :
"My terror gradually increased as Hart ap-
proached the hamlet of Polkerrow, until I was in
a perfect frenzy, frantically desirous, yet un-
able to warn my brother in some way and pre-
vent him from going further. I suddenly became
aware of two dark shadows thrown across the
road. I felt that my brother's hour had come,
and I was powerless to aid him ! Two men ap-
peared, whom I instantly recognized as notorious
poachers who lived in a lonely wood near St.
ASTRAL-BODY TRAVELING 223
Eglos. They wished him 'Good night, mister!'
civilly enough. He replied, and entered into con-
versation with them about some work he had
promised them. After a few minutes they asked
him for some money. The elder of the two broth-
ers, who was standing near the horse's head,
said: "Mr. Northey, we know you have just
come from Trebodwina Market with plenty of
money in your pockets; we are desperate men,
and you bean't going to leave this place until
we've got that money; so hand over!' My
brother made no reply except to slash at him with
the whip, and spur the horse at him.
"The younger of the ruffians instantly drew a
pistol, and fired. Hart dropped lifeless from the
saddle, and one of the villains held him by the
throat with a grip of iron for some minutes, as
thought to make assurance doubly sure, and
crush out any particle of life my poor brother
might have left. The murderers secured the
horse to a tree in the orchard, and, having rifled
the corpse, they dragged it up the stream, con-
cealing it under the overhanging banks of the
water-course. Then they carefully covered over
all marks of blood on the road, and hid the pistol
in the thatch of a disused hut close to the road-
side; then, setting the horse free to gallop home
alone, they decamped across the country to their
own cottage."
The story then relates how George Northey's
vessel left St. Helena the next day after the
dream, and reached Plymouth in due time.
George carried with him a very vivid recollec-
224 CLAIRVOYANCE
tion of his vision on the return voyage, and never
doubted for an instant that his brother had been
actually murdered in the manner and by the per-
sons named, as seen in the vision. He carried
with him the determination to bring the villains
to justice and was filled with the conviction that
through his efforts retribution would fall upon
the murderers.
In England, justice was at work — but the
missing link was needed. The crime aroused
universal horror and indignation, and the author-
ities left nothing undone in the direction of
discovering the murderers and bringing them to
justice. Two brothers named Hightwood were
suspected, and in their cottage were found blood-
stained garments. But no pistol was found,
although the younger brother admitted having
owned but lost one. They were arrested and
brought before the magistrates. The evidence
against them was purely circumstantial, and not
any too strong at that; but their actions were
those of guilty men. They were committed for
trial. Each confessed, in hopes of saving his life
and obtaining imprisonment instead. But both
were convicted and sentenced to be hanged.
There was doubt in the minds of some, however,
about the pistol. The story continues:
"Before the execution, George Northey ar-
rivd from St. Helena, and declared that the pistol
was in the thatch of the old cottage close by the
place where they had murdered Hart Northey,
and where they had hid it. 'How do you know?'
he was asked. George replied: T saw the foul
ASTRAL-BODY TRAVELING 225
deed committed in a dream I had the night of the
murder, when at St. Helena.' The pistol was
found, as George Northey had predicted, in the
thatch of the ruined cottage." Investigation re-
vealed that the details of the crime were identical
with those seen in the vision.
It is a fact known to all occultists that many-
persons frequently travel in the astral body dur-
ing sleep; and in many cases retain a faint recol-
lection of some of the things they have seen and
heard during their travels in the astral. Nearly
everyone knows the experience of waking up in
the morning feeling physically tired and "used
up;" in some cases a dim recollection of walk-
ing or working during the dream being had.
Who among us has not had the experience of
"walking on the air," or in the air, without the
feet touching the ground, being propelled simply
by the effort of the will? And who of us has
had not experienced that dreadful "falling
through space" sensation, in dreams, with the
sudden awakening just before we actually struck
earth? And who has not had the mortifying
dream experience of walking along the street,
or in some public place, and being suddenly over-
come by the consciousness that we were in our
night-clothes, or perhaps without any clothing
at all? All of these things are more or less dis-
torted recollection of astral journeyings.
But while these dream excursions in the astral
are harmless, the conscious "going out in the
astral" is not so. There are many planes of the
astral into which it is dangerous and unpleasant
226 CLAIRVOYANCE
for the uninstructed person to travel; unless ac-
companied by a capable occultist as guide.
Therefore, I caution all students against trying
to force development in that direction. Nature
surrounds you with safeguards, and interposes
obstacles for your own protection and good. Do
not try to break through these obstacles without
knowledge of what you are doing. "Fools rush
in where angels fear to tread," remember; and
"a little learning is a dangerous thing." When
you have reached the stage of development in
which it will be safe for you to undertake con-
scious astral explorations, then will your guide be
at hand, and the instruction furnished you by
those capable of giving it to you. Do not try to
break into the astral without due preparation,
and full knowledge, lest you find yourself in the
state of the fish who leaped out of the water on
to the banks of the stream. Your dream trips
are safe; they will increase in variety and clear-
ness, and you will remember more about them —
all this before you may begin to try to conscious-
ly "go out into the astral" as do the occultists. Be
content to crawl before you may walk. Learn
to add, multiply, subtract and divide, before you
undertake the higher mathematics, algebra,
geometry, etc., of occultism.
LESSON XV.
STRANGE ASTRAL PHENOMENA.
There are several phases of astral phenomena
other than those mentioned in the preceding
chapters, which it will be better for the student
to become acquainted with in order to round out
his general knowledge of the subject, although
the manifestations are comparatively rare, and
not so generally recognized in works on this sub-
ject.
One of the first of these several phases of astral
phenomena is that which may be called Thought-
Form Projection. This manifestation comes in
the place on the psychic scale just between ordi-
nary clairvoyance on the one hand, and astral-
body projection on the other. It has some of the
characteristics of each, and is often mistaken for
one or the other of these phases.
To understand this phenomena, the student
should know something regarding the fact that
thought frequently takes on astral form, and that
these manifestations are known as thought-
forms. I have spoken of these in some of the
preceding lessons. The ordinary thought-form
is quite simple, as a rule, and does not bear any
particular resemblance to the sender thereof. But
in some cases a person may, consciously or un-
consciously, strongly and clearly think of him-
self as present at some other place, and thus actu-
ally create a thought-form of himself at that
place, which may be discerned by those having
228 CLAIRVOYANCE
clairvoyant vision. Moreover, this thought-form
of himself is connected psychically with himself
and affords a channel of psychic information for
him. As a rule these thought-forms are only pro-
jected by those who have trained their minds and
will along occult lines; but occasionally under the
stress of strong emotion or desire an ordinary
person may focus his psychic power to such an
extent that the phenomena is manifested.
Here I will quote from an English investigator
of astral phenomena, who has had much experi-
ence on that plane . He says: "All students are
aware that thought takes form, at any rate upon
its own plane, and in the majority of cases upon
the astral plane also; but it may not be so gener-
ally known that if a man thinks strongly of him-
self as present at any given place, the form as-
sumed by that particular thought will be a like-
ness of the thinker himself, which will appear
at the place in question. Essentially this form
must be composed of the matter of the mental
plane, but in very many cases it would draw
round itself matter of the astral plane also, and
so would approach much nearer to visibility.
There are, in fact, many instances in which it
has been seen by the person thought of — most
probably by means of the unconscious influence
emanating from the original thinker. None of
the consciousness of the thinker would, however,
be included within this thought-form. When
once sent out from him, it would normally be a
quite separate entity — not indeed absolutely un-
connected with its maker, but practically so as
STRANGE ASTRAL PHENOMENA 229
far as the possibility of receiving any impression
through it is concerned.
"This type of clairvoyance consists, then, in
the power to retain so much connection with and
so much hold over a newly-created thought-form
as will render it possible to receive impressions
by means of it. Such impressions as were made
upon the form would in this case be transmitted
to the thinker — not along an astral telegraph
line, but by a sympathetic vibration. In a perfect
case of this kind of clairvoyance it is almost as
though the seer projected a part of his conscious-
ness into the thought-form, and used it as a kind
of outpost, from which observation was possible.
He sees almost as well as he would if he himself
stood in the place of his thought-form. The
figures at which he is looking will appear to him
as of life-size and close to hand, instead of tiny
and at a distance as in the case of some other
forms of clairvoyance; and he will find it possible
to shift his point of view if he wishes to do so.
Clairaudience is perhaps less frequently asso-
ciated with this type of clairvoyance than with
the others, but its place is to some extent taken
by a kind of mental perception of the thoughts
and intentions of those who are seen.
"Since the man's consciousness is still in the
physical body, he will be able (even when exer-
cising this faculty) to hear and to speak, in so far
as he can do this without any distraction of his
attention. The moment that the intentness of
his thought fails, the whole vision is gone, and
he will have to construct a fresh thought-form
230 CLAIRVOYANCE
before he can resume it. Instances in which this
kind of sight is possessed with any degree of per-
fection by untrained people are naturally rarer
than in the other types of clairvoyance, because
the capacity for mental control required, and the
generally finer nature of the forces employed."
I may mention that this particular method is
frequently employed by advanced occultists of
all countries, being preferred for various reasons.
Some of the reasons of this preference as follows:
(a) The ability to shift the vision, and to turn
around almost as well as in the case of actual
astral-body projection — this gives quite an ad-
vantage to this method over the method of ordi-
nary clairvoyance; (b) it does away with certain
disadvantages of "going out into the astral" in
the astral-body, which only trained occultists
realize — it gives almost the same results as
astral-body clairvoyance, without a number of
disadvantages and inconveniences.
In India, especially, this form of clairvoyance
is comparatively frequent. This by reason of the
fact that the Hindus, as a race, are far more
psychic than are those of the Western lands, all
else considered; and, besides, there are a much
greater number of highly developed occultists
there than in the West. Moreover, there is a
certain psychic atmosphere surrounding India,
by reason of its thousands of years of deep in-
terest in things psychic and spiritual, all of which
renders the production of psychic phenomena far
easier than in other lands.
In India, moreover, we find many instances of
STRANGE ASTRAL PHENOMENA 231
another form of psychic, or astral phenomena. I
allude to the production of thought-form pictures
which are plainly visible to one or more persons.
This phase of psychic phenomena is the real basis
for many of the wonder tales which Western
travellers bring back with them from India. The
wonderful cases of magical appearance of living
creatures and plants, and other objects, out of the
clear air are the result of this psychic phenomena.
That is to say, the creatures and objects are not
really produced — they are but astral appearances
resulting from the projection of powerful
thought-forms from the mind of the magician or
other wonder-worker, of whom India has a plen-
tiful supply. Even the ignorant fakirs (I use the
word in its true sense, not in the sense given it by
American slang) — even these itinerent showmen
of psychic phenomena, are able to produce phe-
nomena of this kind which seems miraculous to
those witnessing them. As for the trained oc-
cultists of India, I may say that their feats (when
they deign to produce them) seem to overturn
every theory and principle of materialistic phi-
losophy and science. But in nearly every case the
explanation is the same — the projection of a
strong and clear thought-form on a large scale.
Although I have purposely omitted reference
to Hindu psychic phenomena in this book (for
the reason given in my Introduction), I find it
necessary to quote cases in India in this connec-
tion, for the simple reason that there are but few
counterparts in the Western world. There are
no itinerent wonder-workers of this kind in
232 CLAIRVOYANCE
Western lands, and the trained occultists of the
West of course would not consent to perform
feats of this kind for the amusement of persons
seeking merely sensations. The trained wills of
the West are given rather to materializing ob-
jectively on the physical plane, creating great
railroads, buildings, bridges, etc., from the men-
tal pictures, rather than devoting the same time,
energy and will to the production of astral
though-forms and pictures. There is a great dif-
ference in temperament, as well as a difference in
the general psychic atmosphere, between East
and West, which serves to explain matters of
this kind.
An American writer truly says: "The first
principle underlying the whole business of Hindu
wonder-working is that of a strong will; and the
first necessary condition of producing a magical
effect is an increase in the power of thought. The
Hindus, owing to that intense love for solitary
meditation, which has been one of the most pro-
nounced characteristics from time immemorial,
have acquired mental faculties of which we of the
Western and younger civilization are totally ig-
norant. The Hindu has attained a past master's
degree in speculative philosophy. He has for
years retired for meditation to the silent places
in his land, lived a hermit, subdued the body and
developed the mind, thus winning control over
other minds."
In India,I have seen scenes of far distant places
appearing as a mirage in clear air, even the colors
being present to the scenes. This, though some-
STRANGE ASTRAL PHENOMENA 233
what uncommon, was simply a remarkable in-
stance of thought-form projection from the mind
of a man highly developed along occult lines.
You must remember that in order to produce a
picture in the astral of this kind, the occultist
must not only have the power of will and mind to
cause such a picture to materialize, but he must
also have a remarkable memory for detail in the
picture — for nothing appears in the picture un-
less it has already been pictured in the mind of
the mind of the man himself. Such a memory
and perception of detail is very rare — in the
Western world it is possessed by only exceptional
artists; however, anyone may cultivate this per-
ception and memory if he will give the time and
care to it that the Hindu magicians do.
You have heard of the Hindu Mango Trick, in
which the magician takes a mango seed, plants
it in the ground, waves his hands over it, and
then causes first a tiny shoot to appear from the
surface of the ground, this followed by a tiny
trunk, and leaves, which grow and grow, until at
last appears a full sized mango tree, which first
shows blossoms and then ripe fruit. In short, in
a few moments the magician has produced that
which Nature require years to do — that is he ap-
parently does this. What he really does is to
produce a wonderful thought-form in the astral,
from seed stage to tree and fruit stage; the astral
picture reproducing perfectly the picture in his
own mind. It is as if he were creating a moving
picture film-roll in his mind, and then projecting
this upon the screen of the air. There is no
234 CLAIRVOYANCE
mango tree there, and never was, outside of the
mind of the magician and the minds of his
audience.
In the same way, the magician will seem to
throw the end of a rope up into the air. It travels
far up until the end is lost sight of. Then he
sends a boy climbing up after it, until he too dis-
appears from sight. Then he causes the whole
thing to disappear, and lo! the boy is seen stand-
ing among the audience. The boy is real, of
course, but he never left the spot — the rest was
all an appearance caused by the mind and will
of the magician, pictured in the astral as a
thought-form. In the same way the magician
will seem to cut the boy into bits, and then cause
the severed parts to spring together and reassem-
ble themselves. These feats may be varied in-
definitely but the principle is ever the same —
thought-form projection.
Western visitors have sought to obtain photo-
graphs of these feats of the Hindu magicians, but
their plates and films invariably show nothing
whatever except the old fakir sitting quietly in
the centre, with a peculiar expression in his eyes.
This is as might be expected, for the picture
exists only in the astral, and is perceived only by
the awakened astral senses of those present,
which have been stimulated into activity by the
power of the magician — by sympathetic vibra-
tion, to be exact. Moreover, in certain instances
it has been found that the vision is confined to a
limited area; persons outside of the limit-ring see
nothing, and those moving nearer to the magician
STRANGE ASTRAL PHENOMENA 235
lose sight of what they had previously seen.
There are scientific reasons for this last fact,
which need not be gone into at this place. The
main point I am seeking to bring out is that these
wonderful scenes are simply and wholly thought-
form pictures in the astral, perceived by the
awakened astral vision of those present. This to
be sure is wonderful enough — but still no miracle
has been worked !
I may mention here that these magicians begin
their training from early youth. In addition to
certain instruction concerning astral phenomena
which is handed down from father to son among
them they are set to work practicing "visualiza-
tion" of things previously perceived. They are
set to work upon, say, a rose. They must im-
press upon their memory the perfect picture of
the rose — no easy matter, I may tell you. Then
they proceed to more difficult objects, slowly and
gradually, along well known principles of
memory development. Along with this they
practice the art of reproducing that which they
remember — projecting it in thought-form state.
And so the young magician proceeds, from sim-
ple to complex things; from easy to difficult;
until, finally, he is pronounced fit to give public
exhibitions. All this takes years and years —
sometimes the boy grows to be a middle-aged
man before he is allowed to publicly exhibit his
power. Imagine a Western boy or man being
willing to study from early childhood to middle-
age before he may hope to be able to show what
he has been learning! Verily "the East is East,
236 CLAIRVOYANCE
and the West is West" — the two poles of human
activity and expression.
Another phase of psychic astral phenomena
which should be mentioned, although it is mani-
fested but comparatively seldom, is that which
has been called "Telekinesis." By the term "tele-
kinesis" is meant that class of phenomena which
manifests in the movement of physical objects
without physical contact with the person respon-
sible for the movement. I understand that the
term itself was coined by Professor Cowes, with
whose works I am not personally familiar. It is
derived from the two Greek words tele, meaning
"far off," and kinesis, meaning "to move."
This class of phenomena is known better in the
Western world by reason of its manifestation in
spiritualistic circles in the movement of tables,
etc.; the knocking or tapping on tables and doors,
etc.; all of which are usually attributed to the
work of "spirits," but which occultists know are
generally produced, conciously or unconsciously,
by means of the power in the medium or others
present, sometimes both. I would say here that
I am not trying to discredit genuine spiritualistic
phenomena — I am not considering the same in
these lessons. All that I wish to say is that many
of the phenomena commonly attributed to
"spirits" are really but results of the psychic
forces inherent in the living human being.
Under certain conditions there may appear in
the case of a person strongly psychic, and also
strongly charged with prana, the ability to ex-
tend a portion of the astral body to a considerable
STRANGE ASTRAL PHENOMENA 237
distance, and to there produce an effect upon
some physical object. Those with strong clair-
voyant vision may actually perceive this astral
extension, under favorable circumstances. They
perceive the astral arm of the person stretching
out, diminishing in size as it extends (just as a
piece of flexible rubber shrinks in diameter as it
expands in length) and finally coming in contact
with the physical object it wishes to move or
strike. Then is seen a strong flow of prana along
its length, which (by a peculiar form of concen-
tration) is able to produce the physical effect. I
cannot enter into the subject of astral physics at
this place, for the subject is far too technical to
be treated in lessons designed for general study.
I may at least partially explain the phenomenon,
however, by saying that the projected astral arm
acts in a manner almost precisely like that of an
extended physical arm, were such a thing pos-
sible in nature.
This astral-body extension produces spirit raps
on tables; table-tilting and movement; levitation,
or the lifting of solid objects in the air; playing
upon musical instruments such as the guitar, ac-
cordian, etc. In some cases it is able to actually
lift the person himself from the floor, and carry
him through the air, in the same way. It may
also cause the movement of a pencil in a closed
slate, or bit of chalk upon a blackboard. In fact,
it may produce almost any form of movement
possible to the physical hand. In the case of the
levitation of the person himself, the astral arms,
and sometimes the legs as well, extend to the
238 CLAIRVOYANCE
floor and push up the physical body into the air,
and then propel it along. There are many com-
plex technical details to these manifestations,
however, and in a general statement these must
be omitted.
Some who are firmly wedded to the spiritistic
theory resent the statement of occultists that
this form of phenomena may be explained with1
out the necessity of the "spirits." But the best
ground for the statement of the occultists is that
many advanced occultists are able to produce
such phenomena, consciously, by an act of pure
will, accompanied by the power of mental pic-
turing. They first picture the astral extension,
and then will the projection of the astral and the
passage of the prana (or vital force) around the
pattern of the mental image. In the case of
some very highly developed occultists the astral
thought-form of their body becomes so charged
with prana that it is able to move physical ob-
jects. There are not mere theories, for they may
be verified by any occultist of sufficiently high
development.
I do not wish to intimate that the mediums
are aware of the true nature of this phenomena,
and consciously deceive their followers. On the
contrary, most of them firmly believe that it is
the "spirits" who do the work; unaware that they
are unconsciously projecting their astral bodies,
charged with prana, and performing the feat
themselves. The best mediums, however, will
generally tell you that they strongly "wish"
that the thing be done, and a little cross-exami-
STRANGE ASTRAL PHENOMENA 239
nation will reveal the fact that they generally
make a clear mental picture of the actual hap-
pening just before it occurs. As I have already
stated, however, the best proof is the fact that
advanced occultists are able to duplicate the phe-
nomena deliberately, consciously, and at will. I
do not think that detracts from the wonder and
interest in the so-called "spiritistic" phenomena;
on the contrary, I think that it adds to it.
Again invading the realm of the "spirits," I
would say that occultists know that many cases
of so-called materialization of "spirit-forms"
take place by reason of the unconscious projec-
tion of the astral body of the medium. Moreover,
such a projection of the astral body may take on
the appearance of some departed soul, by reason
of the mental picture of that person in the mind
of the medium. But, it may be asked if the
medium has never seen the dead person, how can
he or she make a mental picture of him or her.
The answer is that the minds of the persons
present who knew the dead person tend to influ-
ence the appearance of the nebulous spirit form.
In fact, in most cases the medium is unable to
produce the phenomenon without the psychic
assistance of those in the circle. In this case,
also, I would say that the advanced occultist is
able to duplicate the phenomena at will, as all
who have enjoyed the privilege of close acquaint-
ance with such persons are aware.
The fact the medium is usually in a trance con-
dition aids materially in the ease with which the
phenomena are produced. With the conscious
240 CLAIRVOYANCE
mind stilled, and the subconscious mind active,
the astral phenomena are produced with much
less trouble than would be the case if the medium
were in the ordinary condition.
Now, I wish to impress upon the minds of
those of my readers who have a strong sympathy
for the spiritistic teachings that I recognize the
validity and genuineness of much of the phe-
nomena of spiritism — I know these things to be
true, for that matter; it is not a matter of mere
belief on my part. But I also know that much of
the so-called spiritistic phenomena is possible
without the aid of "spirits," but by the employ-
ment of the psychic astral forces and powers as
stated in these lessons. I see no reason for any
honest investigator of spiritism to be offended at
such statements, for it does not take away from
the wonder of the phenomena; and does not dis-
credit the motives and power of the mediums.
We must search for truth wherever it is to be
found; and we must not seek to dodge the results
of our investigations. There is too much won-
derful phenomena in spiritism to begrudge the
explanation that the occultist offers for certain of
its phases.
While I am on the subject of materialization
however, I would direct the attention of the stu-
dent to my little book entitled "The Astral
World," in which I have explained briefly the
phenomena of those planes of the astral in which
dwell the cast-off shells of souls which have
moved on to the higher planes of the great astral
world. I have there shown that many astral
STRANGE ASTRAL PHENOMENA 241
shells or shades, or other astral semi-entities may
be materialized, and thus mistaken for the
"spirits" of departed friends. I have also ex-
plained in the same little book how there are cer-
tain powerful thought-forms which may be mis-
taken for spirit materializations. I have also
shown how many a honest medium is really a
good clairvoyant, and by reading the records of
the astral light is able to give information which
seems to come from the departed soul. All of
these things should be familiar to the earnest in-
vestigator of spiritism, in order that he may be
able to classify the phenomena which he wit-
nesses, and to avoid error and disappointment.
In this connection, before passing on to the
consideration of other phases of psychic phe-
nomena, I would say that one of the best me-
diums known to the modern Western world — a
medium who has been consulted by eminent men,
university professors, psychologists, and others
— and whose revelations regarding past, present
and future astounded careful and intelligent men
of international reputation — this medium at the
height of her professional success made a public
announcement that she felt compelled, from con-
scientious motives, to assert that she had come
to the conclusion that her message came not from
departed "spirits" but rather from some un-
known realm of being, brought hither by the
exercise of some faculty inherent in her and de-
veloped to a high power in her for some reason,
which power seem to manifest more effectively
when she shut off her ordinary physical faculties
242 CLAIRVOYANCE
and funtioned on a plane higher than them. I
think that the student of the present lessons will
be able to point out the nature of the phenomena
manifested by this medium, and also the source
of her power. If not, I shall feel disappointed at
my work of instruction.
LESSON XVI.
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE; ITS LAWS AND
PRINCIPLES
One of the phases of psychic phenomena that
actively engage the attention of the student from
the very beginning is that which may be called
Psychic Influence. By this term is meant the in-
fluencing of one mind by another — the effect of
one mind over another. There has been much
written and said on this phase of the general sub-
ject in recent years, but few writers, however,
have gone deeply into the matter.
In the first place, most of the writers on the
subject seek to explain the whole thing by means
of ordinary telepathy. But this is merely a one-
sided view of the truth of the matter. For, while
ordinary telepathy plays an important part in the
phenomena, still the higher form of telepathy,
i. e., astral thought-transference, is frequently in-
volved. The student who has followed me in the
preceding lessons will understand readily what I
mean when I say this, so there is no necessity for
repetition on this point at this place.
At this point, however, I must ask the student
to consider the idea of psychic vibrations and their
inductive power. It is a great principle of occult-
ism, as well as of modern science, that every-
thing is in a state of vibration — everything has
its own rate of vibration, and is constantly mani-
festing it. Every mental state is accompanied by
vibration of its own plane; every emotional state
244 CLAIRVOYANCE
or feeling has its own particular rate of vibra-
tion. These rates of vibrations manifest just as
do the vibrations of musical sound which produce
the several notes on the scale, one rising above
the other in rate of vibration. But the scale of
mental and emotional states is far more complex,
and far more extended than is the musical scale;
there are thousands of different notes, and half-
notes, on the mental scale. There are harmonies
and discords on that scale, also.
To those to whom vibrations seem to be some-
thing merely connected with sound-waves, etc.,
I would say that a general and hasty glance at
some elementary work on physical science will
show that even the different shades, hues and
tints of the colors perceived by us arise from dif-
ferent rates of vibrations. Color is nothing more
than the result of certain rates of vibrations of
light recorded by our senses and interpreted by
our minds. From the low vibrations of red to
the high vibrations of violet, all the various colors
of the spectrum have their own particular rate of
vibration. And^ more than this, science knows
that below the lowest red vibrations, and above
the highest violet vibrations, there are other vi-
brations which our senses are unable to record,
but which scientific instruments register. The
rays of light by which photographs are taken are
not perceived by the eye. There are a number of
so-called chemical rays of light which the eye
does not perceive, but which may be caught by
delicate instruments. There is what science has
called "dark light," which will photograph in a
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 245
room which appears pitch dark to the human
sight.
Above the ordinary scale of light vibrations
are the vibrations of the X-Rays and other fine
forces — these are not perceived by the eye, but
are caught by delicate instruments and recorded.
Moreover, though science has not as yet discov-
erd the fact, occultists know that the vibrations
of mental and emotional states are just as true
and regular as are those of sound or light, or
heat. Again, above the plane of the physical
vibrations arising from the brain and nervous
system, there are the vibrations of the astral
counterparts of these, which are much higher in
the scale. For even the astral faculties and or-
gans, while above the physical, still are under the
universal rule of vibration, and have their own
rate thereof. The old occult axiom: "As above,
so below; as below, so above" is always seen to
work out on all planes of universal energy.
Closely following this idea of the universality
of vibrations, and intimately connected there-
with, we have the principle of "induction," which
is likewise universal, and found manifesting on
all planes of energy. "What is induction?" you
may ask. Well, it is very simple, or very com-
plex— just as you may look at it. The principle
of induction (on any plane) is that inherent
quality or attribute of energy by which the mani-
festation of energy tends to reproduce itself in a
second object, by setting up corresponding vibra-
tions therein, though without direct contact of
the two objects.
246 CLAIRVOYANCE
Thus, heat in one object tends to induce heat
in another object within its range of induction —
the heated object "throws off" heat vibrations
which set up corresponding vibrations in the
near-by second object and make it hot. Likewise,
the vibrations of light striking upon other objects
render them capable of radiating light. Again,
a magnet will induce magnetism in a piece of
steel suspended nearby, though the two objects
do not actually touch each other. An object
which is electrified will by induction electrify
another object situated some distance away. A
note sounded on the piano, or violin, will cause a
glass or vase in some distant part of the room to
vibrate and "sing," under certain conditions.
And, so on, in every form or phase of the mani-
festation of energy do we see the principle of in-
duction in full operation and manifestation.
On the plane of ordinary thought and emotion,
we find many instances of this principle of induc-
tion. We know that one person vibrating strongly
with happiness or sorrow, cheerfulness or anger,
as the case may be, tends to communicate his
feeling and emotional state to those with whom
he comes in contact. All of you have seen a
whole room full of persons affected and influ-
enced in this way, under certain circumstances.
You have also seen how a magnetic orator,
preacher, singer or actor is able to induce in his
audience a state of emotional vibration corre-
sponding to that manifested by himself. In the
same manner the "mental atmospheres" of towns,
cities, etc., are induced.
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 247
A well-known writer on this subject has
truthfully told us: "We all know how great
waves of feeling spread over a town, city or
country, sweeping people off their balance. Great
waves of political enthusiasm, or war-spirit, or
prejudice for or against certain persons, sweep
over places and cause men to act in a manner
that they will afterward regret when they come
to themselves and consider their acts in cold
blood. They will be swayed by demagogues or
magnetic leaders who wish to gain their votes or
patronage; and they will be led into acts of mob
violence, or similar atrocities, by yielding to
these waves of contagious thought. On the other
hand, we all know how great waves of religious
feeling sweep over a community upon the occa-
sion of some great 'revival' excitement or fervor."
These things being perceived, and recognized
as true, the next question that presents itself to
the mind of the intelligent student is this: "But
what causes the difference in power and effect be-
tween the thought and feeling-vibrations of dif-
ferent persons?" This question is a valid one,
and arises from a perception of the underlying
variety and difference in the thought vibrations
of different persons. The difference, my students,
is caused by three principal facts, viz., (1) differ-
ence in degree of feeling; (2) difference in degree
of visualization; and (3) difference in degree of
concentration. Let us examine each of these suc-
cessively, so as to get at the underlying principle.
The element of emotional feeling is like the
element of fire in the production of steam. The
248 CLAIRVOYANCE
more vivid and intense the feeling or emotion,
the greater the degree of heat and force to the
thought wave or vibratory stream projected.
You will begin to see why the thought vibrations
of those animated and filled with strong desire,
strong wish, strong ambition, etc., must be more
forceful than those of persons of the opposite
type.
The person who is filled with a strong desire,
wish or ambition, which has been fanned into a
fierce blaze by attention, is a dynamic power
among other persons, and his influence is felt. In
fact, it may be asserted that as a general rule no
person is able to influence men and things unless
he have a strong desire, wish or ambition within
him. The power of desire is a wonderful one, as
all occultists know, and it will accomplish much
even if the other elements be lacking; while, in
proper combination with other principles it will
accomplish wonders. Likewise, a strong interest
in a thing will cause a certain strength to the
thought-vibrations connected therewith. Inter-
est is really an emotional feeling, though we gen-
erally think of it as merely something connected
with the intellect. A cold intellectual thought has
very little force, unless backed up by strong in-
terest and concentration. But any intellectual
thought backed up with interest, and focused by
concentration, will produce very strong thought
vibrations, with a marked inductive power.
Now, let us consider the subject of visualiza-
tion. Every person knows that the person who
wishes to accomplish anything, or who expects
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 249
to do good work along any line, must first know
what he wishes to accomplish. In the degree that
he is able to see the thing in his mind's eye — to
picture the thing in his imagination — in that de-
gree will he tend to manifest the thing itself in
material form and effect.
Sir Francis Galton, an eminent authority upon
psychology, says on this point : "The free use of
a high visualizing faculty is of much importance
in connection with the higher processes of gen-
eralized thought. A visual image is the most
perfect form of mental representation wherever
the shape, position, and relations of objects to
space are concerned. The best workmen are
those who visualize the whole of what they pro-
pose to do before they take a tool in their hands.
Strategists, artists of all denominations, physic-
ists who contrive new experiments, and, in short,
all who do not follow routine, have need of it.
A faculty that is of importance in all technical
and artistic occupations, that gives accuracy to
our perceptions and justice to our generaliza-
tions, is starved by lazy disuse instead of being
cultivated judiciously in such a way as will, on
the whole, bring best return. I believe that a
serious study of the best way of developing and
utilizing this faculty, without prejudice to the
practice of abstract thought in symbols, is one
of the pressing desirata in the yet unformed
science of education."
Not only on the ordinary planes is the forming
of strong mental images important and useful,
but when we come to consider the phenomena of
250 CLAIRVOYANCE
the astral plane we begin to see what an im-
portant part is played there by strong mental
images or visualized ideas. The better you know
what you desire, wish or aspire to, the stronger
will be your thought vibrations of that thing, of
course. Well, then, the stronger that you are
able to picture the thing in your mind — to visual-
ize it to yourself — the stronger will be your
actual knowledge and thought-form of that thing.
Instead of your thought vibrations being grouped
in nebulous forms, lacking shape and distinct
figure, as in the ordinary case; when you form
strong, clear mental images of what you desire
or wish to accomplish, then do the though vibra-
tions group themselves in clear, strong distinct
forms. This being done, when the mind of other
persons are affected by induction they get the
clear idea of the thought and feeling in your
mind, and are strongly influenced thereby.
A little later on, I shall call your attention to
the Attractive Power of Thought. But at this
point I wish to say to you that while thought
certainly attracts to you the things that you
think of the most, still the power of the attrac-
ion depends very materially upon the clearness
and distinctness of the mental image, or thought
visualization, of the desired thing that you have
set up in your mind. The nearer you can actually
see the thing as you wish it to happen, even to
the general details, the stronger will be the at-
tractive force thereof. But, I shall leave the dis-
cussion of this phase of the subject until I reach
it in its proper order. For the present, I shall
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 251
content myself with urging upon you the import-
ance of a clear mental image, or visualized
thought, in the matter of giving force and direc-
tion to the idea induced in the minds of other
persons. In order for the other persons to actu-
ally perceive clearly the idea or feeling induced
in them, it is necessary that the idea or feeling be
strongly visualized in the mind originating it;
that is the whole thing in one sentence.
The next point of importance in thought-influ-
ence by induction, is that which is concerned
with the process of concentration. Concentra-
tion is the act of mental focusing, or bringing to
a single point or centre. It is like the work of
the sun-glass that converges the rays of the sun
to a single tiny point, thus immensely increasing
its heat and power. Or, it is like the fine point of
a needle that will force its way through where a
blunt thing cannot penetrate. Or, it is like the
strongly concentrated essence of a chemical sub-
stance, of which one drop is as powerful as one
pint of the original thing. Think of the concen-
trated power of a tiny drop of attar of roses — it
has within its tiny space the concentrated odor
of thousands of roses; one drop of it will make
a pint of extract, and a gallon of weaker per-
fumery! Think of the concentrated power in a
lightning flash, as contrasted with the same
amount of electricity diffused over a large area.
Or, think of the harmless flash of a small amount
of gunpowder ignited in the open air, as con-
trasted with the ignition of the same amount of
252 CLAIRVOYANCE
powder compelled to escape through the small
opening in the gun-barrel.
The occult teachings lay great stress upon this
power of mental concentration. All students of
the occult devote much time and care to the culti-
vation of the powers of concentration, and the
development of the ability to employ them. The
average person possesses but a very small amount
of concentration, and is able to concentrate his
mind for but a few moments at a time. The
trained thinker obtains much of his mental
power from his acquired ability to concentrate on
his task. The occultist trains himself in fixing
his concentrated attention upon the matter be-
fore him, so as to bring to a focal centre all of
his mental forces.
The mind is a very restless thing, and is in-
clined to dance from one thing to another, tiring
of each thing after a few moment's consideration
thereof. The average person allows his involun-
tary attention to rest upon every trifling thing,
and to be distracted by the idlest appeals to the
senses. He finds it most difficult to either shut
out these distracting appeals to the senses, and
equally hard to hold the attention to some unin-
teresting thing. His attention is almost free of
control by the will, and the person is a slave to
his perceptive powers and to his imagination, in-
stead of being a master of both.
The occultist, on the contrary, masters his at-
tention, and controls his imagination. He forces
the one to concentrate when he wishes it to do
so; and he compels the latter to form the mental
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 253
images he wishes to visualize. But this a far dif-
ferent thing from the self-hypnotization which
some persons imagine to be concentration. A
writer on the subject has well said : "The trained
occultist will concentrate upon a subject or object
with a wonderful intensity, seemingly completely
absorbed in the subject or object before him, and
oblivious to all else in the world. And yet, the
task accomplished, or the given time expired, he
will detach his mind from the object and will be
perfectly fresh, watchful and wide-awake to the
next matter before him. There is every difference
between being controlled by involuntary atten-
tion, which is species of self-hypnotization, and
the control of the attention, which is an evidence
of mastery." An eminent French psychologist
once said: "The authority of the attention is
subject to the superior authority of the Ego. I
yield it, or I withhold it, as I please. I direct it
in turn to several points. I concentrate it upon
each point, as long as my will can stand the
effort."
In an earlier lesson of this series, I have indi-
cated in a general way the methods whereby one
may develop and train his powers of concentra-
tion. There is no royal road to concentration; it
may be developed only by practice and exercise.
The secret consists in managing the attention, so
as to fix it upon a subject, no matter how un-
interesting; and to hold it there for a reasonable
length of time. Practice upon some disagreeable
study or other task is good exercise, for it serves
to train the will in spite of the influence of more
254 CLAIRVOYANCE
attractive objects or subjects. And this all serves
to train the will, remember; for the will is ac-
tively concerned in every act of voluntary atten-
tion. In fact, attention of this kind is one of the
most important and characteristic acts of the will.
So, as you see, in order to be successful in in-
fluencing the minds of others by means of mental
induction, you must first cultivate a strong feel-
ing of interest in the idea which you wish to in-
duce in the other person, or a strong desire to
produce the thing. Interest and desire consti-
tute the fire which generates the stream of will
from the water of mind, as some occultists have
stated it. Secondly, you must cultivate the
faculty of forming strong and clear mental
images of the idea or feeling you wish to so in-
duce; you must learn to actually "see" the thing
in your imagination, so as to give the idea
strength and clearness. Thirdly, you must learn
to concentrate your mind and attention upon the
idea or feeling, shutting out all other ideas and
feelings for the time being; thus you give con-
centrated force and power to the vibrations and
thought-forms which you are projecting.
These three principles underlie all of the many
forms of mental induction, or mental influence.
We find them in active operation in cases in
which the person is seeking to attract to himself
certain conditions, environment, persons, things,
or channels of expression, by setting into motion
the great laws of mental attraction. We see
them also employed when the person is endeavor-
ing to produce an effect upon the mind of some
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 255
particular person, or number of persons. We see
them in force in all cases of mental or psychic
healing, under whatever form it may be em-
ployed. In short, these are general principles,
and must therefore underlie all forms and phases
of mental or psychic influence. The sooner the
student realizes this fact, and the more actively
does he set himself to work in cultivating and
developing these principles within himself, the
more successful and efficient will he become in
this field of psychic research and investigation.
It is largely in the degree of the cultivation of
these three mental principles that the occultist is
distinguished from the ordinary man.
It may be that you are not desirous of culti-
vating or practicing the power of influencing
other persons psychically. Well, that is for you
to decide for yourself. At any rate, you will do
well to develop yourselves along these lines, at
least for self-protection. The cultivation of
these three mental principles will tend to make
you active and positive, psychically, as contrasted
with the passive, negative mental state of the
average person. By becoming mentally active
and positive you will be able to resist any psychic
influence that may be directed toward yourself,
and to surround yourself with a protective aura
of positive, active mental vibrations.
And, moreover, if you are desirous of pursuing
your investigations of psychic and astral phe-
nomena, you will find it of great importance to
cultivate and develop these three principles in
your mind. For, then you will be able to brush
256 CLAIRVOYANCE
aside all distracting influences, and to proceed at
once to the task before you, with power, clear-
ness and strength of purpose and method.
In the following chapters I shall give you a
more or less detailed presentation of the various
phases or forms of psychic influence. Some of
these may seem at first to be something inde-
pendent of the general principles. But I ask that
you carefully analyze all of these, so as to dis-
cover that the same fundamental principles are
under and back of each and every instance pre-
sented. When you once fully grasp this fact, and
perfect yourselves in the few fundamental princi-
ples, then you are well started on the road to
mastery of all the various phases of psychic phe-
nomena. Instead of puzzling your mind over a
hundred different phases of disconnected phe-
nomena, it is better to master the few actual ele-
mentary principles, and then reason deductively
from these to the various manifestation thereof.
Master the principles, and then learn to apply
them.
LESSON XVII.
PERSONAL PSYCHIC INFLUENCE OVER
OTHERS
Psychic Influence, as the term is used in this
book, may be said to be divided into three gen-
eral classes, viz., (1) Personal Influence, in which
the mind of another is directly influenced by in-
duction while he is in the presence of the person
influencing; (2) Distant Influencing, in which the
psychic induction is directly manifested when
the persons concerned are distant from one
another; and (3) Indirect Influence, in which the
induction is manifested in the minds of various
persons coming in contact with the thought vi-
brations of the person manifesting them, though
no attempt is made to directly influence any par-
ticular person. I shall now present each of these
three forms of psychic influence to you for con-
sideration, one after the other in the above order.
Personal Influence, as above defined, ranges
from cases in which the strongest control (gen-
erally known as hypnotism) is manifested, down
to the cases in which merely a slight influence is
exerted. But the general principle underlying all
of these cases is precisely the same. The great
characters of history, such as Alexander the
Great, Napoleon Bonaparte, and Julius Caesar,
manifested this power to a great degree, and
were able to sway men according to their will.
All great leaders of men have this power strongly
manifested, else they would not be able to influ-
258 CLAIRVOYANCE
ence the minds of men. Great orators, preachers,
statesmen, and others of this class, likewise mani-
fest the power strongly. In fact, the very sign of
ability to influence and manage other persons is
evidence of the possession and manifestation of
this mighty power.
In developing this power to influence others
directly and personally, you should begin by im-
pressing upon your mind the principles stated in
the preceding chapter, namely (1) Strong De-
sire; (2) Clear Visualization; and (3) Concen-
tration.
You must begin by encouraging a strong de-
sire in your mind to be a positive individual; to
exert and manifest a positive influence over
others with whom you come in contact, and
especially over those whom you wish to influence
in some particular manner or direction. You
must let the fire of desire burn fiercely within
you, until it becomes as strong as physical hunger
or thirst. You must "want to" as you want to
breathe, to live. You will find that the men who
accomplish the great things in life are those who
have strong desire burning in their bosoms.
There is a strong radiative and inductive power
in strong desire and wish — in fact, some have
thought this the main feature of what we gener-
ally call strong will-power.
The next step, of course, is the forming of a
clear, positive, distinct and dynamic mental pic-
ture of the idea or feeling that you wish to induce
in the other person. If it is an idea, you should
make a strong clear picture of it in your imagina-
PERSONAL PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 259
tion, so as to give it distinctness and force and a
clear outline. If it is a feeling, you should picture
it in your imagination. If it is something that
you wish the other person to do, or some way in
which you wish him to act, you should picture
him as doing the thing, or acting in that particu-
lar way. By so doing you furnish the pattern or
design for the induced mental or emotional states
you wish to induce in the other person. Upon
the clearness and strength of these mental pat-
terns of the imagination depends largely the
power of the induced impression.
The third step, of course, is the concentration
of your mind upon the impression you wish to in-
duce in the mind of the other person. You must
learn to concentrate so forcibly and clearly that
the idea will stand out clearly in your mind like a
bright star of a dark night, except that there
must be only one star instead of thousands. By
so doing you really focus the entire force of your
mental and psychic energies into that one par-
ticular idea or thought. This makes it act like
the focused rays in the sun-glass, or like the
strong pipe-stream of water that will break
down the thing upon which it is turned. Diffused
thought has but a comparatively weak effect,
whereas a concentrated stream of thought vibra-
tions will force its way through obstacles.
Remember, always, this threefold mental con^
dition: (1) STRONG DESIRE; (2) CLEAR
MENTAL PICTURE; and (3) CONCEN-
TRATED THOUGHT. The greater the degree
in which you can manifest these three mental
260 CLAIRVOYANCE
conditions, the greater will be your success in any
form of psychic influence, direct or indirect, per-
sonal or general, present or distant.
Before you proceed to develop the power to
impress a particular idea or feeling upon the mind
of another person, you should first acquire a posi-
tive mental atmosphere for yourself. This men-
tal atmosphere is produced in precisely the same
way that you induce a special idea or feeling in
the mind of the other person. That is to say, you
first strongly desire it, then you clearly picture it,
and then you apply concentrated thought upon it.
I will assume that you are filled with the strong
desire for a positive mental atmosphere around
you. You want this very much indeed, and actu-
ally crave and hunger for it. Then you must be-
gin to picture yourself (in your imagination) as
surrounded with an aura of positive thought-
vibrations which protect you from the thought
forces of other persons, and, at the same time
impress the strength of your personality upon
the persons with whom you come in contact.
You will be aided in making these strong mental
pictures by holding the idea in your concentrated
thought, and, at the same time, silently stating
to your mind just what you expect to do in the
desired direction. In stating your orders to your
mind, always speak as if the thing were already
accomplished at that particular moment. Never
say that it "will be," but always hold fast to the
"it is." The following will give you a good ex-
ample of the mental statements, which of course
should be accompanied by the concentrated idea
PERSONAL PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 261
of the thing, and the mental picture of yourself
as being just what you state.
Here is the mental statement for the creation
of a strong, positive psychic atmosphere: "I am
surrounded by an aura of strong, positive, dyna-
mic thought-vibrations. These render me posi-
tive to other persons, and render them negative
to me. I am positive of their thought-vibrations,
but they are negative to mine. They feel the
strength of my psychic atmosphere, while I easily
repel the power of theirs. I dominate the situa-
tion, and manifest my positive psychic qualities
over theirs. My atmosphere creates the vibra-
tion of strength and power on all sides of me,
which affect others with whom I come in contact.
MY PSYCHIC ATMOSPHERE IS STRONG
AND POSITIVE!"
The next step in Personal Influence is that of
projecting your psychic power directly upon and
into the mind of the other person whom you wish
to influence. Sometimes, if the person is quite
negative to you, this is a very simple and easy
matter; but where the person is near your own
degree of psychic positiveness you will have to
assert your psychic superiority to him, and get
the psychic "upper hand" before you can proceed
further. This is accomplished by throwing into
your psychic atmosphere some particularly
strong mental statements accompanied by clear
visualizations or mental pictures.
Make positive your psychic atmosphere, par-
ticularly towards the person whom you seek to
influence, by statements and pictures something
262 CLAIRVOYANCE
along the following lines: "I am positive to this
man"; "He is negative to me"; "He feels my
power and is beginning to yield to it"; "He is un-
able to influence me in the slightest, while I can
influence him easily"; "My power is beginning to
operate upon his mind and feelings." The exact
words are not important, but the idea behind
them gives them their psychic force and power.
Then should you begin your direct attack upon
him, or rather upon his psychic powers. When I
say "attack," I do not use the word in the sense
of warfare or actual desire to harm the other per-
son— this is a far different matter. What I mean
to say is that there is usually a psychic battle for
a longer or shorter period between two persons
of similar degrees of psychic power and develop-
ment. From this battle one always emerges vic-
tor at the time, and one always is beaten for the
time being, at least. And, as in all battles, vic-
tory often goes to him who strikes the first hard
blow. The offensive tactics are the best in cases
of this kind.
A celebrated American author, Oliver Wendall
Holmes, in one of his books makes mention of
these duels of psychic force between individuals,
as follows: "There is that deadly Indian hug in
which men wrestle with their eyes, over in five
seconds, but which breaks one of their two backs,
and is good for three-score years and ten, one
trial enough — settles the whole matter — just as
when two feathered songsters of the barnyard,
game and dunghill, come together. After a jump
or two, and a few sharp kicks, there is an end to
PERSONAL PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 263
it; and it is 'After you, monsieur' with the beaten
party in all the social relations for all the rest of
his days."
An English physician, Dr. Fothergill by name,
wrote a number of years ago about this struggle
of wills, as he called it, but which is really a
struggle of psychic power. He says: "The con-
flict of will, the power to command others, has
been spoken of frequently. Yet what is this will-
power that influences others? What is it that
makes us accept, and adopt too, the advice of one
person, while precisely the same advice from
another has been rejected? Is it the weight of
force of will which insensibly influences us; the
force of will behind the advice? That is what
it is! The person who thus forces his or her ad-
vice upon us has no more power to enforce it
than others; but all the same we do as requested.
We accept from one what we reject from another.
One person says of something contemplated, 'Oh,
but you must not/ yet we do it all the same,
though that person may be in a position to make
us regret the rejection of that counsel. Another
person says, 'Oh, but you mustn't,' and we desist,
though we may, if so disposed, set this latter per-
son's opinion at defiance with impunity. It is not
the fear of consequences, nor of giving offense,
which determines the adoption of the latter per-
son's advice, while it has been rejected when
given by the first. It depends upon the character
or will-power of the individual advising whether
we accept the advice or reject it. This character
often depends little, if at all, in some cases, upon
264 CLAIRVOYANCE
the intellect, or even upon the moral qualities, the
goodness or badness, of the individual. It is itself
an imponderable something; yet it carries weight
with it. There may be abler men, cleverer men;
but it is the one possessed of will who rises to
the surface at these times — the one who can by
some subtle power make other men obey him.
"The will-power goes on universally. In the
young aristocrat who gets his tailor to make
another advance in defiance of his conviction that
he will never get his money back. It goes on be-
tween lawyer and client; betwixt doctor and
patient; between banker and borrower; betwixt
buyer and seller. It is not tact which enables the
person behind the counter to induce customers to
buy what they did not intend to buy, and which
bought, gives them no satisfaction, though it is
linked therewith for the effort to be successful.
Whenever two persons meet in business, or in
any other relation in life, up to love-making,
there is this will-fight going on, commonly
enough without any consciousness of the strug-
gle. There is a dim consciousness of the result,
but none of the processes. It often takes years
of the intimacy of married life to find out with
whom of the pair the mastery really lies. Often
the far stronger character, to all appearances, has
to yield; it is this will-element which underlies
the statement: 'The race is not always to the
swift, nor the battle to the strong/ In 'Middle-
march' we find in Lydgate a grand aggregation
of qualities, yet shallow, hard, selfish Rosamond
masters him thoroughly in the end. He was not
PERSONAL PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 265
deficient in will-power; possessed more than an
average amount of character; but in the fight he
went down at last under the onslaught of the in-
tense, stubborn will of his narrow-minded spouse.
Their will-contest was the collision of a large
warm nature, like a capable human hand, with a
hard, narrow selfish nature, like a steel button;
the hand only bruised itself while the button re-
mained unaffected."
You must not, however, imagine that every
person with whom you engage in one of these
psychic duels is conscious of what is going on.
He usually recognizes that some sort of conflict
is under way, but he does not know the laws and
principles of psychic force, and so is in the dark
regarding the procedure. You will find that a
little practice of this kind, in which no great
question is involved, will give you a certain knack
or trick of handling your psychic forces, and will,
besides, give you that confidence in yourself that
comes only from actual practice and exercise. I
can point out the rules, and give you the princi-
ples, but you must learn the little bits of tech-
nique yourself from actual practice.
When you have crossed psychic swords with
the other person, gaze at him intently but not
fiercely, and send him this positive strong
thought-vibration : "I am stronger than you, and
I shall win!" At the same time picture to your-
self your forces beating down his and overcoming
him. Hold this idea and picture in your mind;
"My vibrations are stronger than are yours — 1
am beating you!" Follow this up with the idea
266 CLAIRVOYANCE
and picture of: "You are weakening and giving
in — you are being overpowered !" A very power-
ful psychic weapon is the following: "My vibra-
tions are scattering your forces — I am breaking
your forces into bits — surrender, surrender now,
I tell you!"
And now for some interesting and very valu-
able information concerning psychic defense.
You will notice that in the offensive psychic
weapons there is always an assertion of positive
statement of your power and its effect. Well,
then, in using the psychic defensive weapon
against one of strong will or psychic force, you
reverse the process. That is to say you deny the
force of his psychic powers and forces, and pic-
ture them as melting into nothingness. Get this
idea well fixed in your mind, for it is very import-
ant in a conflict of this kind. The effect of this
is to neutralize all of the other person's power so
far as its effect on yourself is concerned — yon
really do not destroy it in him totally. You
simply render his forces powerless to affect you.
This is important not only when in a psychic con-
flict of this kind, but also when you wish to ren-
der yourself immune from the psychic forces of
other persons. You may shut yourself up in a
strong defensive armor in this way, and others
will be powerless to affect you.
In the positive statement, "I deny!" you have
the Occult Shield of Defense, which is a mighty
protection to you. Even if you do not feel dis-
posed to cultivate and develop your psychic pow-
ers in the direction of influencing others, you
PERSONAL PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 267
should at least develop your defensive powers so
as to resist any psychic attacks upon yourself.
You will find it helpful to practice these of-
fensive and defensive weapons when you are
alone, standing before your mirror and "playing"
that your reflection in the glass is the other per-
son. Send this imaginary other person the
psychic vibrations, accompanied by the mental
picture suitable for it. Act the part out seriously
and earnestly, just as if the reflected image were
really another person. This will give you confi-
dence in yourself, and that indefinable "knack"
of handling your psychic weapons that comes
only from practice. You will do well to perfect
yourself in these rehearsals, just as you would in
case you were trying to master anything else. By
frequent earnest rehearsals, you will gain not
only familiarity with the process and methods,
but you will also gain real power and strength by
the exercise of your psychic faculties which have
heretofore lain dormant. Just as you may de-
velop the muscle of your arm by calisthentic exer-
cises, until it is able to perform real muscular
work of strength; so you may develop your psy-
chic faculties in this rehearsal work, so that you
will be strongly equipped and armed for an actual
psychic conflict, besides having learned how to
handle your psychic weapons.
After you have practiced sufficiently along the
general offensive and defensive lines, and have
learned how to manifest these forces in actual
conflict, you will do well to practice special and
specific commands to others, in the same way.
268 CLAIRVOYANCE
That is to say, practice them first on your re-
flected image in the mirror. The following com-
mands (with mental pictures, of course) will give
you good practice. Go about the work in earnest,
and act out the part seriously. Try these exer-
cises: "Here! look at me!" "Give me your un-
divided attention!" "Come this way!" "Come
to me at once!" "Go away from me — leave me
at once!" "You like me — you like me very
much!" "You are afraid of me !" "You wish to
please me !" "You will agree to my proposition !"
"You will do as I tell you!" Any special com-
mand you wish to convey to another person,
psychically, you will do well to practice before
the mirror in this way.
When you have made satisfactory progress in
the exercises above mentioned, and are able to
demonstrate them with a fair degree of success
in actual practice, you may proceed to experiment
with persons along the lines of special and direct
commands by psychic force. The following will
give you a clear idea of the nature of the experi-
ments in question, but you may enlarge upon and
vary them indefinitely. Remember there is no
virtue in mere words — the effect comes from the
power of the thought behind the words. But,
nevertheless, you will find that positive words,
used in these silent commands, will help you to
fit in your feeling to the words. Always make
the command a real COMMAND, never a mere
entreaty or appeal. Assume the mental attitude
of a master of men — of a commander and ruler of
other men. Here follow a number of interesting
PERSONAL PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 269
experiments along these lines, which will be very-
useful to you in acquiring the art of personal
influence of this kind :
SEVEN VALUABLE EXERCISES
Exercise 1: When walking down the street
behind a person, make him turn around in. answer
to your mental command. Select some person
who does not seem to be too much rushed or too
busy — select some person who seems to having
nothing particular on his mind. Then desire
earnestly that he shall turn around when you
mentally call to him to do so; at the same time
picture him as turning around in answer to your
call ; and at the same time concentrate your atten-
tion and thought firmly upon him. After a few
moments of preparatory thought, send him the
following message, silently of course, with as
much force, positiveness and vigor as possible:
"Hey there! turn around and look at me! Hey!
turn around, turn around at once!" While in-
fluencing him fix your gaze at the point on his
neck where the skull joins it — right at the base of
the brain, in the back. In a number of cases, you
will find that the person will look around as if
someone had actually called him aloud. In other
cases, he will seem puzzled, and will look from
side to side as if seeking some one. After a little
practice you will be surprised how many persons
you can affect in this way.
Exercise 2: When in a public place, such as a
church, concert or theatre, send a similar mes-
sage to someone seated a little distance in front
270 CLAIRVOYANCE
of you. Use the same methods as in the first
exercise, and you will obtain similar results. It
will seem queer to you at first to notice how the
other person will begin to fidget and move
around in his seat, and finally glance furtively
around as if to see what is causing him the dis-
turbance. You, of course, will not let him sus-
pect that it is you, but, instead will gaze calmly
ahead of you, and pretend not to notice him.
Exercise 3: This is a variation of the first
exercise. It is practiced by sending to a person
approaching you on the street, or walking ahead
of you in the same direction, a command to turn
to the right, or to the left, as you prefer. You
will be surprised to see how often you will be suc-
cessful in this.
Exercise 4: This is a variation of the second
exercise. It is practiced by sending to a person
seated in front of you in a public place the com-
mand to look to the right, or to the left, as you
prefer. Do not practice on the same person too
long, after succeeding at first — it is not right to
torment people, remember.
Exercise 5 : After having attained proficiency
in the foregoing exercises, you many proceed to
command a person to perform certain unimport-
ant motions, such as rising or sitting down,
taking off his hat, taking out his handkerchief,
laying down a fan, umbrella, etc.
Exercise 6: The next step is to command per-
sons to say some particular word having no im-
portant meaning; to "put words in his mouth"
PERSONAL PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 271
while talking to him. Wait until the other per-
son pauses as if in search of a word, and then
suddenly, sharply and forcibly put the word into
his mouth, silently of course. In a very suscep-
tible person, well under your psychic control, you
may succeed in suggesting entire sentences and
phrases to him.
Exercise 7: This is the summit of psychic in-
fluencing, and, of course, is the most difficult.
But you will be surprised to see how well you will
succeed in many cases, after you have acquired
the knack and habit of sending the psychic mes-
sage. It consists of commanding the person to
obey the spoken command or request that you are
about to make to him. This is the art and secret
of the success of many salesmen, solicitors, and
others working along the lines of influencing
other people. It is acquired by beginning with
small things, and gradually proceeding to
greater, and still greater. At this point I should
warn you that all the best occult teachings warn
students against using this power for base ends,
improper purposes, etc. Such practices tend to
react and rebound against the person using them,
like a boomerang. Beware against using psychic
or occult forces for improper purposes — the
psychic laws punish the offender, just as do the
physical laws.
Finally, I caution the student against talking
too much about his developing powers. Beware
of boasting or bragging about these things.
Keep silent, and keep your own counsel. When
you make known your powers, you set into opera-
272 CLAIRVOYANCE
tion the adverse and antagonistic thought of per-
sons around you who may be jealous of you, and
who would wish to see you fail, or make yourself
ridiculous. The wise head keepeth a still tongue !
One of the oldest occult maxims is: "Learn!
Dare! Do! Keep Silent!!!" You will do well to
adhere strictly to this warning caution.
LESSON XVIII.
PSYCHIC INFLUENCE AT A DISTANCE
The second phase of Psychic Influence is that
called Distant Psychic Influence, in which
psychic induction is manifested when the persons
are distant in space from one another — not in the
presence of each other. Here, of course, we see
the principle of telepathy involved in connection
with the process of mental induction ; and in some
cases even the astral telepathic sense is called
into operation.
The student who has followed my explanation
and course of reasoning in the preceding lessons
will readily perceive that the principle involved
in this distant phase of psychic influence is pre-
cisely the same as that employed in direct per-
sonal psychic influence. As I have explained in
an early lesson, it matters little whether the space
to be covered by the psychic vibratory waves is
but one foot or a thousand miles, the principle is
exactly the same. There are, of course, other
principles involved in the case of two persons
meeting face to face and calling into force their
psychic powers; for instance, there is the element
of suggestion and association, and other psycho-
logical principles which are not in force when the
two persons are out of the actual presence of each
other. But so far as the telepathic or astral
psychic powers are concerned, the mere exten-
sion of space does not change the principle.
The student who has developed his power of
274 CLAIRVOYANCE
psychic induction in the phases mentioned in the
preceding chapter, may begin to experiment and
practice psychic induction at long-range, if he
so wishes. That is to say, instead of causing
psychic induction in the minds of persons actu-
ally in his presence and sight, he may produce
similar results in persons out of his sight and
presence. The person may be brought into pres-
ence and psychic contact, for all practical pur-
poses, by using the visualizing powers for the
purpose of bringing him into the en rapport con-
dition. That is to say, by using the imagination
to bring into the mind a strong clear picture of
the other person, you may induce an en rapport
condition in which he will be practically in the
same psychic relation to you as if he were
actually before you. Of course, if he is sufficiently
well informed regarding occult matters, he may
shut you out by drawing a psychic circle around
himself which you cannot penetrate, or by sur-
rounding himself with psychic armor or atmos-
phere such as I have already mentioned in pre-
ceding lessons. But as he will not likely know
anything of this, the average person may be
reached in the manner just mentioned.
Or again, you may establish en rapport condi-
tions by psychometric methods, by holding to
your forehead an article which has been in the
other person's possession for some time; an
article worn by him; a piece of his hair; etc. Or,
again, you may use the crystal to bring up his
astral vision before you. Or, again, you may
erect an "astral tube" such as I will mention a
DISTANT PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 275
little further on in this chapter, and thus establish
a strong en rapport condition.
Having established the en rapport condition
with the other person, and having thus practi-
cally brought him into your presence, psychically
speaking, you may proceed to send him com-
mands or demands, just as you did in the phase
of personal psychic influence previously men-
tioned. You act precisely as if the other person
were present before you, and state your com-
mands or demands to him just as you would were
he seated or standing in your presence. This is
the keynote of the whole thing; the rest is simply
an elaboration and stating of details of methods,
etc. With the correct principle once established,
you may apply the same according to your own
wishes and discretion.
This phase of distant psychic influence is at the
bottom of all the wonderful tales, stories and
legends of supernatural powers, witchcraft,
sorcery, etc., with which the pages of history are
filled. There is of course always to be found
much distortion and exaggeration in these
legends and tales, but they have truth at the bot-
tom of them. In this connection, let me call your
attention to a very important psychic principle
involved. I have told you that by denying the
power of any person over you, you practically
neutralize his psychic power — the stronger and
more positive your belief in your immunity, and
your denial of his power over you, the more do
you rob him of any such power. The average
person, not knowing this, is more or less passive
276 CLAIRVOYANCE
to psychic influences of other persons, and may
be affected by them to a greater or less extent,
depending upon the psychic development of the
person seeking to influence him. At the extreme
of the sensitive pole of psychic influence, we find
those persons who believe firmly that the other
person has power over them, and who are more
or less afraid of him. This belief and fear acts
to make them particularly sensitive and impres-
sionable, and easily affected by his psychic induc-
tion. This is the reason that the so-called witches
and sorcerers and others of evil repute have been
able to acquire such a power over their victims,
and to cause so much trouble. The secret is that
the victims believed in the power of the other per-
son, and feared their power. The greater the be-
lief in, and fear of, the power of the person, the
greater the susceptibility to his influence; the
greater the sense of power of neutralizing the
power, and the disbelief in his power to affect
them, the greater the degree of immunity: this is
the rule!
Accordingly we find that persons in various
stages of the history of the world have been af-
fected by the influences of witches, sorcerers, and
other unprincipled persons. In most cases these
so-called witches and sorcerers themselves were
under the delusion that they were assisted by the
devil or some other supernatural being. They
did not realize that they were simply using per-
fectly natural methods, and employing perfectly
natural forces. For that matter, you must re-
member that magnetism and electricity, in
DISTANT PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 277
ancient days, were considered as supernatural
forces in some way connected with demonic
powers.
Studying the history of witchcraft, sorcery,
black-magic, and the like, you will find that the
devotees thereof usually employed some psycho-
metric method. In other cases they would mould
little figures of clay, or of wax, in the general
shape and appearance of the person whom they
wished to affect. It was thought that these little
figures were endowed with some supernatural
powers or attributes, but of course this was mere
superstition. The whole power of these little
figures arose from the fact that they aided the
imagination of the spell-worker in forming a
mental image of the person sought to be influ-
enced; and thus established a strong en rapport
condition. Added to this, you must remember
that the fear and belief of the public greatly aided
the spell-worker and increased his power and in-
fluence over these poor persons.
I will give you a typical case, taken from an old
German book, which thoroughly illustrates the
principles involved in cases of this kind. Under-
stand this case, and you will have the secret and
working principle of them all. The story is told
by an eminent German physician of the last cen-
tury. He relates that he was consulted by one of
his patients, a wealthy farmer living near by.
The farmer complained that he was disturbed
every night by strange noises which sounded like
someone pounding iron. The disturbances oc-
curred between the hours of ten o'clock and mid-
278 CLAIRVOYANCE
night, each and every night. The physician asked
him if he suspected anyone of causing the strange
trouble. The farmer answered that he suspected
an old enemy of his, an old village blacksmith
living several miles away from his farm. It ap-
pears that an old long-standing feud between
them had broken out afresh, and that the black-
smith had made threats of employing his "hex"
(witchcraft) powers on the old farmer. The
blacksmith was reputed to be a sort of "hex" or
male-witch, and the farmer believed in his dia-
bolic powers and was very much in fear of them.
So you see the ideal condition for psychic recep-
tivity was present.
The physician called on the blacksmith, and
taking him by surprise, gazing sternly into his
eyes and asked him: "What do you do every
night between ten and twelve o'clock?" The
blacksmith, frightened and disturbed, stammered
out : "I hammer a bar of iron every night at that
time, and all the while I think intently "of a bad
neighbor of mine who once cheated me out of
some money; and I 'will* at the same time that
the noise will disturb his rest, until he will pay
me back my money to get peace and quiet." The
physician bade him to desist from his evil prac-
tices, under threats of dire punishment ; and then
went to the farmer and made him straighten out
the financial dispute between the two. There-
after, there was no more trouble.
So you see in this case all the necessary ele-
ments were present. First there was the belief
of the blacksmith in his own powers — this gave
DISTANT PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 279
him self-confidence and psychic power. Then
there was the belief and fear on the part of the
farmer — this made him an easy subject, and very
susceptible to psychic induction, etc. Then there
was the action of the blacksmith beating the iron
— this gave force and clearness to his visualiza-
tion of the idea he wished to induce in the mind
of the other. And, finally, there was his will em-
ployed in every stroke, going out in the direction
of the concentrated wish and purpose of influ-
encing the farmer. You see, then, that every
psychic element was present. It was no wonder
that the old farmer was disturbed.
Among the negroes of the South, in America;
and among the Hawaiians; we find marked in-
stances of this kind. The negro Voodoo men and
women work black magic on those of their race
who are supersitious and credulous, and who
have a mortal fear of the Voodoo. You see the
conditions obtained are much the same as in the
case of the German case just cited. Travellers
who have visited the countries in which there is
a large negro population, have many interesting
tales to recite of the terrible workings of these
Voodoo black magicians. In some cases, sick-
ness and even death is the result. But, mark you
this! it is only those who believe in, and fear, the
power of the Voodoos that are affected. In Ha-
waii, the Kahunas or native magicians are re-
nowned for their power to cause sickness and
death to those who have offended them; or to
those who have offended some client of the Ka-
huna, and who have hired the latter to "pray" the
280 CLAIRVOYANCE
enemy to sickness or death. The poor ignorant
Hawaiians, believing implicitly in the power of
the Kahunas, and being in deadly fear of them,
are very susceptible to their psychic influence,
and naturally fall easy victims, unless they buy of
the Kahuna, or make peace with his client. White
persons living in Hawaii are not affected by the
Kahunas, for they do not believe in them, neither
do they fear them. Unconsciously, but still
strongly, they deny the power, and are immune.
So, you see, the principle working out here, also.
Once you have the master-key, you may unlock
many doors of mystery which have heretofore
been closed to you.
We do not have to fall back on cases of witch-
craft, however, in order to illustrate this phase of
the use of psychic influence for selfish ends. In
Europe and America there are teachers of a low
form of occultism who instruct their pupils in the
art of producing induced mental states in the
minds of others, for purposes of financial gain or
other selfish ends. For instance, there is a West-
ern teacher who instructs his pupils to induce de-
sired mental states in prospective customers, or
others whom they may wish to influence for
selfish reasons. This teacher tells his pupils to:
"Imagine your prospective customer, or other
person, as seated in a chair before which you are
standing. Make the imagined picture as strong
as possible, for upon this depends your success.
Then proceed to 'treat* this person just as if he
were actually present. Concentrate your will
upon him, and tell him what you expect to tell
DISTANT PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 281
him when you meet him. Use all of the argu-
ments that you can think of, and at the same time
hold the thought that he must do as you say. Try
to imagine him as complying with your wishes
in every respect, for this imagining will tend to
'come true' when you really meet the person.
This rule may be used, not only in the case of
prospective customers, but also in the case of
persons whom you wish to influence in any way
whatsoever." Surely this is a case of employing
psychic powers for selfish purposes, if anything
is.
Again, in Europe and America, particularly in
the latter country, we find many persons who
have picked up a smattering of occult knowledge
by means of some of the many healing cults and
organizations which teach the power of thought
over physical diseases. In the instruction along
the lines of distant mental healing, the student is
taught to visualize the patient as strongly and
clearly as possible, and to then proceed to make
statements of health and strength. The mind of
the patient, and that of the healer, co-operate
and in many cases work wonderful cures. As
you will see in the last lesson of this course, there
is great power in the mind to induce healthful
vibrations in the mind of others, and the work is
a good and worthy one. But, alas ! as is so often
the case, the good teaching is sometimes per-
verted, and applied for unworthy and selfish ends.
Some of the persons who have picked up the prin-
ciples of mental healing have discovered that the
same power may be used in a bad as well as in a
282 CLAIRVOYANCE
good direction. They accordingly, proceed to
"treat" other persons with the object of persuad-
ing them to do things calculated to benefit the
person using the psychic power. They seek to
get these other persons under their psychic in-
fluence, and to then take advantage of them in
some way or other.
I hope that it is practically unnecessary for me
to warn my students against evil practices of this
kind — I trust that I have not drawn any stud-
ents of this class to me. In case, however, that
some of you may have been, or may be in the
future, tempted to use your psychic powers im-
properly, in this way, I wish to caution and warn
you positively against so doing. Outside of the
ordinary morality which should prevent you from
taking advantage of another person in this way,
I wish to say to you that anyone so misusing
psychic or astral powers will inevitably bring
down upon his head, sooner or later, certain oc-
cult astral forces which will prove disastrous to
him. He will become involved in the web of his
own making, and will suffer greatly. Never by
any means allow yourself to be tempted into in-
dulging in any of the practices of Black Magic,
under any form of disguise. You will live to re-
gret it if you do. Employ your powers, when
you develop them, for the good of others; or at
least, for purely scientific investigation and
knowledge.
The scientific investigator of this phase of
psychic influence, will wish to become acquainted
with what the occultists call "the astral tube."
DISTANT PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 283
In this phase of the phenomena, you manifest
upon the astral plane, rather than upon the phys-
ical. The astral form of telepathy is manifested,
rather than the ordinary form. While there are
a number of technical points involved in the prod-
uction of the astral tube, I shall endeavor to in-
struct you regarding its creation and use in as
plain words as possible, omitting all reference
to technical occult details which would only serve
to distract your attention and confuse your mind.
The advanced occult student will understand
these omitted technicalities without being told
of them; the others would not know what was
meant by them, if mentioned, in the absence of
a long stage of preparatory teaching. After all,
the theory is not of so much importance to most
of you as are the practical working principles.
I ask your careful attention to what I have to say
in this subject of the astral tube.
The Astral Tube is formed by the person form-
ing in his imagination (i. e., on the astral plane
by means of his imagination or visualizing pow-
ers), a tube or small tunnel between himself and
the person whom he wishes to influence. He
starts by picturing it in his mind a whirling
vortex, similar to the whirling ring of smoke
emitted from a "coughing" engine, and some-
times by a man smoking a cigar, about six inches
to one foot in diameter. He must will the imag-
ined vortex-ring to move forward as if it were
actually boring a tunnel through the atmosphere.
When the knack of producing this astral tube is
acquired, it will be found that the visualized tun-
284 CLAIRVOYANCE
nel seems to vibrate with a peculiar intensity,
and will seem to be composed of a substance
far more subtle than air. Then, at the other
end of this astral tube you must picture the
other person, the one whom you wish to in-
fluence. The person will seem as if viewed
through the wrong end of an opera-glass. When
this condition is gained, there will be found to be
a high degree of en rapport between yourself and
the other person. The secret consists in the fact
that you have really established a form of clair-
voyance between yourself and the person. When
you have induced this condition, proceed with
your mental commands and pictures just as if
you were in the presence of the person himself.
That is the whole thing in a nutshell.
In order that you may have another viewpoint
from which to consider the astral tube, or what
corresponds to it, I wish to give you here a little
quotation from another writer on the subject,
who presents the matter from a somewhat more
technical standpoint. Read this quotation in
connection with my own description of the astral
tube, and you will form a pretty complete and
clear idea of the phenomenon. The writer men-
tioned says : "It is impossible here to give an ex-
haustive disquisition on astral physics; all I need
say is that it is possible to make in the astral
substance a definite connecting-line that shall act
as a telegraph wire to convey vibrations by means
of which all that is going on at the other end of
it may be seen. Such a line is established, be it
understood, not by a direct projection through
DISTANT PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 285
space of astral matter, but by such action upon a
line (or rather many lines) of particles of that
substance as will render them capable of forming
a conductor for vibrations of the character re-
quired. This preliminary action can be set up
in two ways — either by the transmission of
energy from particle to particle, until the line is
formed, or by the use of a force from a higher
plane which is capable of acting upon the whole
line simultaneously. Of course this latter method
implies far greater development, since it involves
the knowledge of (and the power to use) forces
of a considerably higher level.
"Even the simpler and purely astral operation
is a difficult one to describe, though quite an
easy one to perform. It may be said to partake
somewhat of the nature of the magnetization of
a bar of steel; for it consists in what we might
call the polarization, by an effort of the human
will, of a number of astral atoms reaching from
the operator to the scene which he wishes to ob-
serve. All the atoms thus affected are held for
the time being with their axes rigidly parallel to
one another, so that they form a kind of tempo-
rary tube along which the clairvoyant may look.
This method has the disadvantage that the tele-
graph line is liable to disarrangement or even
destruction by any sufficiently strong astral cur-
rent which happens to cross its path; but if the
original creative effort were fairly definite, this
would be a contingency of only infrequent occur-
rence. The view of a distant scene obtained by
means of this 'astral current' is in many ways
286 CLAIRVOYANCE
not unlike that seen through a telescope. Human
figures usually appear very small, like those on a
distant stage, but in spite of their diminutive size
they are as clear as though they were close by.
Sometimes it is possible by this means to hear
what is said as well as to see what is done; but
as in the majority of cases this does not happen,
we must consider it rather as the manifestation
of an additional power than as a necessary corol-
lary of the faculty of sight."
I would feel that I had not done my whole duty
to the student, or reader of this book, were I to
conclude this chapter without pointing out a
means of protection against the use of this phase
of psychic influence against them on the part
of some unscrupulous person; or for that matter,
against the meddling influence of any person
whatsoever, for any purpose whatsoever, with-
out one's permission and consent. Therefore, I
wish now to point out the general principles of
self-protection or defense against this class of
psychic influence.
In the first place, you must, of course, refuse to
admit to your mind any feeling of fear regarding
the influence of other persons — for that is the
open door to their influence, as I have pointed
out to you. If you have been, or are fearful of
any persons psychic influence, you must get to
work and drive out that feeling by positive and
vigorous denials. The denial, you remember, is
the positive neutralizer of the psychic influence
of another person, providing you make it in full
belief of its truth. You must take the position
DISTANT PSYCHIC INFLUENCE 287
(which is a true one) that you are immune to the
psychic attack or influence. You should say,
mentally, "I deny to any person the power to in-
fluence me psychically without my consent; I
am positive to all such influences, and they are
negative to me; I neutralize them by this
denial!"
If you feel sudden impulses to act in some way
which you have not thought of doing, or toward
which you have had an aversion, pause a moment
and say, mentally, "If this is an outside influence,
I deny its power over me; I deny it, and send it
back to its sender, to his defeat and confusion."
You will then experience a feeling of relief and
freedom. In such cases you may frequently be
approached later on by the person who would
have been most benefitted by your action; he will
appear surprised when you "turn him down,"
and will act in a confused way. He may not have
consciously tried to influence you, but may have
merely been wishing strongly that you would do
as he desired.
It should encourage you to know that it re-
quires much less force to repel and neutralize
psychic influence of this kind, than is required to
send forth the power; an ounce of denial and pro-
tection overcomes a pound of psychic attacking
power. Nature gives you the means of protec-
tion, and gives you "the best end of the stick,"
and it is your own fault if you do not effectively
use it. A word to the wise is sufficient.
LESSON XIX.
LAWS OF PSYCHIC ATTRACTION
The third phase of Psychic Influence is that
which may be called Indirect Psychic Influence,
in which psychic induction is manifested in the
minds of other persons coming in contact with
the thought vibrations of the person manifest-
ing them, although no deliberate attempt is made
to influence the mind of any particular person or
persons. Closely connected with and involved in
this phase of psychic influence, is that which is
called the Psychic Law of Attraction. So closely
are these two connected that I shall consider
them together in this lesson.
The fundamental principle of this phase of
psychic influence is the well-known psychic fact
that mental and emotional states not only induce
similar vibrations in those who are similar at-
tuned on the psychic vibratory scale, but also
tend to attract and draw to the person other per-
sons who are vibrating along similar lines, and
also tend to repel those who are vibrating in an
opposing note or scale of psychic vibration.
In the preceding lessons I have shown you how
by induction we tend to arouse in others mental
and emotional states similar to our own. But
there is a law in effect here, which must be noted
if you wish to thoroughly understand this phase
of psychic influence. Omitting all technical ex-
planations, and getting right down to the heart
of the phenomenon, I would say that the general
LAWS OF PSYCHIC ATTRACTION 289
principle is this: Psychic induction is difficult
in proportion to the opposing quality of the char-
acteristic mental and emotional states of the per-
son affected; and easy in proportion to the har-
monious quality thereof. That is to say, in plain
words, that if a person's habitual thought and
emotions are along the same lines that you are
trying to induce in him, you will find it easy
to induce the same in him; if, on the contrary,
they are of an opposing nature, then you will find
it difficult to so influence him. The many de-
grees of agreement and difference in the psychic
vibrations of persons constitute a scale of com-
parative response to any particular form of men-
tal or emotional vibrations.
It is hard to change the spots of a leopard, or
the skin of an Ethiopian, as we are told on
ancient authority. It is almost as difficult to
change the characteristic mental and emotional
states of a person by psychic induction, except
after long and repeated efforts. On the contrary,
let a person have certain characteristic mental
and emotional habits, then these may be aroused
in them with the greatest ease by means of
psychic induction. For instance, if a person is
characteristically and habitually peaceful, mild
and calm, it will be very difficult to arouse in him
by psychic induction the vibrations of anger,
fight and excitement. On the other hand, if the
other person is combative, fierce and easily ex-
cited to wrath, it is the easiest possible thing to
arouse these feelings in him by psychic induction.
So much for ordinary psychic induction; let us
290 CLAIRVOYANCE
now consider indirect psychic induction, in which
the same principle operates.
In indirect psychic induction, that is to say
in cases in which psychic vibrations are aroused
by induction without deliberate attempt or de-
sign to influence any particular person or per-
sons, there is noted the manifestation of a pecul-
iar law of attraction and repulsion along psychic
lines. This psychic law operates in the direction
of attracting to oneself other persons who, ac-
tively or passively, vibrate on the same note, or
on some note or notes in general harmony there-
with. In the same way, the law causes you to
repel other persons who vibrate on a note or
notes in general inharmony or discord to your-
self. So, in short, we go through life attracting
or repelling, psychically, others in harmonious
or inharmonious psychic relation to us, respect-
ively. An understanding of this law and its
workings will throw light upon many things in
your life which you have not understood previ-
ously.
You of course understand that you are con-
stantly radiating currents of psychic vibrations,
some of which flow out to great distances from
you, and affect others often far removed from
you in space. But you may not also know that
on the astral plane there is manifesting a similar
sequence of cause and effect. A strong emo-
tional vibration, or a strong desire or will, tends
-o manifest on the astral plane by attracting or
repelling others in psychic harmony or inhar-
mony with you. This phenomenon is not so com-
LAWS OF PSYCHIC ATTRACTION 291
mon as is that of ordinary thought vibrations
from brain to brain, but it is far more common
that is generally supposed. It is particularly
marked in cases of men of strong desire and will,
and strong creative imagination. These vibra-
tions awakening response in the minds of those
in harmony with them, tend to draw to one those
other persons whose general character will fit
in with the desires and ideas of the first person,
or to repel those who are not harmonious there-
with. This explains the peculiar phenomenon of
strong men in business, politics and other walks
of life, drawing and attracting to them other
men who will fit in with their general plans and
aims.
This law works two ways. Not only do you
draw such persons to you as will fit in with your
plans and purposes, but you are attracted to them
by the same law. Not only this, but you will find
that through the peculiar workings of this law
even things and circumstances, as well as per-
sons, will seem to be moulded by your strong
desires and ideas, providing your psychic vibra-
tions are sufficiently strong and clear. Have you
never noticed how a strong, resourceful magnetic
man will seem to actually draw to him the per-
sons, things and circumstances that he needs to
carry out and manifest his plans and designs.
To many, not understanding this great law, these
things have seemed positively uncanny and mys-
terious. But, now-a-days, the big men of busi-
ness and politics are beginning to understand
292 CLAIRVOYANCE
these psychic laws, and to apply them delib-
erately and with purpose.
Some of the great leaders in the business
world, and in politics, are known to deliberately
start into operation strong psychic vibrations,
and to send out strong psychic currents of at-
traction, by the methods that I have already ex-
plained to you. They, of course, are filled with
a more than ordinary degree of desire and will
and, in the second place, they create very strong
and clear mental pictures of their plans working
out successfully to a finish; then concentrate
strongly on the thing; and lo! the effect is felt
by all hands and on all sides. They "treat the
public" (to use the term favored by some of the
metaphysical cults of the day) by holding the
mental picture of that which they strongly de-
sire to come to pass, and by concentrating their
thought and will strongly upon it.
A favorite mental picture of some of these
men (who have been instructed by teachers of
occultism), is that of themselves as the centre of
a great psychic whirlpool, drawing to themselves
the persons, things and circumstances calculated
to bring success and realization to them. Others
picture their thought-vibrations flowing from
them like the rings in a pond into which a stone
had been dropped, influencing a constantly
widening circle of other persons; then they pic-
ture the persons being drawn to them in the man-
ner just mentioned. They persist in this prac-
tice day after day, week after week, month after
LAWS OF PSYCHIC ATTRACTION 293
month, year after year — is it any wonder that
they draw to themselves that which they desire?
Other persons of lesser caliber take similar ad-
vantage of the law in the same way, but on a
smaller scale. In every community there are
certain persons who seem to draw to themselves
the patronage and custom of the community, in
some peculiar way. In most cases this may be
traced back to some form of psychic influence. I
do not mean that these persons consciously
and deliberately set these forces into operation.
On the contrary, many of them do so more or
less unconsciously, and without a knowledge of
the underlying psychic principles involved. Such
persons have stumbled on a portion of the psychic
laws, and have used them more or less uncon-
sciously and without understanding the real rea-
son of the happening. They found out that cer-
tain mental states and certain mental pictures
tended to produce certain results — that they
"worked out" — and so they continued them.
Some of these men think of the whole thing as
something supernatural, and get to believe that
they are being helped by some supernatural
power; whereas, they are simply operating un-
der a universal psychic law of cause and effect.
In America a number of teachers and writers
have devoted much attention to this phase of the
general subject of psychic influence. Cults have
been formed upon this general basis, the main
idea of their followers being that of attracting
financial and other success by means of this
phase of psychic force. One of the leading writ-
294 CLAIRVOYANCE
ers along this line, says : "An individual who has
cultivated the faculty of concentration, and has
acquired the art of creating sharp, clear, strong,
mental images, and who when engaged in an un-
dertaking will so charge his mind with the idea
of success, will be bound to become an attracting
centre. And if such an individual will keep his
mental picture ever in his mind, even though it
be in the background of his mind, when he is at-
tending to the details and planning of his affairs
— if he will give his mental picture a prominent
place in his mental gallery, taking a frequent
glance at it, and using his will upon it to create
new scenes of actual success, he will create for
himself a centre of radiating thought that will
surely be felt by those coming within its field of
influence.
"Such a man frequently 'sees people as coming
to him and his enterprises, and as falling in line
with his plans. He mentally 'sees' money flowing
in to him, and all of his plans working out right.
In short, he mentally imagines each step of his
plans a little ahead of the time for their execu-
tion, and he concentrates forcibly and earnestly
upon them. It is astonishing to witness how
events, people, circumstances, and things seem
to move in place in actual life as if urged by some
mighty power to serve to materialize the con-
ditions so imaged in the mind of the man. But,
understand, there must be active mental effort
behind the imaging. Day dreamers do not mate-
rialize thought — they merely dissipate energy.
The man who converts thought in activity and
LAWS OF PSYCHIC ATTRACTION 295
material being throws energy into the task, and
puts forth his will-power through the pictured
image. Without the rays of the will there will
be no picture projected, no matter how beauti-
fully the imagination has projected it. Thought
pictured in mental images, and then vitalized by
the force of the desire, and will, tend to objectify
themselves into material being."
The student will be interested in reading and
hearing the various theories and explanations
given by different writers and teachers to account
for the phenomena of psychic influence. Once he
has grasped the real scientific principles involved,
he will be able to see the same in operation in all
of the cases cited by the different teachers and
writers, and will find that this fundamental prin-
ciple fully explains and accounts for all of these
cases, no matter how puzzling they may seem,
or how mysterious they may be claimed to be
by those mentioning them. Truth is very simple
when we brush away the fantastic dressings
which have been placed around it by those who
have lacked knowledge of the true fundamental
principles.
We see this same law or principle operating in
very many different ways from those previously
mentioned. For instance, we frequently find
cases in which one person has a strong desire for
a certain kind of assistance in his business or
other work. He has almost given up hope of
finding the right kind of person, for those whom
he has tried have failed to measure up the re-
quirements of the situation. If he will (and he
296 CLAIRVOYANCE
sometimes does) follow the general plan just
mentioned, he will set into operation the psychic
forces which will attract that person to him, and
him to that person. In some peculiar way, the
two will be thrown together, and the combina-
tion will work out to the best advantage of both.
In these cases, each person is seeking the other,
and the psychic forces of attraction, once set into
operation, serve to bring them together.
In like manner, one often draws to himself cer-
tain knowledge and information that he requires
or is desirous of gaining. But, and you must al-
ways remember this, no miracle is worked, for
it is simply a matter of the working out of nat-
ural laws of cause and effect — attraction and re-
sponse to attraction — on the psychic or astral
plane. Such a person will accidently ( !) run
across some other person who will be led to give
him the key to the knowledge he seeks. Perhaps
a book may be mentioned, or some reference to
some writer be made. If the hint is followed up,
the desired information comes to light. Many
persons have had the psychic experience of be-
ing led to some book store and induced to exam-
ine a particular shelf of books, whereupon a par-
ticular book presents itself which changes the
whole course of the person's life. Or, perhaps,
one will pick up a newspaper apparently at ran-
dom, and without purpose; and therein will find
some information, or at least a hint in the direc-
tion where the information may be found. When
one accustoms himself to the workings of psychic
forces, these things soon become accepted as a
LAWS OF PSYCHIC ATTRACTION 297
matter of course, and cease to arouse wonder or
surprise. The workings of the Psychic Law of
Attraction is seen to be as natural and invariable
as the law of gravitation, or magnetic attraction,
once one has mastered its principles, and learned
the methods of its application. Surely such a
wonderful law is well worth study, attention, in-
vestigation, and mastery, isn't it?
A writer along the lines of Mental Science,
which is really based on the principles which have
been stated in this book, has the following to say
regarding his system : "Wonderful results arise
by reason of what has been called 'The Law of
Attraction/ by the workings of which each per-
son is continually drawing to himself the people,
things, objects, and even circumstances in har-
mony and accord with his prevailing mental
states. Like attracts like, and the mental states
determine that which one draws to himself. If
you are not satisfied with what is coming to you,
start to work and change your mental attitudes
and mental states, and you will see a change
gradually setting in, and then the things that
you want will begin to come your way. * * *
A most important fact about the effect of mental
vibrations upon people lies in the principle that
one is more affected by vibrations in harmony
with his own accustomed feelings and mental
states, than by those of an opposite nature. A
man who is full of evil schemes, and selfish aims,
is more apt to be caught up by similar vibrations
than one who lives above that plane of thought.
He is more easily tempted by evil suggestions
298 CLAIRVOYANCE
and influences, than one to whom these things
are abhorrent. And the same is true on every
plane. A man whose mental attitude is one of
confidence and fearlessness, is not apt to be af-
fected by vibrations of a negative, pessimistic,
gloomy nature, and vice versa. Therefore, if you
wish to receive the vibrations of the thoughts and
feelings of others, you must place yourself in a
mental attitude corresponding with those vibra-
tions which you wish to receive. And if you wish
to avoid vibrations of a certain kind, the best
way is to rise above them in your own mind, and
to cultivate the mental states opposite them. The
positive always overcomes the negative — and op-
timistic mental states are always positive to pes-
simistic mental states."
Another writer on, and practitioner of Mental
Science, in America, several years ago, explained
her theory and practice by means of the term "co-
relation of thoughts and things." She held that
when one thought positively, clearly and forcibly
of a thing, he "related" himself to that thing, and
tended to attract it to him, and to be attracted
toward it- She held that true wisdom consists
in so managing our thoughts that we shall relate
ourselves only to those things which we know to
be desirable and beneficial to ourselves, and to
avoid thinking of those which are harmful and
detrimental to us. The student of this book will
see how this practical Mental Scientist was really
using the same principles that we have examined
and become acquainted within this book, al-
though she called them by another name, and ex-
LAWS OF PSYCHIC ATTRACTION 299
plained them by another theory. At the bottom
of all the teachings and theories you will always
find the one same basic principle and universal
law.
The advanced student of occultism knows that
each and every one of us is really a creator of his
own circumstances, environment and conditions,
to a great extent. Each of us is able to so modify
our mental activities as to bring about such
changes in our environment and surroundings as
to actually re-create them. The things accom-
plished by successful men are really but mate-
rializations of that which they have previously
held in their mental vision. Everything is first
created on the psychic plane, and then manifested
in the physical world. All the great works of
man, the great bridges, great buildings, tunnels,
machinery, cities, railroads, canals, works of art,
musical compositions, etc., first existed in the
mind of their creators, and were then afterward
materialized in physical form and shape. And,
so you see we are proceeding with our work of
mental creations whenever we think and make
mental images. This, however, is no new teach-
ing. It is as old as the race of mankind. Over
twenty-five hundred years ago, Buddha said to
his disciples: "All that we are is the result of
what we have thought; it is founded on our
thoughts; it is made up of our thoughts."
I would be telling you but half the story did I
not warn you that strong Fear may play the part
ordinarily filled by Desire in the production of the
psychic phenomena of materialization of mental
300 CLAIRVOYANCE
pictures. Strange as it may appear at first, a
strong fear that a thing will come to pass will
act much the same as a strong desire that the
happening will occur. Consequently, many per-
sons by continually dwelling upon the thing that
they fear may happen to them, actually attract
that thing to them, just as if they had actually
desired and wished for it. I cannot go into occult
technicalities in explaining this strange fact; but
the gist of the secret may be said to consist in the
fact that the person clearly and vividly pictures
in his mind the thing that he fears may happen
to him. He thus creates a strong mental picture
or image of it, which sets into forces the at-
tractive power of psychic influence and draws the
feared thing into material reality. As Job said :
"The thing that I feared hath come upon me."
The moral of this is, of course, that persons
should learn to stamp out fear and mental images
of things feared. Instead, they should make
strong positive mental denials of the things that
they may find themselves fearing. They should
deny the reality of the feared thing, and assert
positively their own superiority to the thing, and
their power to overcome it.
A great religious cult has sprung into exist-
ence which makes a leading doctrine of this abil-
ity to materialize the things which one desires,
arid to deny out of existence undesirable things.
Many persons who have witnessed the wonder-
ful success of some of the followers of this cult
or organization, have been puzzled to account for
the same on scientific and rational grounds. A
LAWS OF PSYCHIC ATTRACTION 301
little understanding of fundamental occult and
psychic principles, as given in these lessons, will
show the "why and wherefore" of these strange
and wonderful manifestations. In this connec-
tion you must remember that the combined
thought of the thousands of persons composing
this cult or organization undoubtedly gives addi-
tional psychic force to the mental affirmations
and denials of the individual member thereof.
In past and present, and probably in future
time, there have been many instances of magical
procedures tending to bring about the results
that we have herein seen to come about by reason
of psychic influence, in some of its many phases.
These magic procedures have usually been ac-
companied by incantations, ceremonies, strange
rites, evocations, etc., which were supposed to
have great virtue in bringing about desired re-
sults. But the true occultists now know that
these ceremonies and rites were merely hopes to
the imagination and aids to faith, and thus tended
to bring about the psychic phenomena. There
was no virtue in these ceremonies themselves,
and the same results may be secured by simply
following the procedure outlined in this book.
The wonders of ancient magic have been repro-
duced by the modern occultists, without all the
mumbo-jumbo of the past rites and ceremonies.
A gifted English writer upon the subject of the
relation of mysticism and magic, sums up the gist
of the principles of Magic as follows :
"The central doctrine of Magic may now be
summed up thus:
302 CLAIRVOYANCE
"(1) That a supersensible and real cosmic
medium exists, which interpenetrates, influences,
and supports the tangible and apparent world,
and is amenable to the categories both of meta-
physics and of physics." [This of course is the
astral plane, which is the container of the subtle
form or framework of all that exists on the phys-
ical plane.]
"(2) That there is an established analogy and
equilibrium between the real (and unseen) world,
and the illusory manifestation that we call the
world of sense." [By this of course is meant the
correspondence and balance between the subtle
form of things and the material manifestation
thereof. Things created in the astral, tend to
materialize on the physical plane. All creation
proceeds from the astral to the physical.]
"(3) That this analogy may be discerned, and
this equilibrium controlled, by the disciplined will
of man, which thus becomes master of itself and
of fate." [The essence of Will consists of strong
desire accompanied by a clear mental picture of
the thing desired, and held steady and firm by
concentration.]
So you see by reference to the above very clear
statement of the central doctrine of Magic, and
my explanations thereof, that in these lessons
you have been taught the very essence of the
wonderful, mysterious ancient Magic, and its
modern counterpart. As for the various rites and
ceremonies, as I have said, these are mere sym-
bols and aids to mental imaging and concentra-
tion. As an eminent occultist once said, "Cere-
LAWS OF PSYCHIC ATTRACTION 303
monies being but artificial methods of creating
certain habits of the will, they cease to be neces-
sary when these habits have become fixed." The
master of occultism sees ceremonies, rites, and
ritual as but the playthings of the kindergarten
scholar — useful and important so far as they go.
but serving merely to teach the scholar, sooner
or later, that he may proceed without them.
In this chapter I have condensed enough in-
formation to fill a whole book. I trust that you
will study it carefully, and not miss its main
points.
LESSON XX.
PSYCHIC AND MAGNETIC HEALING
Probably no phase of psychic influence is more
familiar to the average person of the Western
world than is that of the healing of physical ills
and conditions by means of psychic influence un-
der one name or another. Great healing cults
and organizations have been built up upon this
basis, and the interest in the subject has taken on
the form of a great popular movement.
As is natural in cases of this kind, there have
been hundreds of theories advanced to account
for the phenomena of psychic healing, and a still
greater number of methods of treatments devised
to carry out the principles of the theories. Rang-
ing from the teaching of actual divine interposi-
tion and influence arising from certain forms of
belief and practice, covering many intermediate
stages, the theories even include a semi-mate-
rialistic hypothesis in which mind is considered
as an attribute of matter, but having a magic in-
fluence over the forms of matter when properly
applied. But it is worthy of note that no matter
what the general or particular theory, or what
the favored method of application, these healing
schools or cults, as well as the independent prac-
titioners, meet with a very fair degree of success
and perform quite a number of cures.
Many of these Western advocates and practi-
tioners of psychic healing practically hold that
the whole system is of very recent discovery, and
PSYCHIC, MAGNETIC HEALING 305
that it has nothing whatsoever to do with ordi-
nary occult science. The occultists however are
able to smile at these ideas and beliefs, for they
not only recognize the general principles in-
volved, but they also are aware that these prin-
ciples, and their application, have been known
to advanced occultists for thousands of years. I
do not say this in any dispargement of the mod-
erns schools of psychic healing, for I am in full
sympathy with their great work; I merely men-
tion the matter that the student may get the
right historical perspective in considering this
phase of psychic phenomena and influence.
So far as the methods of application are con-
cerned, the true occultist recognizes that most of
the methods and forms of treatment are but out-
ward cloaks or disguises for the real psychic heal-
ing principle. The gist of the real methods is to
be found in the principles of the application of
psychic influence which I have presented to you
in these lessons, viz: (1) Strong desire to make
the cure; (2) clear mental image or picture of
the desired condition as actually present in the
patient at this time; and (3) concentration of the
attention and mind of the healer, so as to bring to
a focus to two preceding mental states. Here
you have the real secret of psychic healing meth-
ods— the rest are all elaborations thereof, dressed
up forms and ceremonies which affect the imag-
ination, faith, belief and confidence of the pa-
tient, and thus make the healing process much
easier. In fact, with the proper degree of faith
and confidence on the part of the patient, there
306 CLAIRVOYANCE
is but little need of a healer, for the patient may
treat and cure himself. However, in most cases,
the presence of the healer aids materially in
arousing the fate and confidence of the patient,
and hastens the cure.
Again, so far as the theories underlying the
cures are concerned, occultists are able to reduce
them all to a single working theory or principle,
which includes all the rest. Brushing aside all
technical details, and all attempts to trace back
the healing process to the ultimate facts of the
universe, I may say that the gist of the principle
of all psychic healing is that of influencing the
astral foundation of the various organs and parts,
cells and centres, so as to make it proceed to
manifest a more perfect physical counterpart.
All psychic healing is really accomplished on the
astral body first — then the physical body re-
sponds to the renewed activities of its astral
counterpart. To get the real significance of this
statement it is necessary for you to realize just
what the astral body really is. This once
grasped, the difficulties vanish, and you are able
to form a clear conception of the entire matter
and process.
The astral body is a precise counterpart of the
physical body, its organs, its parts, its centres,
and its cells. In fact, the astral body is the pat-
tern upon which the physical body is material-
ized. The astral body is composed of an etheric
substance of a very high rate of vibration. In
one sense it may be considered as a very subtle
form of matter — in another as a semi-material-
PSYCHIC, MAGNETIC HEALING 307
ized form of force or energy. It is finer and more
subtle that the rarest vapors or gases known to
science. And, yet, it has a strong degree of
tenacity and cohesiveness that enables it to resist
attacks from the material side of nature. As I
have said, each organ, part, centre or cell, of the
physical body has its astral pattern or basis. In
fact, the physical body has been built up, in whole
and in all of its parts, on the pattern and base
of the astral body. Moreover, in case of im-
paired functioning of the physical organs or
parts, and impaired activity of the physical body,
its limbs, etc., if we can manage to arouse the ac-
tivities of the astral body we may cause it to re-
materialize or re-energize the physical body, and
thus restore health and activity to it. If the liver,
for instance, is not functioning properly, we pro-
ceed to start up the activities of the astral coun-
terpart of that organ, to the end that the physical
organ may be re-energized, and re-created in a
measure. All true psychic healing work is per-
formed on the astral plane, before it manifests on
the physical.
At this point, I should also call your attention
to the effect of "prana," or life energy, in some
cases of healing. This prana is what Western
healers mean when they speak of "human mag-
netism" in their healing work. So far from be-
ing an imaginary force, as claimed by the phys-
ical scientists and materialists, it is known to all
occultists as an active principle of the human
body, and as of great efficacy in the psychic treat-
ment of disease. I shall mention the details of
308 CLAIRVOYANCE
this form of treatment as we proceed — I mention
it at this place merely to call your attention to
the fact of its existence.
Before passing on to the consideration of other
phases of the subject before us, I would like to
call your attention to the fact that from the
earliest days of history there have been recorded
instances of some form of psychic healing. In
the earlier days the psychic healing work was left
entirely in the hands of the priesthood of the
various religions prevailing in the several coun-
ties of the world. Claiming to have an exclusive
divine sanction to perform healing work, these
priests used various ceremonies, rites, incanta-
tions, etc., in order to obtain their results. In
many cases these priests were ignorant of the
real psychic forces invoked and set into opera-
tion; they merely practiced methods which had
been found to work out effectively, and which
had been handed down to them by their predeces-
sors. In other cases, however, the priests un-
doubtedly were skilled occultists, and had a very
full knowledge of the forces they were using;
though, as the masses of the people were very
ignorant it was impossible to acquaint them with
these things so far above their understanding;
and, consequently, the priests applied the heal-
ing forces under the disguise of their religious
ceremonies and rites.
From time to time, however, as civilization
progressed, there came into prominence persons
who worked cures of physical ills by means of
magical ceremonies and other similar methods,
PSYCHIC, MAGNETIC HEALING 309
but who were outside of the priesthood. Some of
these men undoubtedly had a very fair knowl-
edge of the real secret of their cures, though they
disguised them to suit the mental condition of
their patients, and, also, probably for purposes of
self glorification. In other cases, however, it is
probable that these healers had merely stumbled
across the fact that certain things said in a cer-
tain way tended to work cures; or that certain
physical objects seemed to have therapeutic vir-
tue. They did not realize that the whole healing
virtue of their systems depended upon the strong
idea in their own minds, coupled with the strong
faith and confidence in the mind of the patient.
And so the work went on.
In some of the oldest records of the human
race, the scriptures of the various peoples, we
find that "laying on of hands" was the favorite
method employed by the holy men and priests,
and other performing healing work. From the
first there seems to have been an almost in-
stinctive recognition on the part of man of the
fact that there is a healing power in the touch of
the hand. Even ignorant and savage mothers
instinctively apply their hands to the hurt bodies
of their children — a custom that has its coun-
terpart in civilized races, by the way. The child
is taught to expect physical relief from the ap-
plication of the mother's hands, and its mind at
once pictures relief. Not only is the mental pic-
ture created, but the desire and confidence is es-
tablished in the minds of both persons. The same
thing is true of all "laying on of hands," and thus
310 CLAIRVOYANCE
are the principles of all psychic influence brought
into play. But this is not all there is to it. In
the first place, there is an actual transferrence of
prana from the body of the healer to that of the
patient, which serves to energize and revitalize
the cells and centres of the body of the latter. In
the second place, there is the effect upon the
astral body of the patient, which tends to mate-
rialize better physical conditions. In the third
place, there is that combination and union of the
minds of the two persons, which gives extra force
and power to psychic influence. Is it any won-
der that cures take place under these circum-
stances?
In the modern revival of the almost lost art
and science of psychic healing among the gen-
eral public, there has been unusual stress laid
upon the feature of "absent healing," in which
the patient and the healer are not in each other's
presence. To many this has seemed actually
miraculous, and as a positive proof of divine in-
terposition. But a little thought will show the
student that such cures are not unknown in the
pages of history, as a casual examination of the
sacred books of almost any religion will show.
Moreover, the student will see that to the effect
of certain principles of psychic influence there
needs but to be added the principles of telepathic
communication, or, better still, the principles of
astral communication by some phases of clair-
voyance, to account for the entire phenomena of
"absent healing."
Space is no barrier on the astral plane, as you
PSYCHIC, MAGNETIC HEALING 311
have seen in the preceding chapters of this book.
Once the en rapport condition is established be-
tween healer and patient, and the rest is simple —
the astral body is induced to energize more act-
ively, and as a result the physical manifestation
is improved and normal functioning restored.
Of course, all this is wonderful enough — all
psychic phenomena is, for that matter; but, we
see that we do not have to go outside of estab-
lished occult laws, principles and facts in order
to account for some of these modern miracles
which have puzzled and perplexed so many good
persons who have not known of the occult teach-
ings, and who fear that the world is being turned
upside down, and Nature's laws overturned by
these "new fangled" ideas and methods .
Perhaps the most simple method of healing by
psychic influence is that which is at the same time
the oldest method, i. e., the "laying on of hands."
This method was revived about twenty years ago
in America and Europe by the new school of
"magnetic healing" which sprung rapidly into
public favor. The other schools of psychic heal-
ing, generally known as "mental healing,'' "spir-
itual healing," "divine healing," etc., generally
frown upon the use of the hands in psychic heal-
ing, deeming it "too material," and too much
allied to hypnotism, etc. But this view is quite
bigoted and narrow, for this method has no rela-
tion to hypnotism, and, moreover, it gives the pa-
tient the benefit of the flow of prana from the
healer, while at the same time producing the
312 CLAIRVOYANCE
psychic effect on the astral body, as I have just
mentioned.
I take the liberty of quoting here something
on this subject from my little book entitled "The
Human Aura." In the chapter of that book de-
voted to the consideration of the subject of
"Auric Magnetism," I said: "In cases of mag-
netic healing, etc., the healer by an effort of his
will (sometimes unconsciously applied) projects
a supply of his pranic aura vibrations into the
body of his patient, by way of the nervous sys-
tem of the patient, and also by means of what
may be called the induction of the aura itself.
The mere presence of a person strongly charged
with prana, is often enough to cause an overflow
into the aura of other persons, with a resulting
feeling of new strength and energy. By the use
of the hands of the healer, a heightened effect is
produced, by reason of certain properties inher-
ent in the nervous system of both healer and pa-
tient. There is even a flow of etheric substance
from the aura of the healer to that of the patient,
in cases in which the vitality of the latter is very
low. Many a healer has actually, and literally,
pumped his life force and etheric substance into
the body of his patient, when the latter was sink-
ing into the weakness which precedes death, and
has by so doing been able to bring him back to
strength and life. This is practically akin to the
transfusion of blood — except that it is upon the
psychic plane instead of the physical."
But the true "magnetic healer" (call him by
whatever name you wish) does not make this
PSYCHIC, MAGNETIC HEALING 313
pranic treatment the all-in-all of his psychic
treatment. On the contrary it is but the less
subtle part, which leads up to the higher phases.
While treating his patients by the laying on of
hands, he, at the same time, strives to induce in
the mind of the patient the mental image of re-
stored health and physical strength; he pictures
the diseased organ as restored to health and nor-
mal functioning; he sees the entire physiological
machinery operating properly, the work of nutri-
tion, assimilation, and excretion going on nat-
urally and normally. By proper words of advice
and encouragement he awakens hope and con-
fidence in the mind of the patient, and thus ob-
tains the co-operation of that mind in connection
to his own mental efforts. The astral body re-
sponds to this treatment, and begins to energize
the physical organs and cells into normal activity
— and the journey toward health is begun.
[In the little book just mention, "The Human
Aura," I gave some valuable information regard-
ing the influence of colors in psychic healing,
which I do not reproduce here as it is outside the
scope and field of the present lessons. Those who
may feel interested in the subject are respectfully
referred to the little manual itself. It is sold for
a nominal price by the publishers of the present
work.]
In the form of psychic treatment which comes
under the head of Suggestive Therapeutics,
great insistence is laid upon the verbal suggestion
to the patient, on the part of the healer. The pa-
tient is told that he will get well; that his or-
314 CLAIRVOYANCE
gans will function normally; etc., etc. But the
student of the present lessons will readily see that
the only virtue in the spoken words consists in
their power to evoke and induce the mental
image of the desired condition in the mind of the
patient. The mental picture thus evoked pro-
duces a corresponding effect in the astral body of
the patient, and sets into operation the mate-
rialization of desired results. In addition, the
words produce a strong mental picture in the
mind of the healer himself, and thus give form
and strength to his psychic vibrations which are
being poured out toward the patient. This is
really the secret of suggestive treatment.
The many cults of metaphysical healing, in
America and Europe, -lay great stress upon what
they call "affirmations," which are but state-
ments of the patient of his or her faith in the heal-
ing power of God, or of Mind, or Spirit, or Prin-
ciple (different names are used). The patient
naturally has confidence aroused, and as nat-
urally begins to picture the desired condition;
this in turn reacting upon the astral body, and
this upon the physical body or organ. In addi-
tion, the healer's mind is also set to work in the
same way, and sets into motion the healing
psychic forces in the way just mentioned. You
will notice that the same principle is always in-
volved and set into operation and manifestation.
There is no particular virtue in the form of af-
firmation used by the healer or patient, except
the important virtue of being able to arouse
strong mental pictures of restored health, proper
PSYCHIC, MAGNETIC HEALING 315
functioning, etc. There is of course this also:
certain forms of affirmations or mental state-
ments are better suited than others to the par-
ticular wants of certain persons. For instance, a
very religious person will be aroused better by-
affirmations and statements filled with religious
sentiments and ideas; while a person of a purely-
scientific turn of mind will receive more benefit
from affirmations in which the precise physiolog-
ical functions are specifically mentioned; while
the person who is fond of mystery and strange
ceremonies will be better served in the affirma-
tions or statements taken in the form of some
magical incantation, etc. The difference, how-
ever, lies in the mind of the patient, rather than
in the words themselves. Words are merely in-
vokers of ideas — symbols of ideas. In them-
selves, words are nothing — ideas are everything.
If you wish to treat yourself psychically for
some physical disorder, or if you wish to do good
to others in the same way, you have but to put
into operation the general principles of psychic
influence herein described. That is to say, you
must first be filled with the strong desire and
wish to make the cure; then you must make a
strong mental image of the desired result, as
actually present. (Do not think of it as "going
to be;" instead say and think that it "is now!") ;
then concentrate the attention firmly and posi-
tively upon the idea. You may aid yourself and
others by affirmations or auto-suggestions
(words creating desired ideas and mental pic-
tures) if you wish — you may get better results
316 CLAIRVOYANCE
in this way. In this connection, let me remind
you that the healing work in many cases consists
largely in placing proper mental pictures in the
mind of the patient, thereby displacing improper
and harmful mental pictures of disease, etc.,
which have been given lodgment there before.
Many persons are sick because of improper and
harmful mental pictures that they have allowed
to be placed there by the suggestions of others.
Fear and dread of disease often acts to bring
about the feared condition, for reasons that you
can readily see.
And, now, finally for the work of "absent heal-
ing" by psychic influence. I can state this to
you very simply; it is this: take what I have just
told you regarding personal treatments, and
combine it with what I have told you in previous
lessons about "long distance psychic influence"
— then you will have the whole thing. Here is a
sample of an effective distant treatment; or "ab-
sent treatment," to use the popular term — it may
be varied and enlarged up to fit individual cases :
Sit quietly in your own room, inducing a calm,
peaceful mental attitude and state. Then (in the
way already told you in this book) make a men-
tal picture of the patient as sitting opposite to
you, or lying down in front of you. If you have
never seen the patient, make simply a mental
image of a man, or a woman, as the case may be,
and think of the figure as being the patient. The
best practitioners of distant psychic healing pro-
duce such a strong mental image of the patient
that they can often actually "feel" his or her
PSYCHIC, MAGNETIC HEALING 317
presence. (This of course is the result of a sim-
ple form of clairvoyance.) Then make a strong
mental picture of the condition that you wish to
induce in the patient — the healthy physical con-
dition of the organ, or part or body, as the case
may be. See this condition as existing at the
present time, and not as merely to come in the
future. At the same time, you will do well to
mentally speak to the patient, just as you would
in case he or she were sitting before you in the
physical body. Tell the patient just what you
would in such case. Pour in the suggestions, or
affirmations, or whatever you may wish to call
them. In some cases in which an excellent en
rapport condition is established, patients become
aware of the treatment, and sometimes can al-
most see and feel the presence of the healer.
A prominent Mental Scientist, of America, in-
structs his pupils to consider each of the organs
of the patient, or of themselves, as having a sepa-
rate intelligence; and, therefore, to "speak up to
it" as if it really understood what was being said
to its organ-mind. I would say that such form
of treatment would be calculated to bring about
very good results, indeed. The principle of con-
centration and mental picturing would be in-
voked very strongly in such a case, and the astral
counterpart of the organ should respond to such
treatment quickly and effectively. It is an occult
fact that there is mind in every organ and cell of
the body, and if the same is awakened in the
astral counterpart, it will respond to the com-
mand, suggestion, or direction. The writer in
318 CLAIRVOYANCE
question evidently is well acquainted with this
occult law, judging from his other writings, and
has simply veiled his knowledge with this easily
understood method of treatment which undoubt-
edly will "do the work," to use the American
term.
Finally, no matter what may be the theory, or
method, given in connection with psychic heal-
ing of any or all kinds, you will find the same
general principles underlying it that have been
presented over and over again in this book. In
fact, many purely material and physical remedies
owe their success to the fact that they appeal to
the imagination of the patient, and also inspire
confidence in him. Anything that will inspire
confidence, faith and hope in the mind of a pa-
tient, and will bring to his mind strong mental
pictures of restored health and normal function-
ing of his organs — that thing will make for
health for him. So, there you have the whole
theory and practice in a sentence!
I would remind the student that these are not
lessons to be read but once and then laid aside.
In order to get from them all that they contain
for you, you will find it necessary to read them
several times, with a reasonable interval between
readings for the knowledge to sink into your
mind. I feel sure that you will find with each
reading that there are many points that you over-
looked before. The lessons cover a wide field,
PSYCHIC, MAGNETIC HEALING 319
with many little excursions into bye-paths and
lanes of thought. I trust that the reading and
study will make you not only a wiser person, but
also a stronger and more efficient one. I thank
you for your kind attention, and trust that we
shall meet again in the future.
FINIS.
UC SOUTHERN REGK
A 000 760 443 2
/